initial commit of ebook 561HEADmain

1 files changed, 8733 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/561.txt b/561.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..38f2f67
--- /dev/null
+++ b/561.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8733 @@
+The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Further Adventures of Robinson Crusoe, by
+Daniel Defoe
+
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+
+
+
+Title: The Further Adventures of Robinson Crusoe
+
+
+Author: Daniel Defoe
+
+
+
+Release Date: January 18, 2007  [eBook #561]
+Last updated: February 25, 2012
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII)
+
+
+***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FURTHER ADVENTURES OF ROBINSON CRUSOE***
+
+
+
+
+Transcribed from the 1919 Seeley, Sevice & Co edition by David Price,
+email ccx074@pglaf.org
+
+
+
+
+
+THE FURTHER ADVENTURES OF ROBINSON CRUSOE
+
+
+CHAPTER I--REVISITS ISLAND
+
+
+That homely proverb, used on so many occasions in England, viz. "That
+what is bred in the bone will not go out of the flesh," was never more
+verified than in the story of my Life.  Any one would think that after
+thirty-five years' affliction, and a variety of unhappy circumstances,
+which few men, if any, ever went through before, and after near seven
+years of peace and enjoyment in the fulness of all things; grown old, and
+when, if ever, it might be allowed me to have had experience of every
+state of middle life, and to know which was most adapted to make a man
+completely happy; I say, after all this, any one would have thought that
+the native propensity to rambling which I gave an account of in my first
+setting out in the world to have been so predominant in my thoughts,
+should be worn out, and I might, at sixty one years of age, have been a
+little inclined to stay at home, and have done venturing life and fortune
+any more.
+
+Nay, farther, the common motive of foreign adventures was taken away in
+me, for I had no fortune to make; I had nothing to seek: if I had gained
+ten thousand pounds I had been no richer; for I had already sufficient
+for me, and for those I had to leave it to; and what I had was visibly
+increasing; for, having no great family, I could not spend the income of
+what I had unless I would set up for an expensive way of living, such as
+a great family, servants, equipage, gaiety, and the like, which were
+things I had no notion of, or inclination to; so that I had nothing,
+indeed, to do but to sit still, and fully enjoy what I had got, and see
+it increase daily upon my hands.  Yet all these things had no effect upon
+me, or at least not enough to resist the strong inclination I had to go
+abroad again, which hung about me like a chronic distemper.  In
+particular, the desire of seeing my new plantation in the island, and the
+colony I left there, ran in my head continually.  I dreamed of it all
+night, and my imagination ran upon it all day: it was uppermost in all my
+thoughts, and my fancy worked so steadily and strongly upon it that I
+talked of it in my sleep; in short, nothing could remove it out of my
+mind: it even broke so violently into all my discourses that it made my
+conversation tiresome, for I could talk of nothing else; all my discourse
+ran into it, even to impertinence; and I saw it myself.
+
+I have often heard persons of good judgment say that all the stir that
+people make in the world about ghosts and apparitions is owing to the
+strength of imagination, and the powerful operation of fancy in their
+minds; that there is no such thing as a spirit appearing, or a ghost
+walking; that people's poring affectionately upon the past conversation
+of their deceased friends so realises it to them that they are capable of
+fancying, upon some extraordinary circumstances, that they see them, talk
+to them, and are answered by them, when, in truth, there is nothing but
+shadow and vapour in the thing, and they really know nothing of the
+matter.
+
+For my part, I know not to this hour whether there are any such things as
+real apparitions, spectres, or walking of people after they are dead; or
+whether there is anything in the stories they tell us of that kind more
+than the product of vapours, sick minds, and wandering fancies: but this
+I know, that my imagination worked up to such a height, and brought me
+into such excess of vapours, or what else I may call it, that I actually
+supposed myself often upon the spot, at my old castle, behind the trees;
+saw my old Spaniard, Friday's father, and the reprobate sailors I left
+upon the island; nay, I fancied I talked with them, and looked at them
+steadily, though I was broad awake, as at persons just before me; and
+this I did till I often frightened myself with the images my fancy
+represented to me.  One time, in my sleep, I had the villainy of the
+three pirate sailors so lively related to me by the first Spaniard, and
+Friday's father, that it was surprising: they told me how they
+barbarously attempted to murder all the Spaniards, and that they set fire
+to the provisions they had laid up, on purpose to distress and starve
+them; things that I had never heard of, and that, indeed, were never all
+of them true in fact: but it was so warm in my imagination, and so
+realised to me, that, to the hour I saw them, I could not be persuaded
+but that it was or would be true; also how I resented it, when the
+Spaniard complained to me; and how I brought them to justice, tried them,
+and ordered them all three to be hanged.  What there was really in this
+shall be seen in its place; for however I came to form such things in my
+dream, and what secret converse of spirits injected it, yet there was, I
+say, much of it true.  I own that this dream had nothing in it literally
+and specifically true; but the general part was so true--the base;
+villainous behaviour of these three hardened rogues was such, and had
+been so much worse than all I can describe, that the dream had too much
+similitude of the fact; and as I would afterwards have punished them
+severely, so, if I had hanged them all, I had been much in the right, and
+even should have been justified both by the laws of God and man.
+
+But to return to my story.  In this kind of temper I lived some years; I
+had no enjoyment of my life, no pleasant hours, no agreeable diversion
+but what had something or other of this in it; so that my wife, who saw
+my mind wholly bent upon it, told me very seriously one night that she
+believed there was some secret, powerful impulse of Providence upon me,
+which had determined me to go thither again; and that she found nothing
+hindered me going but my being engaged to a wife and children.  She told
+me that it was true she could not think of parting with me: but as she
+was assured that if she was dead it would be the first thing I would do,
+so, as it seemed to her that the thing was determined above, she would
+not be the only obstruction; for, if I thought fit and resolved to
+go--[Here she found me very intent upon her words, and that I looked very
+earnestly at her, so that it a little disordered her, and she stopped.  I
+asked her why she did not go on, and say out what she was going to say?
+But I perceived that her heart was too full, and some tears stood in her
+eyes.]  "Speak out, my dear," said I; "are you willing I should
+go?"--"No," says she, very affectionately, "I am far from willing; but if
+you are resolved to go," says she, "rather than I would be the only
+hindrance, I will go with you: for though I think it a most preposterous
+thing for one of your years, and in your condition, yet, if it must be,"
+said she, again weeping, "I would not leave you; for if it be of Heaven
+you must do it, there is no resisting it; and if Heaven make it your duty
+to go, He will also make it mine to go with you, or otherwise dispose of
+me, that I may not obstruct it."
+
+This affectionate behaviour of my wife's brought me a little out of the
+vapours, and I began to consider what I was doing; I corrected my
+wandering fancy, and began to argue with myself sedately what business I
+had after threescore years, and after such a life of tedious sufferings
+and disasters, and closed in so happy and easy a manner; I, say, what
+business had I to rush into new hazards, and put myself upon adventures
+fit only for youth and poverty to run into?
+
+With those thoughts I considered my new engagement; that I had a wife,
+one child born, and my wife then great with child of another; that I had
+all the world could give me, and had no need to seek hazard for gain;
+that I was declining in years, and ought to think rather of leaving what
+I had gained than of seeking to increase it; that as to what my wife had
+said of its being an impulse from Heaven, and that it should be my duty
+to go, I had no notion of that; so, after many of these cogitations, I
+struggled with the power of my imagination, reasoned myself out of it, as
+I believe people may always do in like cases if they will: in a word, I
+conquered it, composed myself with such arguments as occurred to my
+thoughts, and which my present condition furnished me plentifully with;
+and particularly, as the most effectual method, I resolved to divert
+myself with other things, and to engage in some business that might
+effectually tie me up from any more excursions of this kind; for I found
+that thing return upon me chiefly when I was idle, and had nothing to do,
+nor anything of moment immediately before me.  To this purpose, I bought
+a little farm in the county of Bedford, and resolved to remove myself
+thither.  I had a little convenient house upon it, and the land about it,
+I found, was capable of great improvement; and it was many ways suited to
+my inclination, which delighted in cultivating, managing, planting, and
+improving of land; and particularly, being an inland country, I was
+removed from conversing among sailors and things relating to the remote
+parts of the world.  I went down to my farm, settled my family, bought
+ploughs, harrows, a cart, waggon-horses, cows, and sheep, and, setting
+seriously to work, became in one half-year a mere country gentleman.  My
+thoughts were entirely taken up in managing my servants, cultivating the
+ground, enclosing, planting, &c.; and I lived, as I thought, the most
+agreeable life that nature was capable of directing, or that a man always
+bred to misfortunes was capable of retreating to.
+
+I farmed upon my own land; I had no rent to pay, was limited by no
+articles; I could pull up or cut down as I pleased; what I planted was
+for myself, and what I improved was for my family; and having thus left
+off the thoughts of wandering, I had not the least discomfort in any part
+of life as to this world.  Now I thought, indeed, that I enjoyed the
+middle state of life which my father so earnestly recommended to me, and
+lived a kind of heavenly life, something like what is described by the
+poet, upon the subject of a country life:--
+
+   "Free from vices, free from care,
+   Age has no pain, and youth no snare."
+
+But in the middle of all this felicity, one blow from unseen Providence
+unhinged me at once; and not only made a breach upon me inevitable and
+incurable, but drove me, by its consequences, into a deep relapse of the
+wandering disposition, which, as I may say, being born in my very blood,
+soon recovered its hold of me; and, like the returns of a violent
+distemper, came on with an irresistible force upon me.  This blow was the
+loss of my wife.  It is not my business here to write an elegy upon my
+wife, give a character of her particular virtues, and make my court to
+the sex by the flattery of a funeral sermon.  She was, in a few words,
+the stay of all my affairs; the centre of all my enterprises; the engine
+that, by her prudence, reduced me to that happy compass I was in, from
+the most extravagant and ruinous project that filled my head, and did
+more to guide my rambling genius than a mother's tears, a father's
+instructions, a friend's counsel, or all my own reasoning powers could
+do.  I was happy in listening to her, and in being moved by her
+entreaties; and to the last degree desolate and dislocated in the world
+by the loss of her.
+
+When she was gone, the world looked awkwardly round me.  I was as much a
+stranger in it, in my thoughts, as I was in the Brazils, when I first
+went on shore there; and as much alone, except for the assistance of
+servants, as I was in my island.  I knew neither what to think nor what
+to do.  I saw the world busy around me: one part labouring for bread,
+another part squandering in vile excesses or empty pleasures, but equally
+miserable because the end they proposed still fled from them; for the men
+of pleasure every day surfeited of their vice, and heaped up work for
+sorrow and repentance; and the men of labour spent their strength in
+daily struggling for bread to maintain the vital strength they laboured
+with: so living in a daily circulation of sorrow, living but to work, and
+working but to live, as if daily bread were the only end of wearisome
+life, and a wearisome life the only occasion of daily bread.
+
+This put me in mind of the life I lived in my kingdom, the island; where
+I suffered no more corn to grow, because I did not want it; and bred no
+more goats, because I had no more use for them; where the money lay in
+the drawer till it grew mouldy, and had scarce the favour to be looked
+upon in twenty years.  All these things, had I improved them as I ought
+to have done, and as reason and religion had dictated to me, would have
+taught me to search farther than human enjoyments for a full felicity;
+and that there was something which certainly was the reason and end of
+life superior to all these things, and which was either to be possessed,
+or at least hoped for, on this side of the grave.
+
+But my sage counsellor was gone; I was like a ship without a pilot, that
+could only run afore the wind.  My thoughts ran all away again into the
+old affair; my head was quite turned with the whimsies of foreign
+adventures; and all the pleasant, innocent amusements of my farm, my
+garden, my cattle, and my family, which before entirely possessed me,
+were nothing to me, had no relish, and were like music to one that has no
+ear, or food to one that has no taste.  In a word, I resolved to leave
+off housekeeping, let my farm, and return to London; and in a few months
+after I did so.
+
+When I came to London, I was still as uneasy as I was before; I had no
+relish for the place, no employment in it, nothing to do but to saunter
+about like an idle person, of whom it may be said he is perfectly useless
+in God's creation, and it is not one farthing's matter to the rest of his
+kind whether he be dead or alive.  This also was the thing which, of all
+circumstances of life, was the most my aversion, who had been all my days
+used to an active life; and I would often say to myself, "A state of
+idleness is the very dregs of life;" and, indeed, I thought I was much
+more suitably employed when I was twenty-six days making a deal board.
+
+It was now the beginning of the year 1693, when my nephew, whom, as I
+have observed before, I had brought up to the sea, and had made him
+commander of a ship, was come home from a short voyage to Bilbao, being
+the first he had made.  He came to me, and told me that some merchants of
+his acquaintance had been proposing to him to go a voyage for them to the
+East Indies, and to China, as private traders.  "And now, uncle," says
+he, "if you will go to sea with me, I will engage to land you upon your
+old habitation in the island; for we are to touch at the Brazils."
+
+Nothing can be a greater demonstration of a future state, and of the
+existence of an invisible world, than the concurrence of second causes
+with the idea of things which we form in our minds, perfectly reserved,
+and not communicated to any in the world.
+
+My nephew knew nothing how far my distemper of wandering was returned
+upon me, and I knew nothing of what he had in his thought to say, when
+that very morning, before he came to me, I had, in a great deal of
+confusion of thought, and revolving every part of my circumstances in my
+mind, come to this resolution, that I would go to Lisbon, and consult
+with my old sea-captain; and if it was rational and practicable, I would
+go and see the island again, and what was become of my people there.  I
+had pleased myself with the thoughts of peopling the place, and carrying
+inhabitants from hence, getting a patent for the possession and I know
+not what; when, in the middle of all this, in comes my nephew, as I have
+said, with his project of carrying me thither in his way to the East
+Indies.
+
+I paused a while at his words, and looking steadily at him, "What devil,"
+said I, "sent you on this unlucky errand?"  My nephew stared as if he had
+been frightened at first; but perceiving that I was not much displeased
+at the proposal, he recovered himself.  "I hope it may not be an unlucky
+proposal, sir," says he.  "I daresay you would be pleased to see your new
+colony there, where you once reigned with more felicity than most of your
+brother monarchs in the world."  In a word, the scheme hit so exactly
+with my temper, that is to say, the prepossession I was under, and of
+which I have said so much, that I told him, in a few words, if he agreed
+with the merchants, I would go with him; but I told him I would not
+promise to go any further than my own island.  "Why, sir," says he, "you
+don't want to be left there again, I hope?"  "But," said I, "can you not
+take me up again on your return?"  He told me it would not be possible to
+do so; that the merchants would never allow him to come that way with a
+laden ship of such value, it being a month's sail out of his way, and
+might be three or four.  "Besides, sir, if I should miscarry," said he,
+"and not return at all, then you would be just reduced to the condition
+you were in before."
+
+This was very rational; but we both found out a remedy for it, which was
+to carry a framed sloop on board the ship, which, being taken in pieces,
+might, by the help of some carpenters, whom we agreed to carry with us,
+be set up again in the island, and finished fit to go to sea in a few
+days.  I was not long resolving, for indeed the importunities of my
+nephew joined so effectually with my inclination that nothing could
+oppose me; on the other hand, my wife being dead, none concerned
+themselves so much for me as to persuade me one way or the other, except
+my ancient good friend the widow, who earnestly struggled with me to
+consider my years, my easy circumstances, and the needless hazards of a
+long voyage; and above all, my young children.  But it was all to no
+purpose, I had an irresistible desire for the voyage; and I told her I
+thought there was something so uncommon in the impressions I had upon my
+mind, that it would be a kind of resisting Providence if I should attempt
+to stay at home; after which she ceased her expostulations, and joined
+with me, not only in making provision for my voyage, but also in settling
+my family affairs for my absence, and providing for the education of my
+children.  In order to do this, I made my will, and settled the estate I
+had in such a manner for my children, and placed in such hands, that I
+was perfectly easy and satisfied they would have justice done them,
+whatever might befall me; and for their education, I left it wholly to
+the widow, with a sufficient maintenance to herself for her care: all
+which she richly deserved; for no mother could have taken more care in
+their education, or understood it better; and as she lived till I came
+home, I also lived to thank her for it.
+
+My nephew was ready to sail about the beginning of January 1694-5; and I,
+with my man Friday, went on board, in the Downs, the 8th; having, besides
+that sloop which I mentioned above, a very considerable cargo of all
+kinds of necessary things for my colony, which, if I did not find in good
+condition, I resolved to leave so.
+
+First, I carried with me some servants whom I purposed to place there as
+inhabitants, or at least to set on work there upon my account while I
+stayed, and either to leave them there or carry them forward, as they
+should appear willing; particularly, I carried two carpenters, a smith,
+and a very handy, ingenious fellow, who was a cooper by trade, and was
+also a general mechanic; for he was dexterous at making wheels and hand-
+mills to grind corn, was a good turner and a good pot-maker; he also made
+anything that was proper to make of earth or of wood: in a word, we
+called him our Jack-of-all-trades.  With these I carried a tailor, who
+had offered himself to go a passenger to the East Indies with my nephew,
+but afterwards consented to stay on our new plantation, and who proved a
+most necessary handy fellow as could be desired in many other businesses
+besides that of his trade; for, as I observed formerly, necessity arms us
+for all employments.
+
+My cargo, as near as I can recollect, for I have not kept account of the
+particulars, consisted of a sufficient quantity of linen, and some
+English thin stuffs, for clothing the Spaniards that I expected to find
+there; and enough of them, as by my calculation might comfortably supply
+them for seven years; if I remember right, the materials I carried for
+clothing them, with gloves, hats, shoes, stockings, and all such things
+as they could want for wearing, amounted to about two hundred pounds,
+including some beds, bedding, and household stuff, particularly kitchen
+utensils, with pots, kettles, pewter, brass, &c.; and near a hundred
+pounds more in ironwork, nails, tools of every kind, staples, hooks,
+hinges, and every necessary thing I could think of.
+
+I carried also a hundred spare arms, muskets, and fusees; besides some
+pistols, a considerable quantity of shot of all sizes, three or four tons
+of lead, and two pieces of brass cannon; and, because I knew not what
+time and what extremities I was providing for, I carried a hundred
+barrels of powder, besides swords, cutlasses, and the iron part of some
+pikes and halberds.  In short, we had a large magazine of all sorts of
+store; and I made my nephew carry two small quarter-deck guns more than
+he wanted for his ship, to leave behind if there was occasion; so that
+when we came there we might build a fort and man it against all sorts of
+enemies.  Indeed, I at first thought there would be need enough for all,
+and much more, if we hoped to maintain our possession of the island, as
+shall be seen in the course of that story.
+
+I had not such bad luck in this voyage as I had been used to meet with,
+and therefore shall have the less occasion to interrupt the reader, who
+perhaps may be impatient to hear how matters went with my colony; yet
+some odd accidents, cross winds and bad weather happened on this first
+setting out, which made the voyage longer than I expected it at first;
+and I, who had never made but one voyage, my first voyage to Guinea, in
+which I might be said to come back again, as the voyage was at first
+designed, began to think the same ill fate attended me, and that I was
+born to be never contented with being on shore, and yet to be always
+unfortunate at sea.  Contrary winds first put us to the northward, and we
+were obliged to put in at Galway, in Ireland, where we lay wind-bound two-
+and-twenty days; but we had this satisfaction with the disaster, that
+provisions were here exceeding cheap, and in the utmost plenty; so that
+while we lay here we never touched the ship's stores, but rather added to
+them.  Here, also, I took in several live hogs, and two cows with their
+calves, which I resolved, if I had a good passage, to put on shore in my
+island; but we found occasion to dispose otherwise of them.
+
+We set out on the 5th of February from Ireland, and had a very fair gale
+of wind for some days.  As I remember, it might be about the 20th of
+February in the evening late, when the mate, having the watch, came into
+the round-house and told us he saw a flash of fire, and heard a gun
+fired; and while he was telling us of it, a boy came in and told us the
+boatswain heard another.  This made us all run out upon the quarter-deck,
+where for a while we heard nothing; but in a few minutes we saw a very
+great light, and found that there was some very terrible fire at a
+distance; immediately we had recourse to our reckonings, in which we all
+agreed that there could be no land that way in which the fire showed
+itself, no, not for five hundred leagues, for it appeared at WNW.  Upon
+this, we concluded it must be some ship on fire at sea; and as, by our
+hearing the noise of guns just before, we concluded that it could not be
+far off, we stood directly towards it, and were presently satisfied we
+should discover it, because the further we sailed, the greater the light
+appeared; though, the weather being hazy, we could not perceive anything
+but the light for a while.  In about half-an-hour's sailing, the wind
+being fair for us, though not much of it, and the weather clearing up a
+little, we could plainly discern that it was a great ship on fire in the
+middle of the sea.
+
+I was most sensibly touched with this disaster, though not at all
+acquainted with the persons engaged in it; I presently recollected my
+former circumstances, and what condition I was in when taken up by the
+Portuguese captain; and how much more deplorable the circumstances of the
+poor creatures belonging to that ship must be, if they had no other ship
+in company with them.  Upon this I immediately ordered that five guns
+should be fired, one soon after another, that, if possible, we might give
+notice to them that there was help for them at hand and that they might
+endeavour to save themselves in their boat; for though we could see the
+flames of the ship, yet they, it being night, could see nothing of us.
+
+We lay by some time upon this, only driving as the burning ship drove,
+waiting for daylight; when, on a sudden, to our great terror, though we
+had reason to expect it, the ship blew up in the air; and in a few
+minutes all the fire was out, that is to say, the rest of the ship sunk.
+This was a terrible, and indeed an afflicting sight, for the sake of the
+poor men, who, I concluded, must be either all destroyed in the ship, or
+be in the utmost distress in their boat, in the middle of the ocean;
+which, at present, as it was dark, I could not see.  However, to direct
+them as well as I could, I caused lights to be hung out in all parts of
+the ship where we could, and which we had lanterns for, and kept firing
+guns all the night long, letting them know by this that there was a ship
+not far off.
+
+About eight o'clock in the morning we discovered the ship's boats by the
+help of our perspective glasses, and found there were two of them, both
+thronged with people, and deep in the water.  We perceived they rowed,
+the wind being against them; that they saw our ship, and did their utmost
+to make us see them.  We immediately spread our ancient, to let them know
+we saw them, and hung a waft out, as a signal for them to come on board,
+and then made more sail, standing directly to them.  In little more than
+half-an-hour we came up with them; and took them all in, being no less
+than sixty-four men, women, and children; for there were a great many
+passengers.
+
+Upon inquiry we found it was a French merchant ship of three-hundred
+tons, home-bound from Quebec.  The master gave us a long account of the
+distress of his ship; how the fire began in the steerage by the
+negligence of the steersman, which, on his crying out for help, was, as
+everybody thought, entirely put out; but they soon found that some sparks
+of the first fire had got into some part of the ship so difficult to come
+at that they could not effectually quench it; and afterwards getting in
+between the timbers, and within the ceiling of the ship, it proceeded
+into the hold, and mastered all the skill and all the application they
+were able to exert.
+
+They had no more to do then but to get into their boats, which, to their
+great comfort, were pretty large; being their long-boat, and a great
+shallop, besides a small skiff, which was of no great service to them,
+other than to get some fresh water and provisions into her, after they
+had secured their lives from the fire.  They had, indeed, small hopes of
+their lives by getting into these boats at that distance from any land;
+only, as they said, that they thus escaped from the fire, and there was a
+possibility that some ship might happen to be at sea, and might take them
+in.  They had sails, oars, and a compass; and had as much provision and
+water as, with sparing it so as to be next door to starving, might
+support them about twelve days, in which, if they had no bad weather and
+no contrary winds, the captain said he hoped he might get to the banks of
+Newfoundland, and might perhaps take some fish, to sustain them till they
+might go on shore.  But there were so many chances against them in all
+these cases, such as storms, to overset and founder them; rains and cold,
+to benumb and perish their limbs; contrary winds, to keep them out and
+starve them; that it must have been next to miraculous if they had
+escaped.
+
+In the midst of their consternation, every one being hopeless and ready
+to despair, the captain, with tears in his eyes, told me they were on a
+sudden surprised with the joy of hearing a gun fire, and after that four
+more: these were the five guns which I caused to be fired at first seeing
+the light.  This revived their hearts, and gave them the notice, which,
+as above, I desired it should, that there was a ship at hand for their
+help.  It was upon the hearing of these guns that they took down their
+masts and sails: the sound coming from the windward, they resolved to lie
+by till morning.  Some time after this, hearing no more guns, they fired
+three muskets, one a considerable while after another; but these, the
+wind being contrary, we never heard.  Some time after that again they
+were still more agreeably surprised with seeing our lights, and hearing
+the guns, which, as I have said, I caused to be fired all the rest of the
+night.  This set them to work with their oars, to keep their boats ahead,
+at least that we might the sooner come up with them; and at last, to
+their inexpressible joy, they found we saw them.
+
+It is impossible for me to express the several gestures, the strange
+ecstasies, the variety of postures which these poor delivered people ran
+into, to express the joy of their souls at so unexpected a deliverance.
+Grief and fear are easily described: sighs, tears, groans, and a very few
+motions of the head and hands, make up the sum of its variety; but an
+excess of joy, a surprise of joy, has a thousand extravagances in it.
+There were some in tears; some raging and tearing themselves, as if they
+had been in the greatest agonies of sorrow; some stark raving and
+downright lunatic; some ran about the ship stamping with their feet,
+others wringing their hands; some were dancing, some singing, some
+laughing, more crying, many quite dumb, not able to speak a word; others
+sick and vomiting; several swooning and ready to faint; and a few were
+crossing themselves and giving God thanks.
+
+I would not wrong them either; there might be many that were thankful
+afterwards; but the passion was too strong for them at first, and they
+were not able to master it: then were thrown into ecstasies, and a kind
+of frenzy, and it was but a very few that were composed and serious in
+their joy.  Perhaps also, the case may have some addition to it from the
+particular circumstance of that nation they belonged to: I mean the
+French, whose temper is allowed to be more volatile, more passionate, and
+more sprightly, and their spirits more fluid than in other nations.  I am
+not philosopher enough to determine the cause; but nothing I had ever
+seen before came up to it.  The ecstasies poor Friday, my trusty savage,
+was in when he found his father in the boat came the nearest to it; and
+the surprise of the master and his two companions, whom I delivered from
+the villains that set them on shore in the island, came a little way
+towards it; but nothing was to compare to this, either that I saw in
+Friday, or anywhere else in my life.
+
+It is further observable, that these extravagances did not show
+themselves in that different manner I have mentioned, in different
+persons only; but all the variety would appear, in a short succession of
+moments, in one and the same person.  A man that we saw this minute dumb,
+and, as it were, stupid and confounded, would the next minute be dancing
+and hallooing like an antic; and the next moment be tearing his hair, or
+pulling his clothes to pieces, and stamping them under his feet like a
+madman; in a few moments after that we would have him all in tears, then
+sick, swooning, and, had not immediate help been had, he would in a few
+moments have been dead.  Thus it was, not with one or two, or ten or
+twenty, but with the greatest part of them; and, if I remember right, our
+surgeon was obliged to let blood of about thirty persons.
+
+There were two priests among them: one an old man, and the other a young
+man; and that which was strangest was, the oldest man was the worst.  As
+soon as he set his foot on board our ship, and saw himself safe, he
+dropped down stone dead to all appearance.  Not the least sign of life
+could be perceived in him; our surgeon immediately applied proper
+remedies to recover him, and was the only man in the ship that believed
+he was not dead.  At length he opened a vein in his arm, having first
+chafed and rubbed the part, so as to warm it as much as possible.  Upon
+this the blood, which only dropped at first, flowing freely, in three
+minutes after the man opened his eyes; a quarter of an hour after that he
+spoke, grew better, and after the blood was stopped, he walked about,
+told us he was perfectly well, and took a dram of cordial which the
+surgeon gave him.  About a quarter of an hour after this they came
+running into the cabin to the surgeon, who was bleeding a Frenchwoman
+that had fainted, and told him the priest was gone stark mad.  It seems
+he had begun to revolve the change of his circumstances in his mind, and
+again this put him into an ecstasy of joy.  His spirits whirled about
+faster than the vessels could convey them, the blood grew hot and
+feverish, and the man was as fit for Bedlam as any creature that ever was
+in it.  The surgeon would not bleed him again in that condition, but gave
+him something to doze and put him to sleep; which, after some time,
+operated upon him, and he awoke next morning perfectly composed and well.
+The younger priest behaved with great command of his passions, and was
+really an example of a serious, well-governed mind.  At his first coming
+on board the ship he threw himself flat on his face, prostrating himself
+in thankfulness for his deliverance, in which I unhappily and
+unseasonably disturbed him, really thinking he had been in a swoon; but
+he spoke calmly, thanked me, told me he was giving God thanks for his
+deliverance, begged me to leave him a few moments, and that, next to his
+Maker, he would give me thanks also.  I was heartily sorry that I
+disturbed him, and not only left him, but kept others from interrupting
+him also.  He continued in that posture about three minutes, or little
+more, after I left him, then came to me, as he had said he would, and
+with a great deal of seriousness and affection, but with tears in his
+eyes, thanked me, that had, under God, given him and so many miserable
+creatures their lives.  I told him I had no need to tell him to thank God
+for it, rather than me, for I had seen that he had done that already; but
+I added that it was nothing but what reason and humanity dictated to all
+men, and that we had as much reason as he to give thanks to God, who had
+blessed us so far as to make us the instruments of His mercy to so many
+of His creatures.  After this the young priest applied himself to his
+countrymen, and laboured to compose them: he persuaded, entreated,
+argued, reasoned with them, and did his utmost to keep them within the
+exercise of their reason; and with some he had success, though others
+were for a time out of all government of themselves.
+
+I cannot help committing this to writing, as perhaps it may be useful to
+those into whose hands it may fall, for guiding themselves in the
+extravagances of their passions; for if an excess of joy can carry men
+out to such a length beyond the reach of their reason, what will not the
+extravagances of anger, rage, and a provoked mind carry us to?  And,
+indeed, here I saw reason for keeping an exceeding watch over our
+passions of every kind, as well those of joy and satisfaction as those of
+sorrow and anger.
+
+We were somewhat disordered by these extravagances among our new guests
+for the first day; but after they had retired to lodgings provided for
+them as well as our ship would allow, and had slept heartily--as most of
+them did, being fatigued and frightened--they were quite another sort of
+people the next day.  Nothing of good manners, or civil acknowledgments
+for the kindness shown them, was wanting; the French, it is known, are
+naturally apt enough to exceed that way.  The captain and one of the
+priests came to me the next day, and desired to speak with me and my
+nephew; the commander began to consult with us what should be done with
+them; and first, they told us we had saved their lives, so all they had
+was little enough for a return to us for that kindness received.  The
+captain said they had saved some money and some things of value in their
+boats, caught hastily out of the flames, and if we would accept it they
+were ordered to make an offer of it all to us; they only desired to be
+set on shore somewhere in our way, where, if possible, they might get a
+passage to France.  My nephew wished to accept their money at first word,
+and to consider what to do with them afterwards; but I overruled him in
+that part, for I knew what it was to be set on shore in a strange
+country; and if the Portuguese captain that took me up at sea had served
+me so, and taken all I had for my deliverance, I must have been starved,
+or have been as much a slave at the Brazils as I had been at Barbary, the
+mere being sold to a Mahometan excepted; and perhaps a Portuguese is not
+a much better master than a Turk, if not in some cases much worse.
+
+I therefore told the French captain that we had taken them up in their
+distress, it was true, but that it was our duty to do so, as we were
+fellow-creatures; and we would desire to be so delivered if we were in
+the like or any other extremity; that we had done nothing for them but
+what we believed they would have done for us if we had been in their case
+and they in ours; but that we took them up to save them, not to plunder
+them; and it would be a most barbarous thing to take that little from
+them which they had saved out of the fire, and then set them on shore and
+leave them; that this would be first to save them from death, and then
+kill them ourselves: save them from drowning, and abandon them to
+starving; and therefore I would not let the least thing be taken from
+them.  As to setting them on shore, I told them indeed that was an
+exceeding difficulty to us, for that the ship was bound to the East
+Indies; and though we were driven out of our course to the westward a
+very great way, and perhaps were directed by Heaven on purpose for their
+deliverance, yet it was impossible for us wilfully to change our voyage
+on their particular account; nor could my nephew, the captain, answer it
+to the freighters, with whom he was under charter to pursue his voyage by
+way of Brazil; and all I knew we could do for them was to put ourselves
+in the way of meeting with other ships homeward bound from the West
+Indies, and get them a passage, if possible, to England or France.
+
+The first part of the proposal was so generous and kind they could not
+but be very thankful for it; but they were in very great consternation,
+especially the passengers, at the notion of being carried away to the
+East Indies; they then entreated me that as I was driven so far to the
+westward before I met with them, I would at least keep on the same course
+to the banks of Newfoundland, where it was probable I might meet with
+some ship or sloop that they might hire to carry them back to Canada.
+
+I thought this was but a reasonable request on their part, and therefore
+I inclined to agree to it; for indeed I considered that to carry this
+whole company to the East Indies would not only be an intolerable
+severity upon the poor people, but would be ruining our whole voyage by
+devouring all our provisions; so I thought it no breach of charter-party,
+but what an unforeseen accident made absolutely necessary to us, and in
+which no one could say we were to blame; for the laws of God and nature
+would have forbid that we should refuse to take up two boats full of
+people in such a distressed condition; and the nature of the thing, as
+well respecting ourselves as the poor people, obliged us to set them on
+shore somewhere or other for their deliverance.  So I consented that we
+would carry them to Newfoundland, if wind and weather would permit: and
+if not, I would carry them to Martinico, in the West Indies.
+
+The wind continued fresh easterly, but the weather pretty good; and as
+the winds had continued in the points between NE. and SE. a long time, we
+missed several opportunities of sending them to France; for we met
+several ships bound to Europe, whereof two were French, from St.
+Christopher's, but they had been so long beating up against the wind that
+they durst take in no passengers, for fear of wanting provisions for the
+voyage, as well for themselves as for those they should take in; so we
+were obliged to go on.  It was about a week after this that we made the
+banks of Newfoundland; where, to shorten my story, we put all our French
+people on board a bark, which they hired at sea there, to put them on
+shore, and afterwards to carry them to France, if they could get
+provisions to victual themselves with.  When I say all the French went on
+shore, I should remember that the young priest I spoke of, hearing we
+were bound to the East Indies, desired to go the voyage with us, and to
+be set on shore on the coast of Coromandel; which I readily agreed to,
+for I wonderfully liked the man, and had very good reason, as will appear
+afterwards; also four of the seamen entered themselves on our ship, and
+proved very useful fellows.
+
+From hence we directed our course for the West Indies, steering away S.
+and S. by E. for about twenty days together, sometimes little or no wind
+at all; when we met with another subject for our humanity to work upon,
+almost as deplorable as that before.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II--INTERVENING HISTORY OF COLONY
+
+
+It was in the latitude of 27 degrees 5 minutes N., on the 19th day of
+March 1694-95, when we spied a sail, our course SE. and by S.  We soon
+perceived it was a large vessel, and that she bore up to us, but could
+not at first know what to make of her, till, after coming a little
+nearer, we found she had lost her main-topmast, fore-mast, and bowsprit;
+and presently she fired a gun as a signal of distress.  The weather was
+pretty good, wind at NNW. a fresh gale, and we soon came to speak with
+her.  We found her a ship of Bristol, bound home from Barbadoes, but had
+been blown out of the road at Barbadoes a few days before she was ready
+to sail, by a terrible hurricane, while the captain and chief mate were
+both gone on shore; so that, besides the terror of the storm, they were
+in an indifferent case for good mariners to bring the ship home.  They
+had been already nine weeks at sea, and had met with another terrible
+storm, after the hurricane was over, which had blown them quite out of
+their knowledge to the westward, and in which they lost their masts.  They
+told us they expected to have seen the Bahama Islands, but were then
+driven away again to the south-east, by a strong gale of wind at NNW.,
+the same that blew now: and having no sails to work the ship with but a
+main course, and a kind of square sail upon a jury fore-mast, which they
+had set up, they could not lie near the wind, but were endeavouring to
+stand away for the Canaries.
+
+But that which was worst of all was, that they were almost starved for
+want of provisions, besides the fatigues they had undergone; their bread
+and flesh were quite gone--they had not one ounce left in the ship, and
+had had none for eleven days.  The only relief they had was, their water
+was not all spent, and they had about half a barrel of flour left; they
+had sugar enough; some succades, or sweetmeats, they had at first, but
+these were all devoured; and they had seven casks of rum.  There was a
+youth and his mother and a maid-servant on board, who were passengers,
+and thinking the ship was ready to sail, unhappily came on board the
+evening before the hurricane began; and having no provisions of their own
+left, they were in a more deplorable condition than the rest: for the
+seamen being reduced to such an extreme necessity themselves, had no
+compassion, we may be sure, for the poor passengers; and they were,
+indeed, in such a condition that their misery is very hard to describe.
+
+I had perhaps not known this part, if my curiosity had not led me, the
+weather being fair and the wind abated, to go on board the ship.  The
+second mate, who upon this occasion commanded the ship, had been on board
+our ship, and he told me they had three passengers in the great cabin
+that were in a deplorable condition.  "Nay," says he, "I believe they are
+dead, for I have heard nothing of them for above two days; and I was
+afraid to inquire after them," said he, "for I had nothing to relieve
+them with."  We immediately applied ourselves to give them what relief we
+could spare; and indeed I had so far overruled things with my nephew,
+that I would have victualled them though we had gone away to Virginia, or
+any other part of the coast of America, to have supplied ourselves; but
+there was no necessity for that.
+
+But now they were in a new danger; for they were afraid of eating too
+much, even of that little we gave them.  The mate, or commander, brought
+six men with him in his boat; but these poor wretches looked like
+skeletons, and were so weak that they could hardly sit to their oars.  The
+mate himself was very ill, and half starved; for he declared he had
+reserved nothing from the men, and went share and share alike with them
+in every bit they ate.  I cautioned him to eat sparingly, and set meat
+before him immediately, but he had not eaten three mouthfuls before he
+began to be sick and out of order; so he stopped a while, and our surgeon
+mixed him up something with some broth, which he said would be to him
+both food and physic; and after he had taken it he grew better.  In the
+meantime I forgot not the men.  I ordered victuals to be given them, and
+the poor creatures rather devoured than ate it: they were so exceedingly
+hungry that they were in a manner ravenous, and had no command of
+themselves; and two of them ate with so much greediness that they were in
+danger of their lives the next morning.  The sight of these people's
+distress was very moving to me, and brought to mind what I had a terrible
+prospect of at my first coming on shore in my island, where I had not the
+least mouthful of food, or any prospect of procuring any; besides the
+hourly apprehensions I had of being made the food of other creatures.  But
+all the while the mate was thus relating to me the miserable condition of
+the ship's company, I could not put out of my thought the story he had
+told me of the three poor creatures in the great cabin, viz. the mother,
+her son, and the maid-servant, whom he had heard nothing of for two or
+three days, and whom, he seemed to confess, they had wholly neglected,
+their own extremities being so great; by which I understood that they had
+really given them no food at all, and that therefore they must be
+perished, and be all lying dead, perhaps, on the floor or deck of the
+cabin.
+
+As I therefore kept the mate, whom we then called captain, on board with
+his men, to refresh them, so I also forgot not the starving crew that
+were left on board, but ordered my own boat to go on board the ship, and,
+with my mate and twelve men, to carry them a sack of bread, and four or
+five pieces of beef to boil.  Our surgeon charged the men to cause the
+meat to be boiled while they stayed, and to keep guard in the cook-room,
+to prevent the men taking it to eat raw, or taking it out of the pot
+before it was well boiled, and then to give every man but a very little
+at a time: and by this caution he preserved the men, who would otherwise
+have killed themselves with that very food that was given them on purpose
+to save their lives.
+
+At the same time I ordered the mate to go into the great cabin, and see
+what condition the poor passengers were in; and if they were alive, to
+comfort them, and give them what refreshment was proper: and the surgeon
+gave him a large pitcher, with some of the prepared broth which he had
+given the mate that was on board, and which he did not question would
+restore them gradually.  I was not satisfied with this; but, as I said
+above, having a great mind to see the scene of misery which I knew the
+ship itself would present me with, in a more lively manner than I could
+have it by report, I took the captain of the ship, as we now called him,
+with me, and went myself, a little after, in their boat.
+
+I found the poor men on board almost in a tumult to get the victuals out
+of the boiler before it was ready; but my mate observed his orders, and
+kept a good guard at the cook-room door, and the man he placed there,
+after using all possible persuasion to have patience, kept them off by
+force; however, he caused some biscuit-cakes to be dipped in the pot, and
+softened with the liquor of the meat, which they called brewis, and gave
+them every one some to stay their stomachs, and told them it was for
+their own safety that he was obliged to give them but little at a time.
+But it was all in vain; and had I not come on board, and their own
+commander and officers with me, and with good words, and some threats
+also of giving them no more, I believe they would have broken into the
+cook-room by force, and torn the meat out of the furnace--for words are
+indeed of very small force to a hungry belly; however, we pacified them,
+and fed them gradually and cautiously at first, and the next time gave
+them more, and at last filled their bellies, and the men did well enough.
+
+But the misery of the poor passengers in the cabin was of another nature,
+and far beyond the rest; for as, first, the ship's company had so little
+for themselves, it was but too true that they had at first kept them very
+low, and at last totally neglected them: so that for six or seven days it
+might be said they had really no food at all, and for several days before
+very little.  The poor mother, who, as the men reported, was a woman of
+sense and good breeding, had spared all she could so affectionately for
+her son, that at last she entirely sank under it; and when the mate of
+our ship went in, she sat upon the floor on deck, with her back up
+against the sides, between two chairs, which were lashed fast, and her
+head sunk between her shoulders like a corpse, though not quite dead.  My
+mate said all he could to revive and encourage her, and with a spoon put
+some broth into her mouth.  She opened her lips, and lifted up one hand,
+but could not speak: yet she understood what he said, and made signs to
+him, intimating, that it was too late for her, but pointed to her child,
+as if she would have said they should take care of him.  However, the
+mate, who was exceedingly moved at the sight, endeavoured to get some of
+the broth into her mouth, and, as he said, got two or three spoonfuls
+down--though I question whether he could be sure of it or not; but it was
+too late, and she died the same night.
+
+The youth, who was preserved at the price of his most affectionate
+mother's life, was not so far gone; yet he lay in a cabin bed, as one
+stretched out, with hardly any life left in him.  He had a piece of an
+old glove in his mouth, having eaten up the rest of it; however, being
+young, and having more strength than his mother, the mate got something
+down his throat, and he began sensibly to revive; though by giving him,
+some time after, but two or three spoonfuls extraordinary, he was very
+sick, and brought it up again.
+
+But the next care was the poor maid: she lay all along upon the deck,
+hard by her mistress, and just like one that had fallen down in a fit of
+apoplexy, and struggled for life.  Her limbs were distorted; one of her
+hands was clasped round the frame of the chair, and she gripped it so
+hard that we could not easily make her let it go; her other arm lay over
+her head, and her feet lay both together, set fast against the frame of
+the cabin table: in short, she lay just like one in the agonies of death,
+and yet she was alive too.  The poor creature was not only starved with
+hunger, and terrified with the thoughts of death, but, as the men told us
+afterwards, was broken-hearted for her mistress, whom she saw dying for
+two or three days before, and whom she loved most tenderly.  We knew not
+what to do with this poor girl; for when our surgeon, who was a man of
+very great knowledge and experience, had, with great application,
+recovered her as to life, he had her upon his hands still; for she was
+little less than distracted for a considerable time after.
+
+Whoever shall read these memorandums must be desired to consider that
+visits at sea are not like a journey into the country, where sometimes
+people stay a week or a fortnight at a place.  Our business was to
+relieve this distressed ship's crew, but not lie by for them; and though
+they were willing to steer the same course with us for some days, yet we
+could carry no sail to keep pace with a ship that had no masts.  However,
+as their captain begged of us to help him to set up a main-topmast, and a
+kind of a topmast to his jury fore-mast, we did, as it were, lie by him
+for three or four days; and then, having given him five barrels of beef,
+a barrel of pork, two hogsheads of biscuit, and a proportion of peas,
+flour, and what other things we could spare; and taking three casks of
+sugar, some rum, and some pieces of eight from them for satisfaction, we
+left them, taking on board with us, at their own earnest request, the
+youth and the maid, and all their goods.
+
+The young lad was about seventeen years of age, a pretty, well-bred,
+modest, and sensible youth, greatly dejected with the loss of his mother,
+and also at having lost his father but a few months before, at Barbadoes.
+He begged of the surgeon to speak to me to take him out of the ship; for
+he said the cruel fellows had murdered his mother: and indeed so they
+had, that is to say, passively; for they might have spared a small
+sustenance to the poor helpless widow, though it had been but just enough
+to keep her alive; but hunger knows no friend, no relation, no justice,
+no right, and therefore is remorseless, and capable of no compassion.
+
+The surgeon told him how far we were going, and that it would carry him
+away from all his friends, and put him, perhaps, in as bad circumstances
+almost as those we found him in, that is to say, starving in the world.
+He said it mattered not whither he went, if he was but delivered from the
+terrible crew that he was among; that the captain (by which he meant me,
+for he could know nothing of my nephew) had saved his life, and he was
+sure would not hurt him; and as for the maid, he was sure, if she came to
+herself, she would be very thankful for it, let us carry them where we
+would.  The surgeon represented the case so affectionately to me that I
+yielded, and we took them both on board, with all their goods, except
+eleven hogsheads of sugar, which could not be removed or come at; and as
+the youth had a bill of lading for them, I made his commander sign a
+writing, obliging himself to go, as soon as he came to Bristol, to one
+Mr. Rogers, a merchant there, to whom the youth said he was related, and
+to deliver a letter which I wrote to him, and all the goods he had
+belonging to the deceased widow; which, I suppose, was not done, for I
+could never learn that the ship came to Bristol, but was, as is most
+probable, lost at sea, being in so disabled a condition, and so far from
+any land, that I am of opinion the first storm she met with afterwards
+she might founder, for she was leaky, and had damage in her hold when we
+met with her.
+
+I was now in the latitude of 19 degrees 32 minutes, and had hitherto a
+tolerable voyage as to weather, though at first the winds had been
+contrary.  I shall trouble nobody with the little incidents of wind,
+weather, currents, &c., on the rest of our voyage; but to shorten my
+story, shall observe that I came to my old habitation, the island, on the
+10th of April 1695.  It was with no small difficulty that I found the
+place; for as I came to it and went to it before on the south and east
+side of the island, coming from the Brazils, so now, coming in between
+the main and the island, and having no chart for the coast, nor any
+landmark, I did not know it when I saw it, or, know whether I saw it or
+not.  We beat about a great while, and went on shore on several islands
+in the mouth of the great river Orinoco, but none for my purpose; only
+this I learned by my coasting the shore, that I was under one great
+mistake before, viz. that the continent which I thought I saw from the
+island I lived in was really no continent, but a long island, or rather a
+ridge of islands, reaching from one to the other side of the extended
+mouth of that great river; and that the savages who came to my island
+were not properly those which we call Caribbees, but islanders, and other
+barbarians of the same kind, who inhabited nearer to our side than the
+rest.
+
+In short, I visited several of these islands to no purpose; some I found
+were inhabited, and some were not; on one of them I found some Spaniards,
+and thought they had lived there; but speaking with them, found they had
+a sloop lying in a small creek hard by, and came thither to make salt,
+and to catch some pearl-mussels if they could; but that they belonged to
+the Isle de Trinidad, which lay farther north, in the latitude of 10 and
+11 degrees.
+
+Thus coasting from one island to another, sometimes with the ship,
+sometimes with the Frenchman's shallop, which we had found a convenient
+boat, and therefore kept her with their very good will, at length I came
+fair on the south side of my island, and presently knew the very
+countenance of the place: so I brought the ship safe to an anchor,
+broadside with the little creek where my old habitation was.  As soon as
+I saw the place I called for Friday, and asked him if he knew where he
+was?  He looked about a little, and presently clapping his hands, cried,
+"Oh yes, Oh there, Oh yes, Oh there!" pointing to our old habitation, and
+fell dancing and capering like a mad fellow; and I had much ado to keep
+him from jumping into the sea to swim ashore to the place.
+
+"Well, Friday," says I, "do you think we shall find anybody here or no?
+and do you think we shall see your father?"  The fellow stood mute as a
+stock a good while; but when I named his father, the poor affectionate
+creature looked dejected, and I could see the tears run down his face
+very plentifully.  "What is the matter, Friday? are you troubled because
+you may see your father?"  "No, no," says he, shaking his head, "no see
+him more: no, never more see him again."  "Why so, Friday? how do you
+know that?"  "Oh no, Oh no," says Friday, "he long ago die, long ago; he
+much old man."  "Well, well, Friday, you don't know; but shall we see any
+one else, then?"  The fellow, it seems, had better eyes than I, and he
+points to the hill just above my old house; and though we lay half a
+league off, he cries out, "We see! we see! yes, we see much man there,
+and there, and there."  I looked, but I saw nobody, no, not with a
+perspective glass, which was, I suppose, because I could not hit the
+place: for the fellow was right, as I found upon inquiry the next day;
+and there were five or six men all together, who stood to look at the
+ship, not knowing what to think of us.
+
+As soon as Friday told me he saw people, I caused the English ancient to
+be spread, and fired three guns, to give them notice we were friends; and
+in about a quarter of an hour after we perceived a smoke arise from the
+side of the creek; so I immediately ordered the boat out, taking Friday
+with me, and hanging out a white flag, I went directly on shore, taking
+with me the young friar I mentioned, to whom I had told the story of my
+living there, and the manner of it, and every particular both of myself
+and those I left there, and who was on that account extremely desirous to
+go with me.  We had, besides, about sixteen men well armed, if we had
+found any new guests there which we did not know of; but we had no need
+of weapons.
+
+As we went on shore upon the tide of flood, near high water, we rowed
+directly into the creek; and the first man I fixed my eye upon was the
+Spaniard whose life I had saved, and whom I knew by his face perfectly
+well: as to his habit, I shall describe it afterwards.  I ordered nobody
+to go on shore at first but myself; but there was no keeping Friday in
+the boat, for the affectionate creature had spied his father at a
+distance, a good way off the Spaniards, where, indeed, I saw nothing of
+him; and if they had not let him go ashore, he would have jumped into the
+sea.  He was no sooner on shore, but he flew away to his father like an
+arrow out of a bow.  It would have made any man shed tears, in spite of
+the firmest resolution, to have seen the first transports of this poor
+fellow's joy when he came to his father: how he embraced him, kissed him,
+stroked his face, took him up in his arms, set him down upon a tree, and
+lay down by him; then stood and looked at him, as any one would look at a
+strange picture, for a quarter of an hour together; then lay down on the
+ground, and stroked his legs, and kissed them, and then got up again and
+stared at him; one would have thought the fellow bewitched.  But it would
+have made a dog laugh the next day to see how his passion ran out another
+way: in the morning he walked along the shore with his father several
+hours, always leading him by the hand, as if he had been a lady; and
+every now and then he would come to the boat to fetch something or other
+for him, either a lump of sugar, a dram, a biscuit, or something or other
+that was good.  In the afternoon his frolics ran another way; for then he
+would set the old man down upon the ground, and dance about him, and make
+a thousand antic gestures; and all the while he did this he would be
+talking to him, and telling him one story or another of his travels, and
+of what had happened to him abroad to divert him.  In short, if the same
+filial affection was to be found in Christians to their parents in our
+part of the world, one would be tempted to say there would hardly have
+been any need of the fifth commandment.
+
+But this is a digression: I return to my landing.  It would be needless
+to take notice of all the ceremonies and civilities that the Spaniards
+received me with.  The first Spaniard, whom, as I said, I knew very well,
+was he whose life I had saved.  He came towards the boat, attended by one
+more, carrying a flag of truce also; and he not only did not know me at
+first, but he had no thoughts, no notion of its being me that was come,
+till I spoke to him.  "Seignior," said I, in Portuguese, "do you not know
+me?"  At which he spoke not a word, but giving his musket to the man that
+was with him, threw his arms abroad, saying something in Spanish that I
+did not perfectly hear, came forward and embraced me, telling me he was
+inexcusable not to know that face again that he had once seen, as of an
+angel from heaven sent to save his life; he said abundance of very
+handsome things, as a well-bred Spaniard always knows how, and then,
+beckoning to the person that attended him, bade him go and call out his
+comrades.  He then asked me if I would walk to my old habitation, where
+he would give me possession of my own house again, and where I should see
+they had made but mean improvements.  I walked along with him, but, alas!
+I could no more find the place than if I had never been there; for they
+had planted so many trees, and placed them in such a position, so thick
+and close to one another, and in ten years' time they were grown so big,
+that the place was inaccessible, except by such windings and blind ways
+as they themselves only, who made them, could find.
+
+I asked them what put them upon all these fortifications; he told me I
+would say there was need enough of it when they had given me an account
+how they had passed their time since their arriving in the island,
+especially after they had the misfortune to find that I was gone.  He
+told me he could not but have some pleasure in my good fortune, when he
+heard that I was gone in a good ship, and to my satisfaction; and that he
+had oftentimes a strong persuasion that one time or other he should see
+me again, but nothing that ever befell him in his life, he said, was so
+surprising and afflicting to him at first as the disappointment he was
+under when he came back to the island and found I was not there.
+
+As to the three barbarians (so he called them) that were left behind, and
+of whom, he said, he had a long story to tell me, the Spaniards all
+thought themselves much better among the savages, only that their number
+was so small: "And," says he, "had they been strong enough, we had been
+all long ago in purgatory;" and with that he crossed himself on the
+breast.  "But, sir," says he, "I hope you will not be displeased when I
+shall tell you how, forced by necessity, we were obliged for our own
+preservation to disarm them, and make them our subjects, as they would
+not be content with being moderately our masters, but would be our
+murderers."  I answered I was afraid of it when I left them there, and
+nothing troubled me at my parting from the island but that they were not
+come back, that I might have put them in possession of everything first,
+and left the others in a state of subjection, as they deserved; but if
+they had reduced them to it I was very glad, and should be very far from
+finding any fault with it; for I knew they were a parcel of refractory,
+ungoverned villains, and were fit for any manner of mischief.
+
+While I was saying this, the man came whom he had sent back, and with him
+eleven more.  In the dress they were in it was impossible to guess what
+nation they were of; but he made all clear, both to them and to me.
+First, he turned to me, and pointing to them, said, "These, sir, are some
+of the gentlemen who owe their lives to you;" and then turning to them,
+and pointing to me, he let them know who I was; upon which they all came
+up, one by one, not as if they had been sailors, and ordinary fellows,
+and the like, but really as if they had been ambassadors or noblemen, and
+I a monarch or great conqueror: their behaviour was, to the last degree,
+obliging and courteous, and yet mixed with a manly, majestic gravity,
+which very well became them; and, in short, they had so much more manners
+than I, that I scarce knew how to receive their civilities, much less how
+to return them in kind.
+
+The history of their coming to, and conduct in, the island after my going
+away is so very remarkable, and has so many incidents which the former
+part of my relation will help to understand, and which will in most of
+the particulars, refer to the account I have already given, that I cannot
+but commit them, with great delight, to the reading of those that come
+after me.
+
+In order to do this as intelligibly as I can, I must go back to the
+circumstances in which I left the island, and the persons on it, of whom
+I am to speak.  And first, it is necessary to repeat that I had sent away
+Friday's father and the Spaniard (the two whose lives I had rescued from
+the savages) in a large canoe to the main, as I then thought it, to fetch
+over the Spaniard's companions that he left behind him, in order to save
+them from the like calamity that he had been in, and in order to succour
+them for the present; and that, if possible, we might together find some
+way for our deliverance afterwards.  When I sent them away I had no
+visible appearance of, or the least room to hope for, my own deliverance,
+any more than I had twenty years before--much less had I any
+foreknowledge of what afterwards happened, I mean, of an English ship
+coming on shore there to fetch me off; and it could not be but a very
+great surprise to them, when they came back, not only to find that I was
+gone, but to find three strangers left on the spot, possessed of all that
+I had left behind me, which would otherwise have been their own.
+
+The first thing, however, which I inquired into, that I might begin where
+I left off, was of their own part; and I desired the Spaniard would give
+me a particular account of his voyage back to his countrymen with the
+boat, when I sent him to fetch them over.  He told me there was little
+variety in that part, for nothing remarkable happened to them on the way,
+having had very calm weather and a smooth sea.  As for his countrymen, it
+could not be doubted, he said, but that they were overjoyed to see him
+(it seems he was the principal man among them, the captain of the vessel
+they had been shipwrecked in having been dead some time): they were, he
+said, the more surprised to see him, because they knew that he was fallen
+into the hands of the savages, who, they were satisfied, would devour him
+as they did all the rest of their prisoners; that when he told them the
+story of his deliverance, and in what manner he was furnished for
+carrying them away, it was like a dream to them, and their astonishment,
+he said, was somewhat like that of Joseph's brethren when he told them
+who he was, and the story of his exaltation in Pharaoh's court; but when
+he showed them the arms, the powder, the ball, the provisions that he
+brought them for their journey or voyage, they were restored to
+themselves, took a just share of the joy of their deliverance, and
+immediately prepared to come away with him.
+
+Their first business was to get canoes; and in this they were obliged not
+to stick so much upon the honesty of it, but to trespass upon their
+friendly savages, and to borrow two large canoes, or periaguas, on
+pretence of going out a-fishing, or for pleasure.  In these they came
+away the next morning.  It seems they wanted no time to get themselves
+ready; for they had neither clothes nor provisions, nor anything in the
+world but what they had on them, and a few roots to eat, of which they
+used to make their bread.  They were in all three weeks absent; and in
+that time, unluckily for them, I had the occasion offered for my escape,
+as I mentioned in the other part, and to get off from the island, leaving
+three of the most impudent, hardened, ungoverned, disagreeable villains
+behind me that any man could desire to meet with--to the poor Spaniards'
+great grief and disappointment.
+
+The only just thing the rogues did was, that when the Spaniards came
+ashore, they gave my letter to them, and gave them provisions, and other
+relief, as I had ordered them to do; also they gave them the long paper
+of directions which I had left with them, containing the particular
+methods which I took for managing every part of my life there; the way I
+baked my bread, bred up tame goats, and planted my corn; how I cured my
+grapes, made my pots, and, in a word, everything I did.  All this being
+written down, they gave to the Spaniards (two of them understood English
+well enough): nor did they refuse to accommodate the Spaniards with
+anything else, for they agreed very well for some time.  They gave them
+an equal admission into the house or cave, and they began to live very
+sociably; and the head Spaniard, who had seen pretty much of my methods,
+together with Friday's father, managed all their affairs; but as for the
+Englishmen, they did nothing but ramble about the island, shoot parrots,
+and catch tortoises; and when they came home at night, the Spaniards
+provided their suppers for them.
+
+The Spaniards would have been satisfied with this had the others but let
+them alone, which, however, they could not find in their hearts to do
+long: but, like the dog in the manger, they would not eat themselves,
+neither would they let the others eat.  The differences, nevertheless,
+were at first but trivial, and such as are not worth relating, but at
+last it broke out into open war: and it began with all the rudeness and
+insolence that can be imagined--without reason, without provocation,
+contrary to nature, and indeed to common sense; and though, it is true,
+the first relation of it came from the Spaniards themselves, whom I may
+call the accusers, yet when I came to examine the fellows they could not
+deny a word of it.
+
+But before I come to the particulars of this part, I must supply a defect
+in my former relation; and this was, I forgot to set down among the rest,
+that just as we were weighing the anchor to set sail, there happened a
+little quarrel on board of our ship, which I was once afraid would have
+turned to a second mutiny; nor was it appeased till the captain, rousing
+up his courage, and taking us all to his assistance, parted them by
+force, and making two of the most refractory fellows prisoners, he laid
+them in irons: and as they had been active in the former disorders, and
+let fall some ugly, dangerous words the second time, he threatened to
+carry them in irons to England, and have them hanged there for mutiny and
+running away with the ship.  This, it seems, though the captain did not
+intend to do it, frightened some other men in the ship; and some of them
+had put it into the head of the rest that the captain only gave them good
+words for the present, till they should come to same English port, and
+that then they should be all put into gaol, and tried for their lives.
+The mate got intelligence of this, and acquainted us with it, upon which
+it was desired that I, who still passed for a great man among them,
+should go down with the mate and satisfy the men, and tell them that they
+might be assured, if they behaved well the rest of the voyage, all they
+had done for the time past should be pardoned.  So I went, and after
+passing my honour's word to them they appeared easy, and the more so when
+I caused the two men that were in irons to be released and forgiven.
+
+But this mutiny had brought us to an anchor for that night; the wind also
+falling calm next morning, we found that our two men who had been laid in
+irons had stolen each of them a musket and some other weapons (what
+powder or shot they had we knew not), and had taken the ship's pinnace,
+which was not yet hauled up, and run away with her to their companions in
+roguery on shore.  As soon as we found this, I ordered the long-boat on
+shore, with twelve men and the mate, and away they went to seek the
+rogues; but they could neither find them nor any of the rest, for they
+all fled into the woods when they saw the boat coming on shore.  The mate
+was once resolved, in justice to their roguery, to have destroyed their
+plantations, burned all their household stuff and furniture, and left
+them to shift without it; but having no orders, he let it all alone, left
+everything as he found it, and bringing the pinnace way, came on board
+without them.  These two men made their number five; but the other three
+villains were so much more wicked than they, that after they had been two
+or three days together they turned the two newcomers out of doors to
+shift for themselves, and would have nothing to do with them; nor could
+they for a good while be persuaded to give them any food: as for the
+Spaniards, they were not yet come.
+
+When the Spaniards came first on shore, the business began to go forward:
+the Spaniards would have persuaded the three English brutes to have taken
+in their countrymen again, that, as they said, they might be all one
+family; but they would not hear of it, so the two poor fellows lived by
+themselves; and finding nothing but industry and application would make
+them live comfortably, they pitched their tents on the north shore of the
+island, but a little more to the west, to be out of danger of the
+savages, who always landed on the east parts of the island.  Here they
+built them two huts, one to lodge in, and the other to lay up their
+magazines and stores in; and the Spaniards having given them some corn
+for seed, and some of the peas which I had left them, they dug, planted,
+and enclosed, after the pattern I had set for them all, and began to live
+pretty well.  Their first crop of corn was on the ground; and though it
+was but a little bit of land which they had dug up at first, having had
+but a little time, yet it was enough to relieve them, and find them with
+bread and other eatables; and one of the fellows being the cook's mate of
+the ship, was very ready at making soup, puddings, and such other
+preparations as the rice and the milk, and such little flesh as they got,
+furnished him to do.
+
+They were going on in this little thriving position when the three
+unnatural rogues, their own countrymen too, in mere humour, and to insult
+them, came and bullied them, and told them the island was theirs: that
+the governor, meaning me, had given them the possession of it, and nobody
+else had any right to it; and that they should build no houses upon their
+ground unless they would pay rent for them.  The two men, thinking they
+were jesting at first, asked them to come in and sit down, and see what
+fine houses they were that they had built, and to tell them what rent
+they demanded; and one of them merrily said if they were the
+ground-landlords, he hoped if they built tenements upon their land, and
+made improvements, they would, according to the custom of landlords,
+grant a long lease: and desired they would get a scrivener to draw the
+writings.  One of the three, cursing and raging, told them they should
+see they were not in jest; and going to a little place at a distance,
+where the honest men had made a fire to dress their victuals, he takes a
+firebrand, and claps it to the outside of their hut, and set it on fire:
+indeed, it would have been all burned down in a few minutes if one of the
+two had not run to the fellow, thrust him away, and trod the fire out
+with his feet, and that not without some difficulty too.
+
+The fellow was in such a rage at the honest man's thrusting him away,
+that he returned upon him, with a pole he had in his hand, and had not
+the man avoided the blow very nimbly, and run into the hut, he had ended
+his days at once.  His comrade, seeing the danger they were both in, ran
+after him, and immediately they came both out with their muskets, and the
+man that was first struck at with the pole knocked the fellow down that
+began the quarrel with the stock of his musket, and that before the other
+two could come to help him; and then, seeing the rest come at them, they
+stood together, and presenting the other ends of their pieces to them,
+bade them stand off.
+
+The others had firearms with them too; but one of the two honest men,
+bolder than his comrade, and made desperate by his danger, told them if
+they offered to move hand or foot they were dead men, and boldly
+commanded them to lay down their arms.  They did not, indeed, lay down
+their arms, but seeing him so resolute, it brought them to a parley, and
+they consented to take their wounded man with them and be gone: and,
+indeed, it seems the fellow was wounded sufficiently with the blow.
+However, they were much in the wrong, since they had the advantage, that
+they did not disarm them effectually, as they might have done, and have
+gone immediately to the Spaniards, and given them an account how the
+rogues had treated them; for the three villains studied nothing but
+revenge, and every day gave them some intimation that they did so.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III--FIGHT WITH CANNIBALS
+
+
+But not to crowd this part with an account of the lesser part of the
+rogueries with which they plagued them continually, night and day, it
+forced the two men to such a desperation that they resolved to fight them
+all three, the first time they had a fair opportunity.  In order to do
+this they resolved to go to the castle (as they called my old dwelling),
+where the three rogues and the Spaniards all lived together at that time,
+intending to have a fair battle, and the Spaniards should stand by to see
+fair play: so they got up in the morning before day, and came to the
+place, and called the Englishmen by their names telling a Spaniard that
+answered that they wanted to speak with them.
+
+It happened that the day before two of the Spaniards, having been in the
+woods, had seen one of the two Englishmen, whom, for distinction, I
+called the honest men, and he had made a sad complaint to the Spaniards
+of the barbarous usage they had met with from their three countrymen, and
+how they had ruined their plantation, and destroyed their corn, that they
+had laboured so hard to bring forward, and killed the milch-goat and
+their three kids, which was all they had provided for their sustenance,
+and that if he and his friends, meaning the Spaniards, did not assist
+them again, they should be starved.  When the Spaniards came home at
+night, and they were all at supper, one of them took the freedom to
+reprove the three Englishmen, though in very gentle and mannerly terms,
+and asked them how they could be so cruel, they being harmless,
+inoffensive fellows: that they were putting themselves in a way to
+subsist by their labour, and that it had cost them a great deal of pains
+to bring things to such perfection as they were then in.
+
+One of the Englishmen returned very briskly, "What had they to do there?
+that they came on shore without leave; and that they should not plant or
+build upon the island; it was none of their ground."  "Why," says the
+Spaniard, very calmly, "Seignior Inglese, they must not starve."  The
+Englishman replied, like a rough tarpaulin, "They might starve; they
+should not plant nor build in that place."  "But what must they do then,
+seignior?" said the Spaniard.  Another of the brutes returned, "Do? they
+should be servants, and work for them."  "But how can you expect that of
+them?" says the Spaniard; "they are not bought with your money; you have
+no right to make them servants."  The Englishman answered, "The island
+was theirs; the governor had given it to them, and no man had anything to
+do there but themselves;" and with that he swore that he would go and
+burn all their new huts; they should build none upon their land.  "Why,
+seignior," says the Spaniard, "by the same rule, we must be your
+servants, too."  "Ay," returned the bold dog, "and so you shall, too,
+before we have done with you;" mixing two or three oaths in the proper
+intervals of his speech.  The Spaniard only smiled at that, and made him
+no answer.  However, this little discourse had heated them; and starting
+up, one says to the other.  (I think it was he they called Will Atkins),
+"Come, Jack, let's go and have t'other brush with them; we'll demolish
+their castle, I'll warrant you; they shall plant no colony in our
+dominions."
+
+Upon this they were all trooping away, with every man a gun, a pistol,
+and a sword, and muttered some insolent things among themselves of what
+they would do to the Spaniards, too, when opportunity offered; but the
+Spaniards, it seems, did not so perfectly understand them as to know all
+the particulars, only that in general they threatened them hard for
+taking the two Englishmen's part.  Whither they went, or how they
+bestowed their time that evening, the Spaniards said they did not know;
+but it seems they wandered about the country part of the night, and them
+lying down in the place which I used to call my bower, they were weary
+and overslept themselves.  The case was this: they had resolved to stay
+till midnight, and so take the two poor men when they were asleep, and as
+they acknowledged afterwards, intended to set fire to their huts while
+they were in them, and either burn them there or murder them as they came
+out.  As malice seldom sleeps very sound, it was very strange they should
+not have been kept awake.  However, as the two men had also a design upon
+them, as I have said, though a much fairer one than that of burning and
+murdering, it happened, and very luckily for them all, that they were up
+and gone abroad before the bloody-minded rogues came to their huts.
+
+When they came there, and found the men gone, Atkins, who it seems was
+the forwardest man, called out to his comrade, "Ha, Jack, here's the
+nest, but the birds are flown."  They mused a while, to think what should
+be the occasion of their being gone abroad so soon, and suggested
+presently that the Spaniards had given them notice of it; and with that
+they shook hands, and swore to one another that they would be revenged of
+the Spaniards.  As soon as they had made this bloody bargain they fell to
+work with the poor men's habitation; they did not set fire, indeed, to
+anything, but they pulled down both their houses, and left not the least
+stick standing, or scarce any sign on the ground where they stood; they
+tore all their household stuff in pieces, and threw everything about in
+such a manner, that the poor men afterwards found some of their things a
+mile off.  When they had done this, they pulled up all the young trees
+which the poor men had planted; broke down an enclosure they had made to
+secure their cattle and their corn; and, in a word, sacked and plundered
+everything as completely as a horde of Tartars would have done.
+
+The two men were at this juncture gone to find them out, and had resolved
+to fight them wherever they had been, though they were but two to three;
+so that, had they met, there certainly would have been blood shed among
+them, for they were all very stout, resolute fellows, to give them their
+due.
+
+But Providence took more care to keep them asunder than they themselves
+could do to meet; for, as if they had dogged one another, when the three
+were gone thither, the two were here; and afterwards, when the two went
+back to find them, the three were come to the old habitation again: we
+shall see their different conduct presently.  When the three came back
+like furious creatures, flushed with the rage which the work they had
+been about had put them into, they came up to the Spaniards, and told
+them what they had done, by way of scoff and bravado; and one of them
+stepping up to one of the Spaniards, as if they had been a couple of boys
+at play, takes hold of his hat as it was upon his head, and giving it a
+twirl about, fleering in his face, says to him, "And you, Seignior Jack
+Spaniard, shall have the same sauce if you do not mend your manners."  The
+Spaniard, who, though a quiet civil man, was as brave a man as could be,
+and withal a strong, well-made man, looked at him for a good while, and
+then, having no weapon in his hand, stepped gravely up to him, and, with
+one blow of his fist, knocked him down, as an ox is felled with a pole-
+axe; at which one of the rogues, as insolent as the first, fired his
+pistol at the Spaniard immediately; he missed his body, indeed, for the
+bullets went through his hair, but one of them touched the tip of his
+ear, and he bled pretty much.  The blood made the Spaniard believe he was
+more hurt than he really was, and that put him into some heat, for before
+he acted all in a perfect calm; but now resolving to go through with his
+work, he stooped, and taking the fellow's musket whom he had knocked
+down, was just going to shoot the man who had fired at him, when the rest
+of the Spaniards, being in the cave, came out, and calling to him not to
+shoot, they stepped in, secured the other two, and took their arms from
+them.
+
+When they were thus disarmed, and found they had made all the Spaniards
+their enemies, as well as their own countrymen, they began to cool, and
+giving the Spaniards better words, would have their arms again; but the
+Spaniards, considering the feud that was between them and the other two
+Englishmen, and that it would be the best method they could take to keep
+them from killing one another, told them they would do them no harm, and
+if they would live peaceably, they would be very willing to assist and
+associate with them as they did before; but that they could not think of
+giving them their arms again, while they appeared so resolved to do
+mischief with them to their own countrymen, and had even threatened them
+all to make them their servants.
+
+The rogues were now quite deaf to all reason, and being refused their
+arms, they raved away like madmen, threatening what they would do, though
+they had no firearms.  But the Spaniards, despising their threatening,
+told them they should take care how they offered any injury to their
+plantation or cattle; for if they did they would shoot them as they would
+ravenous beasts, wherever they found them; and if they fell into their
+hands alive, they should certainly be hanged.  However, this was far from
+cooling them, but away they went, raging and swearing like furies.  As
+soon as they were gone, the two men came back, in passion and rage enough
+also, though of another kind; for having been at their plantation, and
+finding it all demolished and destroyed, as above mentioned, it will
+easily be supposed they had provocation enough.  They could scarce have
+room to tell their tale, the Spaniards were so eager to tell them theirs:
+and it was strange enough to find that three men should thus bully
+nineteen, and receive no punishment at all.
+
+The Spaniards, indeed, despised them, and especially, having thus
+disarmed them, made light of their threatenings; but the two Englishmen
+resolved to have their remedy against them, what pains soever it cost to
+find them out.  But the Spaniards interposed here too, and told them that
+as they had disarmed them, they could not consent that they (the two)
+should pursue them with firearms, and perhaps kill them.  "But," said the
+grave Spaniard, who was their governor, "we will endeavour to make them
+do you justice, if you will leave it to us: for there is no doubt but
+they will come to us again, when their passion is over, being not able to
+subsist without our assistance.  We promise you to make no peace with
+them without having full satisfaction for you; and upon this condition we
+hope you will promise to use no violence with them, other than in your
+own defence."  The two Englishmen yielded to this very awkwardly, and
+with great reluctance; but the Spaniards protested that they did it only
+to keep them from bloodshed, and to make them all easy at last.  "For,"
+said they, "we are not so many of us; here is room enough for us all, and
+it is a great pity that we should not be all good friends."  At length
+they did consent, and waited for the issue of the thing, living for some
+days with the Spaniards; for their own habitation was destroyed.
+
+In about five days' time the vagrants, tired with wandering, and almost
+starved with hunger, having chiefly lived on turtles' eggs all that
+while, came back to the grove; and finding my Spaniard, who, as I have
+said, was the governor, and two more with him, walking by the side of the
+creek, they came up in a very submissive, humble manner, and begged to be
+received again into the society.  The Spaniards used them civilly, but
+told them they had acted so unnaturally to their countrymen, and so very
+grossly to themselves, that they could not come to any conclusion without
+consulting the two Englishmen and the rest; but, however, they would go
+to them and discourse about it, and they should know in half-an-hour.  It
+may be guessed that they were very hard put to it; for, as they were to
+wait this half-hour for an answer, they begged they would send them out
+some bread in the meantime, which they did, sending at the same time a
+large piece of goat's flesh and a boiled parrot, which they ate very
+eagerly.
+
+After half-an-hour's consultation they were called in, and a long debate
+ensued, their two countrymen charging them with the ruin of all their
+labour, and a design to murder them; all which they owned before, and
+therefore could not deny now.  Upon the whole, the Spaniards acted the
+moderators between them; and as they had obliged the two Englishmen not
+to hurt the three while they were naked and unarmed, so they now obliged
+the three to go and rebuild their fellows' two huts, one to be of the
+same and the other of larger dimensions than they were before; to fence
+their ground again, plant trees in the room of those pulled up, dig up
+the land again for planting corn, and, in a word, to restore everything
+to the same state as they found it, that is, as near as they could.
+
+Well, they submitted to all this; and as they had plenty of provisions
+given them all the while, they grew very orderly, and the whole society
+began to live pleasantly and agreeably together again; only that these
+three fellows could never be persuaded to work--I mean for
+themselves--except now and then a little, just as they pleased.  However,
+the Spaniards told them plainly that if they would but live sociably and
+friendly together, and study the good of the whole plantation, they would
+be content to work for them, and let them walk about and be as idle as
+they pleased; and thus, having lived pretty well together for a month or
+two, the Spaniards let them have arms again, and gave them liberty to go
+abroad with them as before.
+
+It was not above a week after they had these arms, and went abroad,
+before the ungrateful creatures began to be as insolent and troublesome
+as ever.  However, an accident happened presently upon this, which
+endangered the safety of them all, and they were obliged to lay by all
+private resentments, and look to the preservation of their lives.
+
+It happened one night that the governor, the Spaniard whose life I had
+saved, who was now the governor of the rest, found himself very uneasy in
+the night, and could by no means get any sleep: he was perfectly well in
+body, only found his thoughts tumultuous; his mind ran upon men fighting
+and killing one another; but he was broad awake, and could not by any
+means get any sleep; in short, he lay a great while, but growing more and
+more uneasy, he resolved to rise.  As they lay, being so many of them, on
+goat-skins laid thick upon such couches and pads as they made for
+themselves, so they had little to do, when they were willing to rise, but
+to get upon their feet, and perhaps put on a coat, such as it was, and
+their pumps, and they were ready for going any way that their thoughts
+guided them.  Being thus got up, he looked out; but being dark, he could
+see little or nothing, and besides, the trees which I had planted, and
+which were now grown tall, intercepted his sight, so that he could only
+look up, and see that it was a starlight night, and hearing no noise, he
+returned and lay down again; but to no purpose; he could not compose
+himself to anything like rest; but his thoughts were to the last degree
+uneasy, and he knew not for what.  Having made some noise with rising and
+walking about, going out and coming in, another of them waked, and asked
+who it was that was up.  The governor told him how it had been with him.
+"Say you so?" says the other Spaniard; "such things are not to be
+slighted, I assure you; there is certainly some mischief working near
+us;" and presently he asked him, "Where are the Englishmen?"  "They are
+all in their huts," says he, "safe enough."  It seems the Spaniards had
+kept possession of the main apartment, and had made a place for the three
+Englishmen, who, since their last mutiny, were always quartered by
+themselves, and could not come at the rest.  "Well," says the Spaniard,
+"there is something in it, I am persuaded, from my own experience.  I am
+satisfied that our spirits embodied have a converse with and receive
+intelligence from the spirits unembodied, and inhabiting the invisible
+world; and this friendly notice is given for our advantage, if we knew
+how to make use of it.  Come, let us go and look abroad; and if we find
+nothing at all in it to justify the trouble, I'll tell you a story to the
+purpose, that shall convince you of the justice of my proposing it."
+
+They went out presently to go up to the top of the hill, where I used to
+go; but they being strong, and a good company, nor alone, as I was, used
+none of my cautions to go up by the ladder, and pulling it up after them,
+to go up a second stage to the top, but were going round through the
+grove unwarily, when they were surprised with seeing a light as of fire,
+a very little way from them, and hearing the voices of men, not of one or
+two, but of a great number.
+
+Among the precautions I used to take on the savages landing on the
+island, it was my constant care to prevent them making the least
+discovery of there being any inhabitant upon the place: and when by any
+occasion they came to know it, they felt it so effectually that they that
+got away were scarce able to give any account of it; for we disappeared
+as soon as possible, nor did ever any that had seen me escape to tell any
+one else, except it was the three savages in our last encounter who
+jumped into the boat; of whom, I mentioned, I was afraid they should go
+home and bring more help.  Whether it was the consequence of the escape
+of those men that so great a number came now together, or whether they
+came ignorantly, and by accident, on their usual bloody errand, the
+Spaniards could not understand; but whatever it was, it was their
+business either to have concealed themselves or not to have seen them at
+all, much less to have let the savages have seen there were any
+inhabitants in the place; or to have fallen upon them so effectually as
+not a man of them should have escaped, which could only have been by
+getting in between them and their boats; but this presence of mind was
+wanting to them, which was the ruin of their tranquillity for a great
+while.
+
+We need not doubt but that the governor and the man with him, surprised
+with this sight, ran back immediately and raised their fellows, giving
+them an account of the imminent danger they were all in, and they again
+as readily took the alarm; but it was impossible to persuade them to stay
+close within where they were, but they must all run out to see how things
+stood.  While it was dark, indeed, they were safe, and they had
+opportunity enough for some hours to view the savages by the light of
+three fires they had made at a distance from one another; what they were
+doing they knew not, neither did they know what to do themselves.  For,
+first, the enemy were too many; and secondly, they did not keep together,
+but were divided into several parties, and were on shore in several
+places.
+
+The Spaniards were in no small consternation at this sight; and, as they
+found that the fellows went straggling all over the shore, they made no
+doubt but, first or last, some of them would chop in upon their
+habitation, or upon some other place where they would see the token of
+inhabitants; and they were in great perplexity also for fear of their
+flock of goats, which, if they should be destroyed, would have been
+little less than starving them.  So the first thing they resolved upon
+was to despatch three men away before it was light, two Spaniards and one
+Englishman, to drive away all the goats to the great valley where the
+cave was, and, if need were, to drive them into the very cave itself.
+Could they have seen the savages all together in one body, and at a
+distance from their canoes, they were resolved, if there had been a
+hundred of them, to attack them; but that could not be done, for they
+were some of them two miles off from the other, and, as it appeared
+afterwards, were of two different nations.
+
+After having mused a great while on the course they should take, they
+resolved at last, while it was still dark, to send the old savage,
+Friday's father, out as a spy, to learn, if possible, something
+concerning them, as what they came for, what they intended to do, and the
+like.  The old man readily undertook it; and stripping himself quite
+naked, as most of the savages were, away he went.  After he had been gone
+an hour or two, he brings word that he had been among them undiscovered,
+that he found they were two parties, and of two several nations, who had
+war with one another, and had a great battle in their own country; and
+that both sides having had several prisoners taken in the fight, they
+were, by mere chance, landed all on the same island, for the devouring
+their prisoners and making merry; but their coming so by chance to the
+same place had spoiled all their mirth--that they were in a great rage at
+one another, and were so near that he believed they would fight again as
+soon as daylight began to appear; but he did not perceive that they had
+any notion of anybody being on the island but themselves.  He had hardly
+made an end of telling his story, when they could perceive, by the
+unusual noise they made, that the two little armies were engaged in a
+bloody fight.  Friday's father used all the arguments he could to
+persuade our people to lie close, and not be seen; he told them their
+safety consisted in it, and that they had nothing to do but lie still,
+and the savages would kill one another to their hands, and then the rest
+would go away; and it was so to a tittle.  But it was impossible to
+prevail, especially upon the Englishmen; their curiosity was so
+importunate that they must run out and see the battle.  However, they
+used some caution too: they did not go openly, just by their own
+dwelling, but went farther into the woods, and placed themselves to
+advantage, where they might securely see them manage the fight, and, as
+they thought, not be seen by them; but the savages did see them, as we
+shall find hereafter.
+
+The battle was very fierce, and, if I might believe the Englishmen, one
+of them said he could perceive that some of them were men of great
+bravery, of invincible spirit, and of great policy in guiding the fight.
+The battle, they said, held two hours before they could guess which party
+would be beaten; but then that party which was nearest our people's
+habitation began to appear weakest, and after some time more some of them
+began to fly; and this put our men again into a great consternation, lest
+any one of those that fled should run into the grove before their
+dwelling for shelter, and thereby involuntarily discover the place; and
+that, by consequence, the pursuers would also do the like in search of
+them.  Upon this, they resolved that they would stand armed within the
+wall, and whoever came into the grove, they resolved to sally out over
+the wall and kill them, so that, if possible, not one should return to
+give an account of it; they ordered also that it should be done with
+their swords, or by knocking them down with the stocks of their muskets,
+but not by shooting them, for fear of raising an alarm by the noise.
+
+As they expected it fell out; three of the routed army fled for life, and
+crossing the creek, ran directly into the place, not in the least knowing
+whither they went, but running as into a thick wood for shelter.  The
+scout they kept to look abroad gave notice of this within, with this
+comforting addition, that the conquerors had not pursued them, or seen
+which way they were gone; upon this the Spanish governor, a man of
+humanity, would not suffer them to kill the three fugitives, but sending
+three men out by the top of the hill, ordered them to go round, come in
+behind them, and surprise and take them prisoners, which was done.  The
+residue of the conquered people fled to their canoes, and got off to sea;
+the victors retired, made no pursuit, or very little, but drawing
+themselves into a body together, gave two great screaming shouts, most
+likely by way of triumph, and so the fight ended; the same day, about
+three o'clock in the afternoon, they also marched to their canoes.  And
+thus the Spaniards had the island again free to themselves, their fright
+was over, and they saw no savages for several years after.
+
+After they were all gone, the Spaniards came out of their den, and
+viewing the field of battle, they found about two-and-thirty men dead on
+the spot; some were killed with long arrows, which were found sticking in
+their bodies; but most of them were killed with great wooden swords,
+sixteen or seventeen of which they found in the field of battle, and as
+many bows, with a great many arrows.  These swords were strange, unwieldy
+things, and they must be very strong men that used them; most of those
+that were killed with them had their heads smashed to pieces, as we may
+say, or, as we call it in English, their brains knocked out, and several
+their arms and legs broken; so that it is evident they fight with
+inexpressible rage and fury.  We found not one man that was not stone
+dead; for either they stay by their enemy till they have killed him, or
+they carry all the wounded men that are not quite dead away with them.
+
+This deliverance tamed our ill-disposed Englishmen for a great while; the
+sight had filled them with horror, and the consequences appeared terrible
+to the last degree, especially upon supposing that some time or other
+they should fall into the hands of those creatures, who would not only
+kill them as enemies, but for food, as we kill our cattle; and they
+professed to me that the thoughts of being eaten up like beef and mutton,
+though it was supposed it was not to be till they were dead, had
+something in it so horrible that it nauseated their very stomachs, made
+them sick when they thought of it, and filled their minds with such
+unusual terror, that they were not themselves for some weeks after.  This,
+as I said, tamed even the three English brutes I have been speaking of;
+and for a great while after they were tractable, and went about the
+common business of the whole society well enough--planted, sowed, reaped,
+and began to be all naturalised to the country.  But some time after this
+they fell into such simple measures again as brought them into a great
+deal of trouble.
+
+They had taken three prisoners, as I observed; and these three being
+stout young fellows, they made them servants, and taught them to work for
+them, and as slaves they did well enough; but they did not take their
+measures as I did by my man Friday, viz. to begin with them upon the
+principle of having saved their lives, and then instruct them in the
+rational principles of life; much less did they think of teaching them
+religion, or attempt civilising and reducing them by kind usage and
+affectionate arguments.  As they gave them their food every day, so they
+gave them their work too, and kept them fully employed in drudgery
+enough; but they failed in this by it, that they never had them to assist
+them and fight for them as I had my man Friday, who was as true to me as
+the very flesh upon my bones.
+
+But to come to the family part.  Being all now good friends--for common
+danger, as I said above, had effectually reconciled them--they began to
+consider their general circumstances; and the first thing that came under
+consideration was whether, seeing the savages particularly haunted that
+side of the island, and that there were more remote and retired parts of
+it equally adapted to their way of living, and manifestly to their
+advantage, they should not rather move their habitation, and plant in
+some more proper place for their safety, and especially for the security
+of their cattle and corn.
+
+Upon this, after long debate, it was concluded that they would not remove
+their habitation; because that, some time or other, they thought they
+might hear from their governor again, meaning me; and if I should send
+any one to seek them, I should be sure to direct them to that side,
+where, if they should find the place demolished, they would conclude the
+savages had killed us all, and we were gone, and so our supply would go
+too.  But as to their corn and cattle, they agreed to remove them into
+the valley where my cave was, where the land was as proper for both, and
+where indeed there was land enough.  However, upon second thoughts they
+altered one part of their resolution too, and resolved only to remove
+part of their cattle thither, and part of their corn there; so that if
+one part was destroyed the other might be saved.  And one part of
+prudence they luckily used: they never trusted those three savages which
+they had taken prisoners with knowing anything of the plantation they had
+made in that valley, or of any cattle they had there, much less of the
+cave at that place, which they kept, in case of necessity, as a safe
+retreat; and thither they carried also the two barrels of powder which I
+had sent them at my coming away.  They resolved, however, not to change
+their habitation; yet, as I had carefully covered it first with a wall or
+fortification, and then with a grove of trees, and as they were now fully
+convinced their safety consisted entirely in their being concealed, they
+set to work to cover and conceal the place yet more effectually than
+before.  For this purpose, as I planted trees, or rather thrust in
+stakes, which in time all grew up to be trees, for some good distance
+before the entrance into my apartments, they went on in the same manner,
+and filled up the rest of that whole space of ground from the trees I had
+set quite down to the side of the creek, where I landed my floats, and
+even into the very ooze where the tide flowed, not so much as leaving any
+place to land, or any sign that there had been any landing thereabouts:
+these stakes also being of a wood very forward to grow, they took care to
+have them generally much larger and taller than those which I had
+planted.  As they grew apace, they planted them so very thick and close
+together, that when they had been three or four years grown there was no
+piercing with the eye any considerable way into the plantation.  As for
+that part which I had planted, the trees were grown as thick as a man's
+thigh, and among them they had placed so many other short ones, and so
+thick, that it stood like a palisado a quarter of a mile thick, and it
+was next to impossible to penetrate it, for a little dog could hardly get
+between the trees, they stood so close.
+
+But this was not all; for they did the same by all the ground to the
+right hand and to the left, and round even to the side of the hill,
+leaving no way, not so much as for themselves, to come out but by the
+ladder placed up to the side of the hill, and then lifted up, and placed
+again from the first stage up to the top: so that when the ladder was
+taken down, nothing but what had wings or witchcraft to assist it could
+come at them.  This was excellently well contrived: nor was it less than
+what they afterwards found occasion for, which served to convince me,
+that as human prudence has the authority of Providence to justify it, so
+it has doubtless the direction of Providence to set it to work; and if we
+listened carefully to the voice of it, I am persuaded we might prevent
+many of the disasters which our lives are now, by our own negligence,
+subjected to.
+
+They lived two years after this in perfect retirement, and had no more
+visits from the savages.  They had, indeed, an alarm given them one
+morning, which put them into a great consternation; for some of the
+Spaniards being out early one morning on the west side or end of the
+island (which was that end where I never went, for fear of being
+discovered), they were surprised with seeing about twenty canoes of
+Indians just coming on shore.  They made the best of their way home in
+hurry enough; and giving the alarm to their comrades, they kept close all
+that day and the next, going out only at night to make their observation:
+but they had the good luck to be undiscovered, for wherever the savages
+went, they did not land that time on the island, but pursued some other
+design.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV--RENEWED INVASION OF SAVAGES
+
+
+And now they had another broil with the three Englishmen; one of whom, a
+most turbulent fellow, being in a rage at one of the three captive
+slaves, because the fellow had not done something right which he bade him
+do, and seemed a little untractable in his showing him, drew a hatchet
+out of a frog-belt which he wore by his side, and fell upon the poor
+savage, not to correct him, but to kill him.  One of the Spaniards who
+was by, seeing him give the fellow a barbarous cut with the hatchet,
+which he aimed at his head, but stuck into his shoulder, so that he
+thought he had cut the poor creature's arm off, ran to him, and
+entreating him not to murder the poor man, placed himself between him and
+the savage, to prevent the mischief.  The fellow, being enraged the more
+at this, struck at the Spaniard with his hatchet, and swore he would
+serve him as he intended to serve the savage; which the Spaniard
+perceiving, avoided the blow, and with a shovel, which he had in his hand
+(for they were all working in the field about their corn land), knocked
+the brute down.  Another of the Englishmen, running up at the same time
+to help his comrade, knocked the Spaniard down; and then two Spaniards
+more came in to help their man, and a third Englishman fell in upon them.
+They had none of them any firearms or any other weapons but hatchets and
+other tools, except this third Englishman; he had one of my rusty
+cutlasses, with which he made at the two last Spaniards, and wounded them
+both.  This fray set the whole family in an uproar, and more help coming
+in they took the three Englishmen prisoners.  The next question was, what
+should be done with them?  They had been so often mutinous, and were so
+very furious, so desperate, and so idle withal, they knew not what course
+to take with them, for they were mischievous to the highest degree, and
+cared not what hurt they did to any man; so that, in short, it was not
+safe to live with them.
+
+The Spaniard who was governor told them, in so many words, that if they
+had been of his own country he would have hanged them; for all laws and
+all governors were to preserve society, and those who were dangerous to
+the society ought to be expelled out of it; but as they were Englishmen,
+and that it was to the generous kindness of an Englishman that they all
+owed their preservation and deliverance, he would use them with all
+possible lenity, and would leave them to the judgment of the other two
+Englishmen, who were their countrymen.  One of the two honest Englishmen
+stood up, and said they desired it might not be left to them.  "For,"
+says he, "I am sure we ought to sentence them to the gallows;" and with
+that he gives an account how Will Atkins, one of the three, had proposed
+to have all the five Englishmen join together and murder all the
+Spaniards when they were in their sleep.
+
+When the Spanish governor heard this, he calls to Will Atkins, "How,
+Seignior Atkins, would you murder us all?  What have you to say to that?"
+The hardened villain was so far from denying it, that he said it was
+true, and swore they would do it still before they had done with them.
+"Well, but Seignior Atkins," says the Spaniard, "what have we done to you
+that you will kill us?  What would you get by killing us?  And what must
+we do to prevent you killing us?  Must we kill you, or you kill us?  Why
+will you put us to the necessity of this, Seignior Atkins?" says the
+Spaniard very calmly, and smiling.  Seignior Atkins was in such a rage at
+the Spaniard's making a jest of it, that, had he not been held by three
+men, and withal had no weapon near him, it was thought he would have
+attempted to kill the Spaniard in the middle of all the company.  This
+hare-brained carriage obliged them to consider seriously what was to be
+done.  The two Englishmen and the Spaniard who saved the poor savage were
+of the opinion that they should hang one of the three for an example to
+the rest, and that particularly it should be he that had twice attempted
+to commit murder with his hatchet; indeed, there was some reason to
+believe he had done it, for the poor savage was in such a miserable
+condition with the wound he had received that it was thought he could not
+live.  But the governor Spaniard still said No; it was an Englishman that
+had saved all their lives, and he would never consent to put an
+Englishman to death, though he had murdered half of them; nay, he said if
+he had been killed himself by an Englishman, and had time left to speak,
+it should be that they should pardon him.
+
+This was so positively insisted on by the governor Spaniard, that there
+was no gainsaying it; and as merciful counsels are most apt to prevail
+where they are so earnestly pressed, so they all came into it.  But then
+it was to be considered what should be done to keep them from doing the
+mischief they designed; for all agreed, governor and all, that means were
+to be used for preserving the society from danger.  After a long debate,
+it was agreed that they should be disarmed, and not permitted to have
+either gun, powder, shot, sword, or any weapon; that they should be
+turned out of the society, and left to live where they would and how they
+would, by themselves; but that none of the rest, either Spaniards or
+English, should hold any kind of converse with them, or have anything to
+do with them; that they should be forbid to come within a certain
+distance of the place where the rest dwelt; and if they offered to commit
+any disorder, so as to spoil, burn, kill, or destroy any of the corn,
+plantings, buildings, fences, or cattle belonging to the society, they
+should die without mercy, and they would shoot them wherever they could
+find them.
+
+The humane governor, musing upon the sentence, considered a little upon
+it; and turning to the two honest Englishmen, said, "Hold; you must
+reflect that it will be long ere they can raise corn and cattle of their
+own, and they must not starve; we must therefore allow them provisions."
+So he caused to be added, that they should have a proportion of corn
+given them to last them eight months, and for seed to sow, by which time
+they might be supposed to raise some of their own; that they should have
+six milch-goats, four he-goats, and six kids given them, as well for
+present subsistence as for a store; and that they should have tools given
+them for their work in the fields, but they should have none of these
+tools or provisions unless they would swear solemnly that they would not
+hurt or injure any of the Spaniards with them, or of their
+fellow-Englishmen.
+
+Thus they dismissed them the society, and turned them out to shift for
+themselves.  They went away sullen and refractory, as neither content to
+go away nor to stay: but, as there was no remedy, they went, pretending
+to go and choose a place where they would settle themselves; and some
+provisions were given them, but no weapons.  About four or five days
+after, they came again for some victuals, and gave the governor an
+account where they had pitched their tents, and marked themselves out a
+habitation and plantation; and it was a very convenient place indeed, on
+the remotest part of the island, NE., much about the place where I
+providentially landed in my first voyage, when I was driven out to sea in
+my foolish attempt to sail round the island.
+
+Here they built themselves two handsome huts, and contrived them in a
+manner like my first habitation, being close under the side of a hill,
+having some trees already growing on three sides of it, so that by
+planting others it would be very easily covered from the sight, unless
+narrowly searched for.  They desired some dried goat-skins for beds and
+covering, which were given them; and upon giving their words that they
+would not disturb the rest, or injure any of their plantations, they gave
+them hatchets, and what other tools they could spare; some peas, barley,
+and rice, for sowing; and, in a word, anything they wanted, except arms
+and ammunition.
+
+They lived in this separate condition about six months, and had got in
+their first harvest, though the quantity was but small, the parcel of
+land they had planted being but little.  Indeed, having all their
+plantation to form, they had a great deal of work upon their hands; and
+when they came to make boards and pots, and such things, they were quite
+out of their element, and could make nothing of it; therefore when the
+rainy season came on, for want of a cave in the earth, they could not
+keep their grain dry, and it was in great danger of spoiling.  This
+humbled them much: so they came and begged the Spaniards to help them,
+which they very readily did; and in four days worked a great hole in the
+side of the hill for them, big enough to secure their corn and other
+things from the rain: but it was a poor place at best compared to mine,
+and especially as mine was then, for the Spaniards had greatly enlarged
+it, and made several new apartments in it.
+
+About three quarters of a year after this separation, a new frolic took
+these rogues, which, together with the former villainy they had
+committed, brought mischief enough upon them, and had very near been the
+ruin of the whole colony.  The three new associates began, it seems, to
+be weary of the laborious life they led, and that without hope of
+bettering their circumstances: and a whim took them that they would make
+a voyage to the continent, from whence the savages came, and would try if
+they could seize upon some prisoners among the natives there, and bring
+them home, so as to make them do the laborious part of the work for them.
+
+The project was not so preposterous, if they had gone no further.  But
+they did nothing, and proposed nothing, but had either mischief in the
+design, or mischief in the event.  And if I may give my opinion, they
+seemed to be under a blast from Heaven: for if we will not allow a
+visible curse to pursue visible crimes, how shall we reconcile the events
+of things with the divine justice?  It was certainly an apparent
+vengeance on their crime of mutiny and piracy that brought them to the
+state they were in; and they showed not the least remorse for the crime,
+but added new villanies to it, such as the piece of monstrous cruelty of
+wounding a poor slave because he did not, or perhaps could not,
+understand to do what he was directed, and to wound him in such a manner
+as made him a cripple all his life, and in a place where no surgeon or
+medicine could be had for his cure; and, what was still worse, the
+intentional murder, for such to be sure it was, as was afterwards the
+formed design they all laid to murder the Spaniards in cold blood, and in
+their sleep.
+
+The three fellows came down to the Spaniards one morning, and in very
+humble terms desired to be admitted to speak with them.  The Spaniards
+very readily heard what they had to say, which was this: that they were
+tired of living in the manner they did, and that they were not handy
+enough to make the necessaries they wanted, and that having no help, they
+found they should be starved; but if the Spaniards would give them leave
+to take one of the canoes which they came over in, and give them arms and
+ammunition proportioned to their defence, they would go over to the main,
+and seek their fortunes, and so deliver them from the trouble of
+supplying them with any other provisions.
+
+The Spaniards were glad enough to get rid of them, but very honestly
+represented to them the certain destruction they were running into; told
+them they had suffered such hardships upon that very spot, that they
+could, without any spirit of prophecy, tell them they would be starved or
+murdered, and bade them consider of it.  The men replied audaciously,
+they should be starved if they stayed here, for they could not work, and
+would not work, and they could but be starved abroad; and if they were
+murdered, there was an end of them; they had no wives or children to cry
+after them; and, in short, insisted importunately upon their demand,
+declaring they would go, whether they gave them any arms or not.
+
+The Spaniards told them, with great kindness, that if they were resolved
+to go they should not go like naked men, and be in no condition to defend
+themselves; and that though they could ill spare firearms, not having
+enough for themselves, yet they would let them have two muskets, a
+pistol, and a cutlass, and each man a hatchet, which they thought was
+sufficient for them.  In a word, they accepted the offer; and having
+baked bread enough to serve them a month given them, and as much goats'
+flesh as they could eat while it was sweet, with a great basket of dried
+grapes, a pot of fresh water, and a young kid alive, they boldly set out
+in the canoe for a voyage over the sea, where it was at least forty miles
+broad.  The boat, indeed, was a large one, and would very well have
+carried fifteen or twenty men, and therefore was rather too big for them
+to manage; but as they had a fair breeze and flood-tide with them, they
+did well enough.  They had made a mast of a long pole, and a sail of four
+large goat-skins dried, which they had sewed or laced together; and away
+they went merrily together.  The Spaniards called after them "_Bon
+voyajo_;" and no man ever thought of seeing them any more.
+
+The Spaniards were often saying to one another, and to the two honest
+Englishmen who remained behind, how quietly and comfortably they lived,
+now these three turbulent fellows were gone.  As for their coming again,
+that was the remotest thing from their thoughts that could be imagined;
+when, behold, after two-and-twenty days' absence, one of the Englishmen
+being abroad upon his planting work, sees three strange men coming
+towards him at a distance, with guns upon their shoulders.
+
+Away runs the Englishman, frightened and amazed, as if he was bewitched,
+to the governor Spaniard, and tells him they were all undone, for there
+were strangers upon the island, but he could not tell who they were.  The
+Spaniard, pausing a while, says to him, "How do you mean--you cannot tell
+who?  They are the savages, to be sure."  "No, no," says the Englishman,
+"they are men in clothes, with arms."  "Nay, then," says the Spaniard,
+"why are you so concerned!  If they are not savages they must be friends;
+for there is no Christian nation upon earth but will do us good rather
+than harm."  While they were debating thus, came up the three Englishmen,
+and standing without the wood, which was new planted, hallooed to them.
+They presently knew their voices, and so all the wonder ceased.  But now
+the admiration was turned upon another question--What could be the
+matter, and what made them come back again?
+
+It was not long before they brought the men in, and inquiring where they
+had been, and what they had been doing, they gave them a full account of
+their voyage in a few words: that they reached the land in less than two
+days, but finding the people alarmed at their coming, and preparing with
+bows and arrows to fight them, they durst not go on shore, but sailed on
+to the northward six or seven hours, till they came to a great opening,
+by which they perceived that the land they saw from our island was not
+the main, but an island: that upon entering that opening of the sea they
+saw another island on the right hand north, and several more west; and
+being resolved to land somewhere, they put over to one of the islands
+which lay west, and went boldly on shore; that they found the people very
+courteous and friendly to them; and they gave them several roots and some
+dried fish, and appeared very sociable; and that the women, as well as
+the men, were very forward to supply them with anything they could get
+for them to eat, and brought it to them a great way, on their heads.  They
+continued here for four days, and inquired as well as they could of them
+by signs, what nations were this way, and that way, and were told of
+several fierce and terrible people that lived almost every way, who, as
+they made known by signs to them, used to eat men; but, as for
+themselves, they said they never ate men or women, except only such as
+they took in the wars; and then they owned they made a great feast, and
+ate their prisoners.
+
+The Englishmen inquired when they had had a feast of that kind; and they
+told them about two moons ago, pointing to the moon and to two fingers;
+and that their great king had two hundred prisoners now, which he had
+taken in his war, and they were feeding them to make them fat for the
+next feast.  The Englishmen seemed mighty desirous of seeing those
+prisoners; but the others mistaking them, thought they were desirous to
+have some of them to carry away for their own eating.  So they beckoned
+to them, pointing to the setting of the sun, and then to the rising;
+which was to signify that the next morning at sunrising they would bring
+some for them; and accordingly the next morning they brought down five
+women and eleven men, and gave them to the Englishmen to carry with them
+on their voyage, just as we would bring so many cows and oxen down to a
+seaport town to victual a ship.
+
+As brutish and barbarous as these fellows were at home, their stomachs
+turned at this sight, and they did not know what to do.  To refuse the
+prisoners would have been the highest affront to the savage gentry that
+could be offered them, and what to do with them they knew not.  However,
+after some debate, they resolved to accept of them: and, in return, they
+gave the savages that brought them one of their hatchets, an old key, a
+knife, and six or seven of their bullets; which, though they did not
+understand their use, they seemed particularly pleased with; and then
+tying the poor creatures' hands behind them, they dragged the prisoners
+into the boat for our men.
+
+The Englishmen were obliged to come away as soon as they had them, or
+else they that gave them this noble present would certainly have expected
+that they should have gone to work with them, have killed two or three of
+them the next morning, and perhaps have invited the donors to dinner.  But
+having taken their leave, with all the respect and thanks that could well
+pass between people, where on either side they understood not one word
+they could say, they put off with their boat, and came back towards the
+first island; where, when they arrived, they set eight of their prisoners
+at liberty, there being too many of them for their occasion.  In their
+voyage they endeavoured to have some communication with their prisoners;
+but it was impossible to make them understand anything.  Nothing they
+could say to them, or give them, or do for them, but was looked upon as
+going to murder them.  They first of all unbound them; but the poor
+creatures screamed at that, especially the women, as if they had just
+felt the knife at their throats; for they immediately concluded they were
+unbound on purpose to be killed.  If they gave them thing to eat, it was
+the same thing; they then concluded it was for fear they should sink in
+flesh, and so not be fat enough to kill.  If they looked at one of them
+more particularly, the party presently concluded it was to see whether he
+or she was fattest, and fittest to kill first; nay, after they had
+brought them quite over, and began to use them kindly, and treat them
+well, still they expected every day to make a dinner or supper for their
+new masters.
+
+When the three wanderers had give this unaccountable history or journal
+of their voyage, the Spaniard asked them where their new family was; and
+being told that they had brought them on shore, and put them into one of
+their huts, and were come up to beg some victuals for them, they (the
+Spaniards) and the other two Englishmen, that is to say, the whole
+colony, resolved to go all down to the place and see them; and did so,
+and Friday's father with them.  When they came into the hut, there they
+sat, all bound; for when they had brought them on shore they bound their
+hands that they might not take the boat and make their escape; there, I
+say, they sat, all of them stark naked.  First, there were three comely
+fellows, well shaped, with straight limbs, about thirty to thirty-five
+years of age; and five women, whereof two might be from thirty to forty,
+two more about four or five and twenty; and the fifth, a tall, comely
+maiden, about seventeen.  The women were well-favoured, agreeable
+persons, both in shape and features, only tawny; and two of them, had
+they been perfect white, would have passed for very handsome women, even
+in London, having pleasant countenances, and of a very modest behaviour;
+especially when they came afterwards to be clothed and dressed, though
+that dress was very indifferent, it must be confessed.
+
+The sight, you may be sure, was something uncouth to our Spaniards, who
+were, to give them a just character, men of the most calm, sedate
+tempers, and perfect good humour, that ever I met with: and, in
+particular, of the utmost modesty: I say, the sight was very uncouth, to
+see three naked men and five naked women, all together bound, and in the
+most miserable circumstances that human nature could be supposed to be,
+viz. to be expecting every moment to be dragged out and have their brains
+knocked out, and then to be eaten up like a calf that is killed for a
+dainty.
+
+The first thing they did was to cause the old Indian, Friday's father, to
+go in, and see first if he knew any of them, and then if he understood
+any of their speech.  As soon as the old man came in, he looked seriously
+at them, but knew none of them; neither could any of them understand a
+word he said, or a sign he could make, except one of the women.  However,
+this was enough to answer the end, which was to satisfy them that the men
+into whose hands they were fallen were Christians; that they abhorred
+eating men or women; and that they might be sure they would not be
+killed.  As soon as they were assured of this, they discovered such a
+joy, and by such awkward gestures, several ways, as is hard to describe;
+for it seems they were of several nations.  The woman who was their
+interpreter was bid, in the next place, to ask them if they were willing
+to be servants, and to work for the men who had brought them away, to
+save their lives; at which they all fell a-dancing; and presently one
+fell to taking up this, and another that, anything that lay next, to
+carry on their shoulders, to intimate they were willing to work.
+
+The governor, who found that the having women among them would presently
+be attended with some inconvenience, and might occasion some strife, and
+perhaps blood, asked the three men what they intended to do with these
+women, and how they intended to use them, whether as servants or as
+wives?  One of the Englishmen answered, very boldly and readily, that
+they would use them as both; to which the governor said: "I am not going
+to restrain you from it--you are your own masters as to that; but this I
+think is but just, for avoiding disorders and quarrels among you, and I
+desire it of you for that reason only, viz. that you will all engage,
+that if any of you take any of these women as a wife, he shall take but
+one; and that having taken one, none else shall touch her; for though we
+cannot marry any one of you, yet it is but reasonable that, while you
+stay here, the woman any of you takes shall be maintained by the man that
+takes her, and should be his wife--I mean," says he, "while he continues
+here, and that none else shall have anything to do with her."  All this
+appeared so just, that every one agreed to it without any difficulty.
+
+Then the Englishmen asked the Spaniards if they designed to take any of
+them?  But every one of them answered "No."  Some of them said they had
+wives in Spain, and the others did not like women that were not
+Christians; and all together declared that they would not touch one of
+them, which was an instance of such virtue as I have not met with in all
+my travels.  On the other hand, the five Englishmen took them every one a
+wife, that is to say, a temporary wife; and so they set up a new form of
+living; for the Spaniards and Friday's father lived in my old habitation,
+which they had enlarged exceedingly within.  The three servants which
+were taken in the last battle of the savages lived with them; and these
+carried on the main part of the colony, supplied all the rest with food,
+and assisted them in anything as they could, or as they found necessity
+required.
+
+But the wonder of the story was, how five such refractory, ill-matched
+fellows should agree about these women, and that some two of them should
+not choose the same woman, especially seeing two or three of them were,
+without comparison, more agreeable than the others; but they took a good
+way enough to prevent quarrelling among themselves, for they set the five
+women by themselves in one of their huts, and they went all into the
+other hut, and drew lots among them who should choose first.
+
+Him that drew to choose first went away by himself to the hut where the
+poor naked creatures were, and fetched out her he chose; and it was worth
+observing, that he that chose first took her that was reckoned the
+homeliest and oldest of the five, which made mirth enough amongst the
+rest; and even the Spaniards laughed at it; but the fellow considered
+better than any of them, that it was application and business they were
+to expect assistance in, as much as in anything else; and she proved the
+best wife of all the parcel.
+
+When the poor women saw themselves set in a row thus, and fetched out one
+by one, the terrors of their condition returned upon them again, and they
+firmly believed they were now going to be devoured.  Accordingly, when
+the English sailor came in and fetched out one of them, the rest set up a
+most lamentable cry, and hung about her, and took their leave of her with
+such agonies and affection as would have grieved the hardest heart in the
+world: nor was it possible for the Englishmen to satisfy them that they
+were not to be immediately murdered, till they fetched the old man,
+Friday's father, who immediately let them know that the five men, who
+were to fetch them out one by one, had chosen them for their wives.  When
+they had done, and the fright the women were in was a little over, the
+men went to work, and the Spaniards came and helped them: and in a few
+hours they had built them every one a new hut or tent for their lodging
+apart; for those they had already were crowded with their tools,
+household stuff, and provisions.  The three wicked ones had pitched
+farthest off, and the two honest ones nearer, but both on the north shore
+of the island, so that they continued separated as before; and thus my
+island was peopled in three places, and, as I might say, three towns were
+begun to be built.
+
+And here it is very well worth observing that, as it often happens in the
+world (what the wise ends in God's providence are, in such a disposition
+of things, I cannot say), the two honest fellows had the two worst wives;
+and the three reprobates, that were scarce worth hanging, that were fit
+for nothing, and neither seemed born to do themselves good nor any one
+else, had three clever, careful, and ingenious wives; not that the first
+two were bad wives as to their temper or humour, for all the five were
+most willing, quiet, passive, and subjected creatures, rather like slaves
+than wives; but my meaning is, they were not alike capable, ingenious, or
+industrious, or alike cleanly and neat.  Another observation I must make,
+to the honour of a diligent application on one hand, and to the disgrace
+of a slothful, negligent, idle temper on the other, that when I came to
+the place, and viewed the several improvements, plantings, and management
+of the several little colonies, the two men had so far out-gone the
+three, that there was no comparison.  They had, indeed, both of them as
+much ground laid out for corn as they wanted, and the reason was,
+because, according to my rule, nature dictated that it was to no purpose
+to sow more corn than they wanted; but the difference of the cultivation,
+of the planting, of the fences, and indeed, of everything else, was easy
+to be seen at first view.
+
+The two men had innumerable young trees planted about their huts, so
+that, when you came to the place, nothing was to be seen but a wood; and
+though they had twice had their plantation demolished, once by their own
+countrymen, and once by the enemy, as shall be shown in its place, yet
+they had restored all again, and everything was thriving and flourishing
+about them; they had grapes planted in order, and managed like a
+vineyard, though they had themselves never seen anything of that kind;
+and by their good ordering their vines, their grapes were as good again
+as any of the others.  They had also found themselves out a retreat in
+the thickest part of the woods, where, though there was not a natural
+cave, as I had found, yet they made one with incessant labour of their
+hands, and where, when the mischief which followed happened, they secured
+their wives and children so as they could never be found; they having, by
+sticking innumerable stakes and poles of the wood which, as I said, grew
+so readily, made the grove impassable, except in some places, when they
+climbed up to get over the outside part, and then went on by ways of
+their own leaving.
+
+As to the three reprobates, as I justly call them, though they were much
+civilised by their settlement compared to what they were before, and were
+not so quarrelsome, having not the same opportunity; yet one of the
+certain companions of a profligate mind never left them, and that was
+their idleness.  It is true, they planted corn and made fences; but
+Solomon's words were never better verified than in them, "I went by the
+vineyard of the slothful, and it was all overgrown with thorns": for when
+the Spaniards came to view their crop they could not see it in some
+places for weeds, the hedge had several gaps in it, where the wild goats
+had got in and eaten up the corn; perhaps here and there a dead bush was
+crammed in, to stop them out for the present, but it was only shutting
+the stable-door after the steed was stolen.  Whereas, when they looked on
+the colony of the other two, there was the very face of industry and
+success upon all they did; there was not a weed to be seen in all their
+corn, or a gap in any of their hedges; and they, on the other hand,
+verified Solomon's words in another place, "that the diligent hand maketh
+rich"; for everything grew and thrived, and they had plenty within and
+without; they had more tame cattle than the others, more utensils and
+necessaries within doors, and yet more pleasure and diversion too.
+
+It is true, the wives of the three were very handy and cleanly within
+doors; and having learned the English ways of dressing, and cooking from
+one of the other Englishmen, who, as I said, was a cook's mate on board
+the ship, they dressed their husbands' victuals very nicely and well;
+whereas the others could not be brought to understand it; but then the
+husband, who, as I say, had been cook's mate, did it himself.  But as for
+the husbands of the three wives, they loitered about, fetched turtles'
+eggs, and caught fish and birds: in a word, anything but labour; and they
+fared accordingly.  The diligent lived well and comfortably, and the
+slothful hard and beggarly; and so, I believe, generally speaking, it is
+all over the world.
+
+But I now come to a scene different from all that had happened before,
+either to them or to me; and the origin of the story was this: Early one
+morning there came on shore five or six canoes of Indians or savages,
+call them which you please, and there is no room to doubt they came upon
+the old errand of feeding upon their slaves; but that part was now so
+familiar to the Spaniards, and to our men too, that they did not concern
+themselves about it, as I did: but having been made sensible, by their
+experience, that their only business was to lie concealed, and that if
+they were not seen by any of the savages they would go off again quietly,
+when their business was done, having as yet not the least notion of there
+being any inhabitants in the island; I say, having been made sensible of
+this, they had nothing to do but to give notice to all the three
+plantations to keep within doors, and not show themselves, only placing a
+scout in a proper place, to give notice when the boats went to sea again.
+
+This was, without doubt, very right; but a disaster spoiled all these
+measures, and made it known among the savages that there were inhabitants
+there; which was, in the end, the desolation of almost the whole colony.
+After the canoes with the savages were gone off, the Spaniards peeped
+abroad again; and some of them had the curiosity to go to the place where
+they had been, to see what they had been doing.  Here, to their great
+surprise, they found three savages left behind, and lying fast asleep
+upon the ground.  It was supposed they had either been so gorged with
+their inhuman feast, that, like beasts, they were fallen asleep, and
+would not stir when the others went, or they had wandered into the woods,
+and did not come back in time to be taken in.
+
+The Spaniards were greatly surprised at this sight and perfectly at a
+loss what to do.  The Spaniard governor, as it happened, was with them,
+and his advice was asked, but he professed he knew not what to do.  As
+for slaves, they had enough already; and as to killing them, there were
+none of them inclined to do that: the Spaniard governor told me they
+could not think of shedding innocent blood; for as to them, the poor
+creatures had done them no wrong, invaded none of their property, and
+they thought they had no just quarrel against them, to take away their
+lives.  And here I must, in justice to these Spaniards, observe that, let
+the accounts of Spanish cruelty in Mexico and Peru be what they will, I
+never met with seventeen men of any nation whatsoever, in any foreign
+country, who were so universally modest, temperate, virtuous, so very
+good-humoured, and so courteous, as these Spaniards: and as to cruelty,
+they had nothing of it in their very nature; no inhumanity, no barbarity,
+no outrageous passions; and yet all of them men of great courage and
+spirit.  Their temper and calmness had appeared in their bearing the
+insufferable usage of the three Englishmen; and their justice and
+humanity appeared now in the case of the savages above.  After some
+consultation they resolved upon this; that they would lie still a while
+longer, till, if possible, these three men might be gone.  But then the
+governor recollected that the three savages had no boat; and if they were
+left to rove about the island, they would certainly discover that there
+were inhabitants in it; and so they should be undone that way.  Upon
+this, they went back again, and there lay the fellows fast asleep still,
+and so they resolved to awaken them, and take them prisoners; and they
+did so.  The poor fellows were strangely frightened when they were seized
+upon and bound; and afraid, like the women, that they should be murdered
+and eaten: for it seems those people think all the world does as they do,
+in eating men's flesh; but they were soon made easy as to that, and away
+they carried them.
+
+It was very happy for them that they did not carry them home to the
+castle, I mean to my palace under the hill; but they carried them first
+to the bower, where was the chief of their country work, such as the
+keeping the goats, the planting the corn, &c.; and afterward they carried
+them to the habitation of the two Englishmen.  Here they were set to
+work, though it was not much they had for them to do; and whether it was
+by negligence in guarding them, or that they thought the fellows could
+not mend themselves, I know not, but one of them ran away, and, taking to
+the woods, they could never hear of him any more.  They had good reason
+to believe he got home again soon after in some other boats or canoes of
+savages who came on shore three or four weeks afterwards, and who,
+carrying on their revels as usual, went off in two days' time.  This
+thought terrified them exceedingly; for they concluded, and that not
+without good cause indeed, that if this fellow came home safe among his
+comrades, he would certainly give them an account that there were people
+in the island, and also how few and weak they were; for this savage, as
+observed before, had never been told, and it was very happy he had not,
+how many there were or where they lived; nor had he ever seen or heard
+the fire of any of their guns, much less had they shown him any of their
+other retired places; such as the cave in the valley, or the new retreat
+which the two Englishmen had made, and the like.
+
+The first testimony they had that this fellow had given intelligence of
+them was, that about two months after this six canoes of savages, with
+about seven, eight, or ten men in a canoe, came rowing along the north
+side of the island, where they never used to come before, and landed,
+about an hour after sunrise, at a convenient place, about a mile from the
+habitation of the two Englishmen, where this escaped man had been kept.
+As the chief Spaniard said, had they been all there the damage would not
+have been so much, for not a man of them would have escaped; but the case
+differed now very much, for two men to fifty was too much odds.  The two
+men had the happiness to discover them about a league off, so that it was
+above an hour before they landed; and as they landed a mile from their
+huts, it was some time before they could come at them.  Now, having great
+reason to believe that they were betrayed, the first thing they did was
+to bind the two slaves which were left, and cause two of the three men
+whom they brought with the women (who, it seems, proved very faithful to
+them) to lead them, with their two wives, and whatever they could carry
+away with them, to their retired places in the woods, which I have spoken
+of above, and there to bind the two fellows hand and foot, till they
+heard farther.  In the next place, seeing the savages were all come on
+shore, and that they had bent their course directly that way, they opened
+the fences where the milch cows were kept, and drove them all out;
+leaving their goats to straggle in the woods, whither they pleased, that
+the savages might think they were all bred wild; but the rogue who came
+with them was too cunning for that, and gave them an account of it all,
+for they went directly to the place.
+
+When the two poor frightened men had secured their wives and goods, they
+sent the other slave they had of the three who came with the women, and
+who was at their place by accident, away to the Spaniards with all speed,
+to give them the alarm, and desire speedy help, and, in the meantime,
+they took their arms and what ammunition they had, and retreated towards
+the place in the wood where their wives were sent; keeping at a distance,
+yet so that they might see, if possible, which way the savages took.  They
+had not gone far but that from a rising ground they could see the little
+army of their enemies come on directly to their habitation, and, in a
+moment more, could see all their huts and household stuff flaming up
+together, to their great grief and mortification; for this was a great
+loss to them, irretrievable, indeed, for some time.  They kept their
+station for a while, till they found the savages, like wild beasts,
+spread themselves all over the place, rummaging every way, and every
+place they could think of, in search of prey; and in particular for the
+people, of whom now it plainly appeared they had intelligence.
+
+The two Englishmen seeing this, thinking themselves not secure where they
+stood, because it was likely some of the wild people might come that way,
+and they might come too many together, thought it proper to make another
+retreat about half a mile farther; believing, as it afterwards happened,
+that the further they strolled, the fewer would be together.  Their next
+halt was at the entrance into a very thick-grown part of the woods, and
+where an old trunk of a tree stood, which was hollow and very large; and
+in this tree they both took their standing, resolving to see there what
+might offer.  They had not stood there long before two of the savages
+appeared running directly that way, as if they had already had notice
+where they stood, and were coming up to attack them; and a little way
+farther they espied three more coming after them, and five more beyond
+them, all coming the same way; besides which, they saw seven or eight
+more at a distance, running another way; for in a word, they ran every
+way, like sportsmen beating for their game.
+
+The poor men were now in great perplexity whether they should stand and
+keep their posture or fly; but after a very short debate with themselves,
+they considered that if the savages ranged the country thus before help
+came, they might perhaps find their retreat in the woods, and then all
+would be lost; so they resolved to stand them there, and if they were too
+many to deal with, then they would get up to the top of the tree, from
+whence they doubted not to defend themselves, fire excepted, as long as
+their ammunition lasted, though all the savages that were landed, which
+was near fifty, were to attack them.
+
+Having resolved upon this, they next considered whether they should fire
+at the first two, or wait for the three, and so take the middle party, by
+which the two and the five that followed would be separated; at length
+they resolved to let the first two pass by, unless they should spy them
+the tree, and come to attack them.  The first two savages confirmed them
+also in this resolution, by turning a little from them towards another
+part of the wood; but the three, and the five after them, came forward
+directly to the tree, as if they had known the Englishmen were there.
+Seeing them come so straight towards them, they resolved to take them in
+a line as they came: and as they resolved to fire but one at a time,
+perhaps the first shot might hit them all three; for which purpose the
+man who was to fire put three or four small bullets into his piece; and
+having a fair loophole, as it were, from a broken hole in the tree, he
+took a sure aim, without being seen, waiting till they were within about
+thirty yards of the tree, so that he could not miss.
+
+While they were thus waiting, and the savages came on, they plainly saw
+that one of the three was the runaway savage that had escaped from them;
+and they both knew him distinctly, and resolved that, if possible, he
+should not escape, though they should both fire; so the other stood ready
+with his piece, that if he did not drop at the first shot, he should be
+sure to have a second.  But the first was too good a marksman to miss his
+aim; for as the savages kept near one another, a little behind in a line,
+he fired, and hit two of them directly; the foremost was killed outright,
+being shot in the head; the second, which was the runaway Indian, was
+shot through the body, and fell, but was not quite dead; and the third
+had a little scratch in the shoulder, perhaps by the same ball that went
+through the body of the second; and being dreadfully frightened, though
+not so much hurt, sat down upon the ground, screaming and yelling in a
+hideous manner.
+
+The five that were behind, more frightened with the noise than sensible
+of the danger, stood still at first; for the woods made the sound a
+thousand times bigger than it really was, the echoes rattling from one
+side to another, and the fowls rising from all parts, screaming, and
+every sort making a different noise, according to their kind; just as it
+was when I fired the first gun that perhaps was ever shot off in the
+island.
+
+However, all being silent again, and they not knowing what the matter
+was, came on unconcerned, till they came to the place where their
+companions lay in a condition miserable enough.  Here the poor ignorant
+creatures, not sensible that they were within reach of the same mischief,
+stood all together over the wounded man, talking, and, as may be
+supposed, inquiring of him how he came to be hurt; and who, it is very
+rational to believe, told them that a flash of fire first, and
+immediately after that thunder from their gods, had killed those two and
+wounded him.  This, I say, is rational; for nothing is more certain than
+that, as they saw no man near them, so they had never heard a gun in all
+their lives, nor so much as heard of a gun; neither knew they anything of
+killing and wounding at a distance with fire and bullets: if they had,
+one might reasonably believe they would not have stood so unconcerned to
+view the fate of their fellows, without some apprehensions of their own.
+
+Our two men, as they confessed to me, were grieved to be obliged to kill
+so many poor creatures, who had no notion of their danger; yet, having
+them all thus in their power, and the first having loaded his piece
+again, resolved to let fly both together among them; and singling out, by
+agreement, which to aim at, they shot together, and killed, or very much
+wounded, four of them; the fifth, frightened even to death, though not
+hurt, fell with the rest; so that our men, seeing them all fall together,
+thought they had killed them all.
+
+The belief that the savages were all killed made our two men come boldly
+out from the tree before they had charged their guns, which was a wrong
+step; and they were under some surprise when they came to the place, and
+found no less than four of them alive, and of them two very little hurt,
+and one not at all.  This obliged them to fall upon them with the stocks
+of their muskets; and first they made sure of the runaway savage, that
+had been the cause of all the mischief, and of another that was hurt in
+the knee, and put them out of their pain; then the man that was not hurt
+at all came and kneeled down to them, with his two hands held up, and
+made piteous moans to them, by gestures and signs, for his life, but
+could not say one word to them that they could understand.  However, they
+made signs to him to sit down at the foot of a tree hard by; and one of
+the Englishmen, with a piece of rope-yarn, which he had by great chance
+in his pocket, tied his two hands behind him, and there they left him;
+and with what speed they could made after the other two, which were gone
+before, fearing they, or any more of them, should find way to their
+covered place in the woods, where their wives, and the few goods they had
+left, lay.  They came once in sight of the two men, but it was at a great
+distance; however, they had the satisfaction to see them cross over a
+valley towards the sea, quite the contrary way from that which led to
+their retreat, which they were afraid of; and being satisfied with that,
+they went back to the tree where they left their prisoner, who, as they
+supposed, was delivered by his comrades, for he was gone, and the two
+pieces of rope-yarn with which they had bound him lay just at the foot of
+the tree.
+
+They were now in as great concern as before, not knowing what course to
+take, or how near the enemy might be, or in what number; so they resolved
+to go away to the place where their wives were, to see if all was well
+there, and to make them easy.  These were in fright enough, to be sure;
+for though the savages were their own countrymen, yet they were most
+terribly afraid of them, and perhaps the more for the knowledge they had
+of them.  When they came there, they found the savages had been in the
+wood, and very near that place, but had not found it; for it was indeed
+inaccessible, from the trees standing so thick, unless the persons
+seeking it had been directed by those that knew it, which these did not:
+they found, therefore, everything very safe, only the women in a terrible
+fright.  While they were here they had the comfort to have seven of the
+Spaniards come to their assistance; the other ten, with their servants,
+and Friday's father, were gone in a body to defend their bower, and the
+corn and cattle that were kept there, in case the savages should have
+roved over to that side of the country, but they did not spread so far.
+With the seven Spaniards came one of the three savages, who, as I said,
+were their prisoners formerly; and with them also came the savage whom
+the Englishmen had left bound hand and foot at the tree; for it seems
+they came that way, saw the slaughter of the seven men, and unbound the
+eighth, and brought him along with them; where, however, they were
+obliged to bind again, as they had the two others who were left when the
+third ran away.
+
+The prisoners now began to be a burden to them; and they were so afraid
+of their escaping, that they were once resolving to kill them all,
+believing they were under an absolute necessity to do so for their own
+preservation.  However, the chief of the Spaniards would not consent to
+it, but ordered, for the present, that they should be sent out of the way
+to my old cave in the valley, and be kept there, with two Spaniards to
+guard them, and have food for their subsistence, which was done; and they
+were bound there hand and foot for that night.
+
+When the Spaniards came, the two Englishmen were so encouraged, that they
+could not satisfy themselves to stay any longer there; but taking five of
+the Spaniards, and themselves, with four muskets and a pistol among them,
+and two stout quarter-staves, away they went in quest of the savages.  And
+first they came to the tree where the men lay that had been killed; but
+it was easy to see that some more of the savages had been there, for they
+had attempted to carry their dead men away, and had dragged two of them a
+good way, but had given it over.  From thence they advanced to the first
+rising ground, where they had stood and seen their camp destroyed, and
+where they had the mortification still to see some of the smoke; but
+neither could they here see any of the savages.  They then resolved,
+though with all possible caution, to go forward towards their ruined
+plantation; but, a little before they came thither, coming in sight of
+the sea-shore, they saw plainly the savages all embarked again in their
+canoes, in order to be gone.  They seemed sorry at first that there was
+no way to come at them, to give them a parting blow; but, upon the whole,
+they were very well satisfied to be rid of them.
+
+The poor Englishmen being now twice ruined, and all their improvements
+destroyed, the rest all agreed to come and help them to rebuild, and
+assist them with needful supplies.  Their three countrymen, who were not
+yet noted for having the least inclination to do any good, yet as soon as
+they heard of it (for they, living remote eastward, knew nothing of the
+matter till all was over), came and offered their help and assistance,
+and did, very friendly, work for several days to restore their habitation
+and make necessaries for them.  And thus in a little time they were set
+upon their legs again.
+
+About two days after this they had the farther satisfaction of seeing
+three of the savages' canoes come driving on shore, and, at some distance
+from them, two drowned men, by which they had reason to believe that they
+had met with a storm at sea, which had overset some of them; for it had
+blown very hard the night after they went off.  However, as some might
+miscarry, so, on the other hand, enough of them escaped to inform the
+rest, as well of what they had done as of what had happened to them; and
+to whet them on to another enterprise of the same nature, which they, it
+seems, resolved to attempt, with sufficient force to carry all before
+them; for except what the first man had told them of inhabitants, they
+could say little of it of their own knowledge, for they never saw one
+man; and the fellow being killed that had affirmed it, they had no other
+witness to confirm it to, them.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V--A GREAT VICTORY
+
+
+It was five or six months after this before they heard any more of the
+savages, in which time our men were in hopes they had either forgot their
+former bad luck, or given over hopes of better; when, on a sudden, they
+were invaded with a most formidable fleet of no less than
+eight-and-twenty canoes, full of savages, armed with bows and arrows,
+great clubs, wooden swords, and such like engines of war; and they
+brought such numbers with them, that, in short, it put all our people
+into the utmost consternation.
+
+As they came on shore in the evening, and at the easternmost side of the
+island, our men had that night to consult and consider what to do.  In
+the first place, knowing that their being entirely concealed was their
+only safety before and would be much more so now, while the number of
+their enemies would be so great, they resolved, first of all, to take
+down the huts which were built for the two Englishmen, and drive away
+their goats to the old cave; because they supposed the savages would go
+directly thither, as soon as it was day, to play the old game over again,
+though they did not now land within two leagues of it.  In the next
+place, they drove away all the flocks of goats they had at the old bower,
+as I called it, which belonged to the Spaniards; and, in short, left as
+little appearance of inhabitants anywhere as was possible; and the next
+morning early they posted themselves, with all their force, at the
+plantation of the two men, to wait for their coming.  As they guessed, so
+it happened: these new invaders, leaving their canoes at the east end of
+the island, came ranging along the shore, directly towards the place, to
+the number of two hundred and fifty, as near as our men could judge.  Our
+army was but small indeed; but, that which was worse, they had not arms
+for all their number.  The whole account, it seems, stood thus: first, as
+to men, seventeen Spaniards, five Englishmen, old Friday, the three
+slaves taken with the women, who proved very faithful, and three other
+slaves, who lived with the Spaniards.  To arm these, they had eleven
+muskets, five pistols, three fowling-pieces, five muskets or
+fowling-pieces which were taken by me from the mutinous seamen whom I
+reduced, two swords, and three old halberds.
+
+To their slaves they did not give either musket or fusee; but they had
+each a halberd, or a long staff, like a quarter-staff, with a great spike
+of iron fastened into each end of it, and by his side a hatchet; also
+every one of our men had a hatchet.  Two of the women could not be
+prevailed upon but they would come into the fight, and they had bows and
+arrows, which the Spaniards had taken from the savages when the first
+action happened, which I have spoken of, where the Indians fought with
+one another; and the women had hatchets too.
+
+The chief Spaniard, whom I described so often, commanded the whole; and
+Will Atkins, who, though a dreadful fellow for wickedness, was a most
+daring, bold fellow, commanded under him.  The savages came forward like
+lions; and our men, which was the worst of their fate, had no advantage
+in their situation; only that Will Atkins, who now proved a most useful
+fellow, with six men, was planted just behind a small thicket of bushes
+as an advanced guard, with orders to let the first of them pass by and
+then fire into the middle of them, and as soon as he had fired, to make
+his retreat as nimbly as he could round a part of the wood, and so come
+in behind the Spaniards, where they stood, having a thicket of trees
+before them.
+
+When the savages came on, they ran straggling about every way in heaps,
+out of all manner of order, and Will Atkins let about fifty of them pass
+by him; then seeing the rest come in a very thick throng, he orders three
+of his men to fire, having loaded their muskets with six or seven bullets
+apiece, about as big as large pistol-bullets.  How many they killed or
+wounded they knew not, but the consternation and surprise was
+inexpressible among the savages; they were frightened to the last degree
+to hear such a dreadful noise, and see their men killed, and others hurt,
+but see nobody that did it; when, in the middle of their fright, Will
+Atkins and his other three let fly again among the thickest of them; and
+in less than a minute the first three, being loaded again, gave them a
+third volley.
+
+Had Will Atkins and his men retired immediately, as soon as they had
+fired, as they were ordered to do, or had the rest of the body been at
+hand to have poured in their shot continually, the savages had been
+effectually routed; for the terror that was among them came principally
+from this, that they were killed by the gods with thunder and lightning,
+and could see nobody that hurt them.  But Will Atkins, staying to load
+again, discovered the cheat: some of the savages who were at a distance
+spying them, came upon them behind; and though Atkins and his men fired
+at them also, two or three times, and killed above twenty, retiring as
+fast as they could, yet they wounded Atkins himself, and killed one of
+his fellow-Englishmen with their arrows, as they did afterwards one
+Spaniard, and one of the Indian slaves who came with the women.  This
+slave was a most gallant fellow, and fought most desperately, killing
+five of them with his own hand, having no weapon but one of the armed
+staves and a hatchet.
+
+Our men being thus hard laid at, Atkins wounded, and two other men
+killed, retreated to a rising ground in the wood; and the Spaniards,
+after firing three volleys upon them, retreated also; for their number
+was so great, and they were so desperate, that though above fifty of them
+were killed, and more than as many wounded, yet they came on in the teeth
+of our men, fearless of danger, and shot their arrows like a cloud; and
+it was observed that their wounded men, who were not quite disabled, were
+made outrageous by their wounds, and fought like madmen.
+
+When our men retreated, they left the Spaniard and the Englishman that
+were killed behind them: and the savages, when they came up to them,
+killed them over again in a wretched manner, breaking their arms, legs,
+and heads, with their clubs and wooden swords, like true savages; but
+finding our men were gone, they did not seem inclined to pursue them, but
+drew themselves up in a ring, which is, it seems, their custom, and
+shouted twice, in token of their victory; after which, they had the
+mortification to see several of their wounded men fall, dying with the
+mere loss of blood.
+
+The Spaniard governor having drawn his little body up together upon a
+rising ground, Atkins, though he was wounded, would have had them march
+and charge again all together at once: but the Spaniard replied,
+"Seignior Atkins, you see how their wounded men fight; let them alone
+till morning; all the wounded men will be stiff and sore with their
+wounds, and faint with the loss of blood; and so we shall have the fewer
+to engage."  This advice was good: but Will Atkins replied merrily, "That
+is true, seignior, and so shall I too; and that is the reason I would go
+on while I am warm."  "Well, Seignior Atkins," says the Spaniard, "you
+have behaved gallantly, and done your part; we will fight for you if you
+cannot come on; but I think it best to stay till morning:" so they
+waited.
+
+But as it was a clear moonlight night, and they found the savages in
+great disorder about their dead and wounded men, and a great noise and
+hurry among them where they lay, they afterwards resolved to fall upon
+them in the night, especially if they could come to give them but one
+volley before they were discovered, which they had a fair opportunity to
+do; for one of the Englishmen in whose quarter it was where the fight
+began, led them round between the woods and the seaside westward, and
+then turning short south, they came so near where the thickest of them
+lay, that before they were seen or heard eight of them fired in among
+them, and did dreadful execution upon them; in half a minute more eight
+others fired after them, pouring in their small shot in such a quantity
+that abundance were killed and wounded; and all this while they were not
+able to see who hurt them, or which way to fly.
+
+The Spaniards charged again with the utmost expedition, and then divided
+themselves into three bodies, and resolved to fall in among them all
+together.  They had in each body eight persons, that is to say, twenty-
+two men and the two women, who, by the way, fought desperately.  They
+divided the firearms equally in each party, as well as the halberds and
+staves.  They would have had the women kept back, but they said they were
+resolved to die with their husbands.  Having thus formed their little
+army, they marched out from among the trees, and came up to the teeth of
+the enemy, shouting and hallooing as loud as they could; the savages
+stood all together, but were in the utmost confusion, hearing the noise
+of our men shouting from three quarters together.  They would have fought
+if they had seen us; for as soon as we came near enough to be seen, some
+arrows were shot, and poor old Friday was wounded, though not
+dangerously.  But our men gave them no time, but running up to them,
+fired among them three ways, and then fell in with the butt-ends of their
+muskets, their swords, armed staves, and hatchets, and laid about them so
+well that, in a word, they set up a dismal screaming and howling, flying
+to save their lives which way soever they could.
+
+Our men were tired with the execution, and killed or mortally wounded in
+the two fights about one hundred and eighty of them; the rest, being
+frightened out of their wits, scoured through the woods and over the
+hills, with all the speed that fear and nimble feet could help them to;
+and as we did not trouble ourselves much to pursue them, they got all
+together to the seaside, where they landed, and where their canoes lay.
+But their disaster was not at an end yet; for it blew a terrible storm of
+wind that evening from the sea, so that it was impossible for them to go
+off; nay, the storm continuing all night, when the tide came up their
+canoes were most of them driven by the surge of the sea so high upon the
+shore that it required infinite toil to get them off; and some of them
+were even dashed to pieces against the beach.  Our men, though glad of
+their victory, yet got little rest that night; but having refreshed
+themselves as well as they could, they resolved to march to that part of
+the island where the savages were fled, and see what posture they were
+in.  This necessarily led them over the place where the fight had been,
+and where they found several of the poor creatures not quite dead, and
+yet past recovering life; a sight disagreeable enough to generous minds,
+for a truly great man though obliged by the law of battle to destroy his
+enemy, takes no delight in his misery.  However, there was no need to
+give any orders in this case; for their own savages, who were their
+servants, despatched these poor creatures with their hatchets.
+
+At length they came in view of the place where the more miserable remains
+of the savages' army lay, where there appeared about a hundred still;
+their posture was generally sitting upon the ground, with their knees up
+towards their mouth, and the head put between the two hands, leaning down
+upon the knees.  When our men came within two musket-shots of them, the
+Spaniard governor ordered two muskets to be fired without ball, to alarm
+them; this he did, that by their countenance he might know what to
+expect, whether they were still in heart to fight, or were so heartily
+beaten as to be discouraged, and so he might manage accordingly.  This
+stratagem took: for as soon as the savages heard the first gun, and saw
+the flash of the second, they started up upon their feet in the greatest
+consternation imaginable; and as our men advanced swiftly towards them,
+they all ran screaming and yelling away, with a kind of howling noise,
+which our men did not understand, and had never heard before; and thus
+they ran up the hills into the country.
+
+At first our men had much rather the weather had been calm, and they had
+all gone away to sea: but they did not then consider that this might
+probably have been the occasion of their coming again in such multitudes
+as not to be resisted, or, at least, to come so many and so often as
+would quite desolate the island, and starve them.  Will Atkins,
+therefore, who notwithstanding his wound kept always with them, proved
+the best counsellor in this case: his advice was, to take the advantage
+that offered, and step in between them and their boats, and so deprive
+them of the capacity of ever returning any more to plague the island.
+They consulted long about this; and some were against it for fear of
+making the wretches fly to the woods and live there desperate, and so
+they should have them to hunt like wild beasts, be afraid to stir out
+about their business, and have their plantations continually rifled, all
+their tame goats destroyed, and, in short, be reduced to a life of
+continual distress.
+
+Will Atkins told them they had better have to do with a hundred men than
+with a hundred nations; that, as they must destroy their boats, so they
+must destroy the men, or be all of them destroyed themselves.  In a word,
+he showed them the necessity of it so plainly that they all came into it;
+so they went to work immediately with the boats, and getting some dry
+wood together from a dead tree, they tried to set some of them on fire,
+but they were so wet that they would not burn; however, the fire so
+burned the upper part that it soon made them unfit for use at sea.
+
+When the Indians saw what they were about, some of them came running out
+of the woods, and coming as near as they could to our men, kneeled down
+and cried, "Oa, Oa, Waramokoa," and some other words of their language,
+which none of the others understood anything of; but as they made pitiful
+gestures and strange noises, it was easy to understand they begged to
+have their boats spared, and that they would be gone, and never come
+there again.  But our men were now satisfied that they had no way to
+preserve themselves, or to save their colony, but effectually to prevent
+any of these people from ever going home again; depending upon this, that
+if even so much as one of them got back into their country to tell the
+story, the colony was undone; so that, letting them know that they should
+not have any mercy, they fell to work with their canoes, and destroyed
+every one that the storm had not destroyed before; at the sight of which,
+the savages raised a hideous cry in the woods, which our people heard
+plain enough, after which they ran about the island like distracted men,
+so that, in a word, our men did not really know what at first to do with
+them.  Nor did the Spaniards, with all their prudence, consider that
+while they made those people thus desperate, they ought to have kept a
+good guard at the same time upon their plantations; for though it is true
+they had driven away their cattle, and the Indians did not find out their
+main retreat, I mean my old castle at the hill, nor the cave in the
+valley, yet they found out my plantation at the bower, and pulled it all
+to pieces, and all the fences and planting about it; trod all the corn
+under foot, tore up the vines and grapes, being just then almost ripe,
+and did our men inestimable damage, though to themselves not one
+farthing's worth of service.
+
+Though our men were able to fight them upon all occasions, yet they were
+in no condition to pursue them, or hunt them up and down; for as they
+were too nimble of foot for our people when they found them single, so
+our men durst not go abroad single, for fear of being surrounded with
+their numbers.  The best was they had no weapons; for though they had
+bows, they had no arrows left, nor any materials to make any; nor had
+they any edge-tool among them.  The extremity and distress they were
+reduced to was great, and indeed deplorable; but, at the same time, our
+men were also brought to very bad circumstances by them, for though their
+retreats were preserved, yet their provision was destroyed, and their
+harvest spoiled, and what to do, or which way to turn themselves, they
+knew not.  The only refuge they had now was the stock of cattle they had
+in the valley by the cave, and some little corn which grew there, and the
+plantation of the three Englishmen.  Will Atkins and his comrades were
+now reduced to two; one of them being killed by an arrow, which struck
+him on the side of his head, just under the temple, so that he never
+spoke more; and it was very remarkable that this was the same barbarous
+fellow that cut the poor savage slave with his hatchet, and who
+afterwards intended to have murdered the Spaniards.
+
+I looked upon their case to have been worse at this time than mine was at
+any time, after I first discovered the grains of barley and rice, and got
+into the manner of planting and raising my corn, and my tame cattle; for
+now they had, as I may say, a hundred wolves upon the island, which would
+devour everything they could come at, yet could be hardly come at
+themselves.
+
+When they saw what their circumstances were, the first thing they
+concluded was, that they would, if possible, drive the savages up to the
+farther part of the island, south-west, that if any more came on shore
+they might not find one another; then, that they would daily hunt and
+harass them, and kill as many of them as they could come at, till they
+had reduced their number; and if they could at last tame them, and bring
+them to anything, they would give them corn, and teach them how to plant,
+and live upon their daily labour.  In order to do this, they so followed
+them, and so terrified them with their guns, that in a few days, if any
+of them fired a gun at an Indian, if he did not hit him, yet he would
+fall down for fear.  So dreadfully frightened were they that they kept
+out of sight farther and farther; till at last our men followed them, and
+almost every day killing or wounding some of them, they kept up in the
+woods or hollow places so much, that it reduced them to the utmost misery
+for want of food; and many were afterwards found dead in the woods,
+without any hurt, absolutely starved to death.
+
+When our men found this, it made their hearts relent, and pity moved
+them, especially the generous-minded Spaniard governor; and he proposed,
+if possible, to take one of them alive and bring him to understand what
+they meant, so far as to be able to act as interpreter, and go among them
+and see if they might be brought to some conditions that might be
+depended upon, to save their lives and do us no harm.
+
+It was some while before any of them could be taken; but being weak and
+half-starved, one of them was at last surprised and made a prisoner.  He
+was sullen at first, and would neither eat nor drink; but finding himself
+kindly used, and victuals given to him, and no violence offered him, he
+at last grew tractable, and came to himself.  They often brought old
+Friday to talk to him, who always told him how kind the others would be
+to them all; that they would not only save their lives, but give them
+part of the island to live in, provided they would give satisfaction that
+they would keep in their own bounds, and not come beyond it to injure or
+prejudice others; and that they should have corn given them to plant and
+make it grow for their bread, and some bread given them for their present
+subsistence; and old Friday bade the fellow go and talk with the rest of
+his countrymen, and see what they said to it; assuring them that, if they
+did not agree immediately, they should be all destroyed.
+
+The poor wretches, thoroughly humbled, and reduced in number to about
+thirty-seven, closed with the proposal at the first offer, and begged to
+have some food given them; upon which twelve Spaniards and two
+Englishmen, well armed, with three Indian slaves and old Friday, marched
+to the place where they were.  The three Indian slaves carried them a
+large quantity of bread, some rice boiled up to cakes and dried in the
+sun, and three live goats; and they were ordered to go to the side of a
+hill, where they sat down, ate their provisions very thankfully, and were
+the most faithful fellows to their words that could be thought of; for,
+except when they came to beg victuals and directions, they never came out
+of their bounds; and there they lived when I came to the island and I
+went to see them.  They had taught them both to plant corn, make bread,
+breed tame goats, and milk them: they wanted nothing but wives in order
+for them soon to become a nation.  They were confined to a neck of land,
+surrounded with high rocks behind them, and lying plain towards the sea
+before them, on the south-east corner of the island.  They had land
+enough, and it was very good and fruitful; about a mile and a half broad,
+and three or four miles in length.  Our men taught them to make wooden
+spades, such as I made for myself, and gave among them twelve hatchets
+and three or four knives; and there they lived, the most subjected,
+innocent creatures that ever were heard of.
+
+After this the colony enjoyed a perfect tranquillity with respect to the
+savages, till I came to revisit them, which was about two years after;
+not but that, now and then, some canoes of savages came on shore for
+their triumphal, unnatural feasts; but as they were of several nations,
+and perhaps had never heard of those that came before, or the reason of
+it, they did not make any search or inquiry after their countrymen; and
+if they had, it would have been very hard to have found them out.
+
+Thus, I think, I have given a full account of all that happened to them
+till my return, at least that was worth notice.  The Indians were
+wonderfully civilised by them, and they frequently went among them; but
+they forbid, on pain of death, any one of the Indians coming to them,
+because they would not have their settlement betrayed again.  One thing
+was very remarkable, viz. that they taught the savages to make wicker-
+work, or baskets, but they soon outdid their masters: for they made
+abundance of ingenious things in wicker-work, particularly baskets,
+sieves, bird-cages, cupboards, &c.; as also chairs, stools, beds,
+couches, being very ingenious at such work when they were once put in the
+way of it.
+
+My coming was a particular relief to these people, because we furnished
+them with knives, scissors, spades, shovels, pick-axes, and all things of
+that kind which they could want.  With the help of those tools they were
+so very handy that they came at last to build up their huts or houses
+very handsomely, raddling or working it up like basket-work all the way
+round.  This piece of ingenuity, although it looked very odd, was an
+exceeding good fence, as well against heat as against all sorts of
+vermin; and our men were so taken with it that they got the Indians to
+come and do the like for them; so that when I came to see the two
+Englishmen's colonies, they looked at a distance as if they all lived
+like bees in a hive.
+
+As for Will Atkins, who was now become a very industrious, useful, and
+sober fellow, he had made himself such a tent of basket-work as I believe
+was never seen; it was one hundred and twenty paces round on the outside,
+as I measured by my steps; the walls were as close worked as a basket, in
+panels or squares of thirty-two in number, and very strong, standing
+about seven feet high; in the middle was another not above twenty-two
+paces round, but built stronger, being octagon in its form, and in the
+eight corners stood eight very strong posts; round the top of which he
+laid strong pieces, knit together with wooden pins, from which he raised
+a pyramid for a handsome roof of eight rafters, joined together very
+well, though he had no nails, and only a few iron spikes, which he made
+himself, too, out of the old iron that I had left there.  Indeed, this
+fellow showed abundance of ingenuity in several things which he had no
+knowledge of: he made him a forge, with a pair of wooden bellows to blow
+the fire; he made himself charcoal for his work; and he formed out of the
+iron crows a middling good anvil to hammer upon: in this manner he made
+many things, but especially hooks, staples, and spikes, bolts and hinges.
+But to return to the house: after he had pitched the roof of his
+innermost tent, he worked it up between the rafters with basket-work, so
+firm, and thatched that over again so ingeniously with rice-straw, and
+over that a large leaf of a tree, which covered the top, that his house
+was as dry as if it had been tiled or slated.  He owned, indeed, that the
+savages had made the basket-work for him.  The outer circuit was covered
+as a lean-to all round this inner apartment, and long rafters lay from
+the thirty-two angles to the top posts of the inner house, being about
+twenty feet distant, so that there was a space like a walk within the
+outer wicker-wall, and without the inner, near twenty feet wide.
+
+The inner place he partitioned off with the same wickerwork, but much
+fairer, and divided into six apartments, so that he had six rooms on a
+floor, and out of every one of these there was a door: first into the
+entry, or coming into the main tent, another door into the main tent, and
+another door into the space or walk that was round it; so that walk was
+also divided into six equal parts, which served not only for a retreat,
+but to store up any necessaries which the family had occasion for.  These
+six spaces not taking up the whole circumference, what other apartments
+the outer circle had were thus ordered: As soon as you were in at the
+door of the outer circle you had a short passage straight before you to
+the door of the inner house; but on either side was a wicker partition
+and a door in it, by which you went first into a large room or
+storehouse, twenty feet wide and about thirty feet long, and through that
+into another not quite so long; so that in the outer circle were ten
+handsome rooms, six of which were only to be come at through the
+apartments of the inner tent, and served as closets or retiring rooms to
+the respective chambers of the inner circle; and four large warehouses,
+or barns, or what you please to call them, which went through one
+another, two on either hand of the passage, that led through the outer
+door to the inner tent.  Such a piece of basket-work, I believe, was
+never seen in the world, nor a house or tent so neatly contrived, much
+less so built.  In this great bee-hive lived the three families, that is
+to say, Will Atkins and his companion; the third was killed, but his wife
+remained with three children, and the other two were not at all backward
+to give the widow her full share of everything, I mean as to their corn,
+milk, grapes, &c., and when they killed a kid, or found a turtle on the
+shore; so that they all lived well enough; though it was true they were
+not so industrious as the other two, as has been observed already.
+
+One thing, however, cannot be omitted, viz. that as for religion, I do
+not know that there was anything of that kind among them; they often,
+indeed, put one another in mind that there was a God, by the very common
+method of seamen, swearing by His name: nor were their poor ignorant
+savage wives much better for having been married to Christians, as we
+must call them; for as they knew very little of God themselves, so they
+were utterly incapable of entering into any discourse with their wives
+about a God, or to talk anything to them concerning religion.
+
+The utmost of all the improvement which I can say the wives had made from
+them was, that they had taught them to speak English pretty well; and
+most of their children, who were near twenty in all, were taught to speak
+English too, from their first learning to speak, though they at first
+spoke it in a very broken manner, like their mothers.  None of these
+children were above six years old when I came thither, for it was not
+much above seven years since they had fetched these five savage ladies
+over; they had all children, more or less: the mothers were all a good
+sort of well-governed, quiet, laborious women, modest and decent, helpful
+to one another, mighty observant, and subject to their masters (I cannot
+call them husbands), and lacked nothing but to be well instructed in the
+Christian religion, and to be legally married; both of which were happily
+brought about afterwards by my means, or at least in consequence of my
+coming among them.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI--THE FRENCH CLERGYMAN'S COUNSEL
+
+
+Having thus given an account of the colony in general, and pretty much of
+my runagate Englishmen, I must say something of the Spaniards, who were
+the main body of the family, and in whose story there are some incidents
+also remarkable enough.
+
+I had a great many discourses with them about their circumstances when
+they were among the savages.  They told me readily that they had no
+instances to give of their application or ingenuity in that country; that
+they were a poor, miserable, dejected handful of people; that even if
+means had been put into their hands, yet they had so abandoned themselves
+to despair, and were so sunk under the weight of their misfortune, that
+they thought of nothing but starving.  One of them, a grave and sensible
+man, told me he was convinced they were in the wrong; that it was not the
+part of wise men to give themselves up to their misery, but always to
+take hold of the helps which reason offered, as well for present support
+as for future deliverance: he told me that grief was the most senseless,
+insignificant passion in the world, for that it regarded only things
+past, which were generally impossible to be recalled or to be remedied,
+but had no views of things to come, and had no share in anything that
+looked like deliverance, but rather added to the affliction than proposed
+a remedy; and upon this he repeated a Spanish proverb, which, though I
+cannot repeat in the same words that he spoke it in, yet I remember I
+made it into an English proverb of my own, thus:--
+
+   "In trouble to be troubled,
+   Is to have your trouble doubled."
+
+He then ran on in remarks upon all the little improvements I had made in
+my solitude: my unwearied application, as he called it; and how I had
+made a condition, which in its circumstances was at first much worse than
+theirs, a thousand times more happy than theirs was, even now when they
+were all together.  He told me it was remarkable that Englishmen had a
+greater presence of mind in their distress than any people that ever he
+met with; that their unhappy nation and the Portuguese were the worst men
+in the world to struggle with misfortunes; for that their first step in
+dangers, after the common efforts were over, was to despair, lie down
+under it, and die, without rousing their thoughts up to proper remedies
+for escape.
+
+I told him their case and mine differed exceedingly; that they were cast
+upon the shore without necessaries, without supply of food, or present
+sustenance till they could provide for it; that, it was true, I had this
+further disadvantage and discomfort, that I was alone; but then the
+supplies I had providentially thrown into my hands, by the unexpected
+driving of the ship on the shore, was such a help as would have
+encouraged any creature in the world to have applied himself as I had
+done.  "Seignior," says the Spaniard, "had we poor Spaniards been in your
+case, we should never have got half those things out of the ship, as you
+did: nay," says he, "we should never have found means to have got a raft
+to carry them, or to have got the raft on shore without boat or sail: and
+how much less should we have done if any of us had been alone!"  Well, I
+desired him to abate his compliments, and go on with the history of their
+coming on shore, where they landed.  He told me they unhappily landed at
+a place where there were people without provisions; whereas, had they had
+the common sense to put off to sea again, and gone to another island a
+little further, they had found provisions, though without people: there
+being an island that way, as they had been told, where there were
+provisions, though no people--that is to say, that the Spaniards of
+Trinidad had frequently been there, and had filled the island with goats
+and hogs at several times, where they had bred in such multitudes, and
+where turtle and sea-fowls were in such plenty, that they could have been
+in no want of flesh, though they had found no bread; whereas, here they
+were only sustained with a few roots and herbs, which they understood
+not, and which had no substance in them, and which the inhabitants gave
+them sparingly enough; and they could treat them no better, unless they
+would turn cannibals and eat men's flesh.
+
+They gave me an account how many ways they strove to civilise the savages
+they were with, and to teach them rational customs in the ordinary way of
+living, but in vain; and how they retorted upon them as unjust that they
+who came there for assistance and support should attempt to set up for
+instructors to those that gave them food; intimating, it seems, that none
+should set up for the instructors of others but those who could live
+without them.  They gave me dismal accounts of the extremities they were
+driven to; how sometimes they were many days without any food at all, the
+island they were upon being inhabited by a sort of savages that lived
+more indolent, and for that reason were less supplied with the
+necessaries of life, than they had reason to believe others were in the
+same part of the world; and yet they found that these savages were less
+ravenous and voracious than those who had better supplies of food.  Also,
+they added, they could not but see with what demonstrations of wisdom and
+goodness the governing providence of God directs the events of things in
+this world, which, they said, appeared in their circumstances: for if,
+pressed by the hardships they were under, and the barrenness of the
+country where they were, they had searched after a better to live in,
+they had then been out of the way of the relief that happened to them by
+my means.
+
+They then gave me an account how the savages whom they lived amongst
+expected them to go out with them into their wars; and, it was true, that
+as they had firearms with them, had they not had the disaster to lose
+their ammunition, they could have been serviceable not only to their
+friends, but have made themselves terrible both to friends and enemies;
+but being without powder and shot, and yet in a condition that they could
+not in reason decline to go out with their landlords to their wars; so
+when they came into the field of battle they were in a worse condition
+than the savages themselves, for they had neither bows nor arrows, nor
+could they use those the savages gave them.  So they could do nothing but
+stand still and be wounded with arrows, till they came up to the teeth of
+the enemy; and then, indeed, the three halberds they had were of use to
+them; and they would often drive a whole little army before them with
+those halberds, and sharpened sticks put into the muzzles of their
+muskets.  But for all this they were sometimes surrounded with
+multitudes, and in great danger from their arrows, till at last they
+found the way to make themselves large targets of wood, which they
+covered with skins of wild beasts, whose names they knew not, and these
+covered them from the arrows of the savages: that, notwithstanding these,
+they were sometimes in great danger; and five of them were once knocked
+down together with the clubs of the savages, which was the time when one
+of them was taken prisoner--that is to say, the Spaniard whom I relieved.
+At first they thought he had been killed; but when they afterwards heard
+he was taken prisoner, they were under the greatest grief imaginable, and
+would willingly have all ventured their lives to have rescued him.
+
+They told me that when they were so knocked down, the rest of their
+company rescued them, and stood over them fighting till they were come to
+themselves, all but him whom they thought had been dead; and then they
+made their way with their halberds and pieces, standing close together in
+a line, through a body of above a thousand savages, beating down all that
+came in their way, got the victory over their enemies, but to their great
+sorrow, because it was with the loss of their friend, whom the other
+party finding alive, carried off with some others, as I gave an account
+before.  They described, most affectionately, how they were surprised
+with joy at the return of their friend and companion in misery, who they
+thought had been devoured by wild beasts of the worst kind--wild men; and
+yet, how more and more they were surprised with the account he gave them
+of his errand, and that there was a Christian in any place near, much
+more one that was able, and had humanity enough, to contribute to their
+deliverance.
+
+They described how they were astonished at the sight of the relief I sent
+them, and at the appearance of loaves of bread--things they had not seen
+since their coming to that miserable place; how often they crossed it and
+blessed it as bread sent from heaven; and what a reviving cordial it was
+to their spirits to taste it, as also the other things I had sent for
+their supply; and, after all, they would have told me something of the
+joy they were in at the sight of a boat and pilots, to carry them away to
+the person and place from whence all these new comforts came.  But it was
+impossible to express it by words, for their excessive joy naturally
+driving them to unbecoming extravagances, they had no way to describe
+them but by telling me they bordered upon lunacy, having no way to give
+vent to their passions suitable to the sense that was upon them; that in
+some it worked one way and in some another; and that some of them,
+through a surprise of joy, would burst into tears, others be stark mad,
+and others immediately faint.  This discourse extremely affected me, and
+called to my mind Friday's ecstasy when he met his father, and the poor
+people's ecstasy when I took them up at sea after their ship was on fire;
+the joy of the mate of the ship when he found himself delivered in the
+place where he expected to perish; and my own joy, when, after twenty-
+eight years' captivity, I found a good ship ready to carry me to my own
+country.  All these things made me more sensible of the relation of these
+poor men, and more affected with it.
+
+Having thus given a view of the state of things as I found them, I must
+relate the heads of what I did for these people, and the condition in
+which I left them.  It was their opinion, and mine too, that they would
+be troubled no more with the savages, or if they were, they would be able
+to cut them off, if they were twice as many as before; so they had no
+concern about that.  Then I entered into a serious discourse with the
+Spaniard, whom I call governor, about their stay in the island; for as I
+was not come to carry any of them off, so it would not be just to carry
+off some and leave others, who, perhaps, would be unwilling to stay if
+their strength was diminished.  On the other hand, I told them I came to
+establish them there, not to remove them; and then I let them know that I
+had brought with me relief of sundry kinds for them; that I had been at a
+great charge to supply them with all things necessary, as well for their
+convenience as their defence; and that I had such and such particular
+persons with me, as well to increase and recruit their number, as by the
+particular necessary employments which they were bred to, being
+artificers, to assist them in those things in which at present they were
+in want.
+
+They were all together when I talked thus to them; and before I delivered
+to them the stores I had brought, I asked them, one by one, if they had
+entirely forgot and buried the first animosities that had been among
+them, and would shake hands with one another, and engage in a strict
+friendship and union of interest, that so there might be no more
+misunderstandings and jealousies.
+
+Will Atkins, with abundance of frankness and good humour, said they had
+met with affliction enough to make them all sober, and enemies enough to
+make them all friends; that, for his part, he would live and die with
+them, and was so far from designing anything against the Spaniards, that
+he owned they had done nothing to him but what his own mad humour made
+necessary, and what he would have done, and perhaps worse, in their case;
+and that he would ask them pardon, if I desired it, for the foolish and
+brutish things he had done to them, and was very willing and desirous of
+living in terms of entire friendship and union with them, and would do
+anything that lay in his power to convince them of it; and as for going
+to England, he cared not if he did not go thither these twenty years.
+
+The Spaniards said they had, indeed, at first disarmed and excluded Will
+Atkins and his two countrymen for their ill conduct, as they had let me
+know, and they appealed to me for the necessity they were under to do so;
+but that Will Atkins had behaved himself so bravely in the great fight
+they had with the savages, and on several occasions since, and had showed
+himself so faithful to, and concerned for, the general interest of them
+all, that they had forgotten all that was past, and thought he merited as
+much to be trusted with arms and supplied with necessaries as any of
+them; that they had testified their satisfaction in him by committing the
+command to him next to the governor himself; and as they had entire
+confidence in him and all his countrymen, so they acknowledged they had
+merited that confidence by all the methods that honest men could merit to
+be valued and trusted; and they most heartily embraced the occasion of
+giving me this assurance, that they would never have any interest
+separate from one another.
+
+Upon these frank and open declarations of friendship, we appointed the
+next day to dine all together; and, indeed, we made a splendid feast.  I
+caused the ship's cook and his mate to come on shore and dress our
+dinner, and the old cook's mate we had on shore assisted.  We brought on
+shore six pieces of good beef and four pieces of pork, out of the ship's
+provisions, with our punch-bowl and materials to fill it; and in
+particular I gave them ten bottles of French claret, and ten bottles of
+English beer; things that neither the Spaniards nor the English had
+tasted for many years, and which it may be supposed they were very glad
+of.  The Spaniards added to our feast five whole kids, which the cooks
+roasted; and three of them were sent, covered up close, on board the ship
+to the seamen, that they might feast on fresh meat from on shore, as we
+did with their salt meat from on board.
+
+After this feast, at which we were very innocently merry, I brought my
+cargo of goods; wherein, that there might be no dispute about dividing, I
+showed them that there was a sufficiency for them all, desiring that they
+might all take an equal quantity, when made up, of the goods that were
+for wearing.  As, first, I distributed linen sufficient to make every one
+of them four shirts, and, at the Spaniard's request, afterwards made them
+up six; these were exceeding comfortable to them, having been what they
+had long since forgot the use of, or what it was to wear them.  I
+allotted the thin English stuffs, which I mentioned before, to make every
+one a light coat, like a frock, which I judged fittest for the heat of
+the season, cool and loose; and ordered that whenever they decayed, they
+should make more, as they thought fit; the like for pumps, shoes,
+stockings, hats, &c.  I cannot express what pleasure sat upon the
+countenances of all these poor men when they saw the care I had taken of
+them, and how well I had furnished them.  They told me I was a father to
+them; and that having such a correspondent as I was in so remote a part
+of the world, it would make them forget that they were left in a desolate
+place; and they all voluntarily engaged to me not to leave the place
+without my consent.
+
+Then I presented to them the people I had brought with me, particularly
+the tailor, the smith, and the two carpenters, all of them most necessary
+people; but, above all, my general artificer, than whom they could not
+name anything that was more useful to them; and the tailor, to show his
+concern for them, went to work immediately, and, with my leave, made them
+every one a shirt, the first thing he did; and, what was still more, he
+taught the women not only how to sew and stitch, and use the needle, but
+made them assist to make the shirts for their husbands, and for all the
+rest.  As to the carpenters, I scarce need mention how useful they were;
+for they took to pieces all my clumsy, unhandy things, and made clever
+convenient tables, stools, bedsteads, cupboards, lockers, shelves, and
+everything they wanted of that kind.  But to let them see how nature made
+artificers at first, I carried the carpenters to see Will Atkins' basket-
+house, as I called it; and they both owned they never saw an instance of
+such natural ingenuity before, nor anything so regular and so handily
+built, at least of its kind; and one of them, when he saw it, after
+musing a good while, turning about to me, "I am sure," says he, "that man
+has no need of us; you need do nothing but give him tools."
+
+Then I brought them out all my store of tools, and gave every man a
+digging-spade, a shovel, and a rake, for we had no barrows or ploughs;
+and to every separate place a pickaxe, a crow, a broad axe, and a saw;
+always appointing, that as often as any were broken or worn out, they
+should be supplied without grudging out of the general stores that I left
+behind.  Nails, staples, hinges, hammers, chisels, knives, scissors, and
+all sorts of ironwork, they had without reserve, as they required; for no
+man would take more than he wanted, and he must be a fool that would
+waste or spoil them on any account whatever; and for the use of the smith
+I left two tons of unwrought iron for a supply.
+
+My magazine of powder and arms which I brought them was such, even to
+profusion, that they could not but rejoice at them; for now they could
+march as I used to do, with a musket upon each shoulder, if there was
+occasion; and were able to fight a thousand savages, if they had but some
+little advantages of situation, which also they could not miss, if they
+had occasion.
+
+I carried on shore with me the young man whose mother was starved to
+death, and the maid also; she was a sober, well-educated, religious young
+woman, and behaved so inoffensively that every one gave her a good word;
+she had, indeed, an unhappy life with us, there being no woman in the
+ship but herself, but she bore it with patience.  After a while, seeing
+things so well ordered, and in so fine a way of thriving upon my island,
+and considering that they had neither business nor acquaintance in the
+East Indies, or reason for taking so long a voyage, both of them came to
+me and desired I would give them leave to remain on the island, and be
+entered among my family, as they called it.  I agreed to this readily;
+and they had a little plot of ground allotted to them, where they had
+three tents or houses set up, surrounded with a basket-work, palisadoed
+like Atkins's, adjoining to his plantation.  Their tents were contrived
+so that they had each of them a room apart to lodge in, and a middle tent
+like a great storehouse to lay their goods in, and to eat and to drink
+in.  And now the other two Englishmen removed their habitation to the
+same place; and so the island was divided into three colonies, and no
+more--viz. the Spaniards, with old Friday and the first servants, at my
+habitation under the hill, which was, in a word, the capital city, and
+where they had so enlarged and extended their works, as well under as on
+the outside of the hill, that they lived, though perfectly concealed, yet
+full at large.  Never was there such a little city in a wood, and so hid,
+in any part of the world; for I verify believe that a thousand men might
+have ranged the island a month, and, if they had not known there was such
+a thing, and looked on purpose for it, they would not have found it.
+Indeed the trees stood so thick and so close, and grew so fast woven one
+into another, that nothing but cutting them down first could discover the
+place, except the only two narrow entrances where they went in and out
+could be found, which was not very easy; one of them was close down at
+the water's edge, on the side of the creek, and it was afterwards above
+two hundred yards to the place; and the other was up a ladder at twice,
+as I have already described it; and they had also a large wood, thickly
+planted, on the top of the hill, containing above an acre, which grew
+apace, and concealed the place from all discovery there, with only one
+narrow place between two trees, not easily to be discovered, to enter on
+that side.
+
+The other colony was that of Will Atkins, where there were four families
+of Englishmen, I mean those I had left there, with their wives and
+children; three savages that were slaves, the widow and children of the
+Englishman that was killed, the young man and the maid, and, by the way,
+we made a wife of her before we went away.  There were besides the two
+carpenters and the tailor, whom I brought with me for them: also the
+smith, who was a very necessary man to them, especially as a gunsmith, to
+take care of their arms; and my other man, whom I called
+Jack-of-all-trades, who was in himself as good almost as twenty men; for
+he was not only a very ingenious fellow, but a very merry fellow, and
+before I went away we married him to the honest maid that came with the
+youth in the ship I mentioned before.
+
+And now I speak of marrying, it brings me naturally to say something of
+the French ecclesiastic that I had brought with me out of the ship's crew
+whom I took up at sea.  It is true this man was a Roman, and perhaps it
+may give offence to some hereafter if I leave anything extraordinary upon
+record of a man whom, before I begin, I must (to set him out in just
+colours) represent in terms very much to his disadvantage, in the account
+of Protestants; as, first, that he was a Papist; secondly, a Popish
+priest; and thirdly, a French Popish priest.  But justice demands of me
+to give him a due character; and I must say, he was a grave, sober,
+pious, and most religious person; exact in his life, extensive in his
+charity, and exemplary in almost everything he did.  What then can any
+one say against being very sensible of the value of such a man,
+notwithstanding his profession? though it may be my opinion perhaps, as
+well as the opinion of others who shall read this, that he was mistaken.
+
+The first hour that I began to converse with him after he had agreed to
+go with me to the East Indies, I found reason to delight exceedingly in
+his conversation; and he first began with me about religion in the most
+obliging manner imaginable.  "Sir," says he, "you have not only under
+God" (and at that he crossed his breast) "saved my life, but you have
+admitted me to go this voyage in your ship, and by your obliging civility
+have taken me into your family, giving me an opportunity of free
+conversation.  Now, sir, you see by my habit what my profession is, and I
+guess by your nation what yours is; I may think it is my duty, and
+doubtless it is so, to use my utmost endeavours, on all occasions, to
+bring all the souls I can to the knowledge of the truth, and to embrace
+the Catholic doctrine; but as I am here under your permission, and in
+your family, I am bound, in justice to your kindness as well as in
+decency and good manners, to be under your government; and therefore I
+shall not, without your leave, enter into any debate on the points of
+religion in which we may not agree, further than you shall give me
+leave."
+
+I told him his carriage was so modest that I could not but acknowledge
+it; that it was true we were such people as they call heretics, but that
+he was not the first Catholic I had conversed with without falling into
+inconveniences, or carrying the questions to any height in debate; that
+he should not find himself the worse used for being of a different
+opinion from us, and if we did not converse without any dislike on either
+side, it should be his fault, not ours.
+
+He replied that he thought all our conversation might be easily separated
+from disputes; that it was not his business to cap principles with every
+man he conversed with; and that he rather desired me to converse with him
+as a gentleman than as a religionist; and that, if I would give him leave
+at any time to discourse upon religious subjects, he would readily comply
+with it, and that he did not doubt but I would allow him also to defend
+his own opinions as well as he could; but that without my leave he would
+not break in upon me with any such thing.  He told me further, that he
+would not cease to do all that became him, in his office as a priest, as
+well as a private Christian, to procure the good of the ship, and the
+safety of all that was in her; and though, perhaps, we would not join
+with him, and he could not pray with us, he hoped he might pray for us,
+which he would do upon all occasions.  In this manner we conversed; and
+as he was of the most obliging, gentlemanlike behaviour, so he was, if I
+may be allowed to say so, a man of good sense, and, as I believe, of
+great learning.
+
+He gave me a most diverting account of his life, and of the many
+extraordinary events of it; of many adventures which had befallen him in
+the few years that he had been abroad in the world; and particularly, it
+was very remarkable, that in the voyage he was now engaged in he had had
+the misfortune to be five times shipped and unshipped, and never to go to
+the place whither any of the ships he was in were at first designed.  That
+his first intent was to have gone to Martinico, and that he went on board
+a ship bound thither at St. Malo; but being forced into Lisbon by bad
+weather, the ship received some damage by running aground in the mouth of
+the river Tagus, and was obliged to unload her cargo there; but finding a
+Portuguese ship there bound for the Madeiras, and ready to sail, and
+supposing he should meet with a ship there bound to Martinico, he went on
+board, in order to sail to the Madeiras; but the master of the Portuguese
+ship being but an indifferent mariner, had been out of his reckoning, and
+they drove to Fayal; where, however, he happened to find a very good
+market for his cargo, which was corn, and therefore resolved not to go to
+the Madeiras, but to load salt at the Isle of May, and to go away to
+Newfoundland.  He had no remedy in this exigence but to go with the ship,
+and had a pretty good voyage as far as the Banks (so they call the place
+where they catch the fish), where, meeting with a French ship bound from
+France to Quebec, and from thence to Martinico, to carry provisions, he
+thought he should have an opportunity to complete his first design, but
+when he came to Quebec, the master of the ship died, and the vessel
+proceeded no further; so the next voyage he shipped himself for France,
+in the ship that was burned when we took them up at sea, and then shipped
+with us for the East Indies, as I have already said.  Thus he had been
+disappointed in five voyages; all, as I may call it, in one voyage,
+besides what I shall have occasion to mention further of him.
+
+But I shall not make digression into other men's stories which have no
+relation to my own; so I return to what concerns our affair in the
+island.  He came to me one morning (for he lodged among us all the while
+we were upon the island), and it happened to be just when I was going to
+visit the Englishmen's colony, at the furthest part of the island; I say,
+he came to me, and told me, with a very grave countenance, that he had
+for two or three days desired an opportunity of some discourse with me,
+which he hoped would not be displeasing to me, because he thought it
+might in some measure correspond with my general design, which was the
+prosperity of my new colony, and perhaps might put it, at least more than
+he yet thought it was, in the way of God's blessing.
+
+I looked a little surprised at the last of his discourse, and turning a
+little short, "How, sir," said I, "can it be said that we are not in the
+way of God's blessing, after such visible assistances and deliverances as
+we have seen here, and of which I have given you a large account?"  "If
+you had pleased, sir," said he, with a world of modesty, and yet great
+readiness, "to have heard me, you would have found no room to have been
+displeased, much less to think so hard of me, that I should suggest that
+you have not had wonderful assistances and deliverances; and I hope, on
+your behalf, that you are in the way of God's blessing, and your design
+is exceeding good, and will prosper.  But, sir, though it were more so
+than is even possible to you, yet there may be some among you that are
+not equally right in their actions: and you know that in the story of the
+children of Israel, one Achan in the camp removed God's blessing from
+them, and turned His hand so against them, that six-and-thirty of them,
+though not concerned in the crime, were the objects of divine vengeance,
+and bore the weight of that punishment."
+
+I was sensibly touched with this discourse, and told him his inference
+was so just, and the whole design seemed so sincere, and was really so
+religious in its own nature, that I was very sorry I had interrupted him,
+and begged him to go on; and, in the meantime, because it seemed that
+what we had both to say might take up some time, I told him I was going
+to the Englishmen's plantations, and asked him to go with me, and we
+might discourse of it by the way.  He told me he would the more willingly
+wait on me thither, because there partly the thing was acted which he
+desired to speak to me about; so we walked on, and I pressed him to be
+free and plain with me in what he had to say.
+
+"Why, then, sir," said he, "be pleased to give me leave to lay down a few
+propositions, as the foundation of what I have to say, that we may not
+differ in the general principles, though we may be of some differing
+opinions in the practice of particulars.  First, sir, though we differ in
+some of the doctrinal articles of religion (and it is very unhappy it is
+so, especially in the case before us, as I shall show afterwards), yet
+there are some general principles in which we both agree--that there is a
+God; and that this God having given us some stated general rules for our
+service and obedience, we ought not willingly and knowingly to offend
+Him, either by neglecting to do what He has commanded, or by doing what
+He has expressly forbidden.  And let our different religions be what they
+will, this general principle is readily owned by us all, that the
+blessing of God does not ordinarily follow presumptuous sinning against
+His command; and every good Christian will be affectionately concerned to
+prevent any that are under his care living in a total neglect of God and
+His commands.  It is not your men being Protestants, whatever my opinion
+may be of such, that discharges me from being concerned for their souls,
+and from endeavouring, if it lies before me, that they should live in as
+little distance from enmity with their Maker as possible, especially if
+you give me leave to meddle so far in your circuit."
+
+I could not yet imagine what he aimed at, and told him I granted all he
+had said, and thanked him that he would so far concern himself for us:
+and begged he would explain the particulars of what he had observed, that
+like Joshua, to take his own parable, I might put away the accursed thing
+from us.
+
+"Why, then, sir," says he, "I will take the liberty you give me; and
+there are three things, which, if I am right, must stand in the way of
+God's blessing upon your endeavours here, and which I should rejoice, for
+your sake and their own, to see removed.  And, sir, I promise myself that
+you will fully agree with me in them all, as soon as I name them;
+especially because I shall convince you, that every one of them may, with
+great ease, and very much to your satisfaction, be remedied.  First,
+sir," says he, "you have here four Englishmen, who have fetched women
+from among the savages, and have taken them as their wives, and have had
+many children by them all, and yet are not married to them after any
+stated legal manner, as the laws of God and man require.  To this, sir, I
+know, you will object that there was no clergyman or priest of any kind
+to perform the ceremony; nor any pen and ink, or paper, to write down a
+contract of marriage, and have it signed between them.  And I know also,
+sir, what the Spaniard governor has told you, I mean of the agreement
+that he obliged them to make when they took those women, viz. that they
+should choose them out by consent, and keep separately to them; which, by
+the way, is nothing of a marriage, no agreement with the women as wives,
+but only an agreement among themselves, to keep them from quarrelling.
+But, sir, the essence of the sacrament of matrimony" (so he called it,
+being a Roman) "consists not only in the mutual consent of the parties to
+take one another as man and wife, but in the formal and legal obligation
+that there is in the contract to compel the man and woman, at all times,
+to own and acknowledge each other; obliging the man to abstain from all
+other women, to engage in no other contract while these subsist; and, on
+all occasions, as ability allows, to provide honestly for them and their
+children; and to oblige the women to the same or like conditions, on
+their side.  Now, sir," says he, "these men may, when they please, or
+when occasion presents, abandon these women, disown their children, leave
+them to perish, and take other women, and marry them while these are
+living;" and here he added, with some warmth, "How, sir, is God honoured
+in this unlawful liberty?  And how shall a blessing succeed your
+endeavours in this place, however good in themselves, and however sincere
+in your design, while these men, who at present are your subjects, under
+your absolute government and dominion, are allowed by you to live in open
+adultery?"
+
+I confess I was struck with the thing itself, but much more with the
+convincing arguments he supported it with; but I thought to have got off
+my young priest by telling him that all that part was done when I was not
+there: and that they had lived so many years with them now, that if it
+was adultery, it was past remedy; nothing could be done in it now.
+
+"Sir," says he, "asking your pardon for such freedom, you are right in
+this, that, it being done in your absence, you could not be charged with
+that part of the crime; but, I beseech you, flatter not yourself that you
+are not, therefore, under an obligation to do your utmost now to put an
+end to it.  You should legally and effectually marry them; and as, sir,
+my way of marrying may not be easy to reconcile them to, though it will
+be effectual, even by your own laws, so your way may be as well before
+God, and as valid among men.  I mean by a written contract signed by both
+man and woman, and by all the witnesses present, which all the laws of
+Europe would decree to be valid."
+
+I was amazed to see so much true piety, and so much sincerity of zeal,
+besides the unusual impartiality in his discourse as to his own party or
+church, and such true warmth for preserving people that he had no
+knowledge of or relation to from transgressing the laws of God.  But
+recollecting what he had said of marrying them by a written contract,
+which I knew he would stand to, I returned it back upon him, and told him
+I granted all that he had said to be just, and on his part very kind;
+that I would discourse with the men upon the point now, when I came to
+them; and I knew no reason why they should scruple to let him marry them
+all, which I knew well enough would be granted to be as authentic and
+valid in England as if they were married by one of our own clergymen.
+
+I then pressed him to tell me what was the second complaint which he had
+to make, acknowledging that I was very much his debtor for the first, and
+thanking him heartily for it.  He told me he would use the same freedom
+and plainness in the second, and hoped I would take it as well; and this
+was, that notwithstanding these English subjects of mine, as he called
+them, had lived with these women almost seven years, had taught them to
+speak English, and even to read it, and that they were, as he perceived,
+women of tolerable understanding, and capable of instruction, yet they
+had not, to this hour, taught them anything of the Christian religion--no,
+not so much as to know there was a God, or a worship, or in what manner
+God was to be served, or that their own idolatry, and worshipping they
+knew not whom, was false and absurd.  This he said was an unaccountable
+neglect, and what God would certainly call them to account for, and
+perhaps at last take the work out of their hands.  He spoke this very
+affectionately and warmly.
+
+"I am persuaded," says he, "had those men lived in the savage country
+whence their wives came, the savages would have taken more pains to have
+brought them to be idolaters, and to worship the devil, than any of these
+men, so far as I can see, have taken with them to teach the knowledge of
+the true God.  Now, sir," said he, "though I do not acknowledge your
+religion, or you mine, yet we would be glad to see the devil's servants
+and the subjects of his kingdom taught to know religion; and that they
+might, at least, hear of God and a Redeemer, and the resurrection, and of
+a future state--things which we all believe; that they might, at least,
+be so much nearer coming into the bosom of the true Church than they are
+now in the public profession of idolatry and devil-worship."
+
+I could hold no longer: I took him in my arms and embraced him eagerly.
+"How far," said I to him, "have I been from understanding the most
+essential part of a Christian, viz. to love the interest of the Christian
+Church, and the good of other men's souls!  I scarce have known what
+belongs to the being a Christian."--"Oh, sir! do not say so," replied he;
+"this thing is not your fault."--"No," said I; "but why did I never lay
+it to heart as well as you?"--"It is not too late yet," said he; "be not
+too forward to condemn yourself."--"But what can be done now?" said I:
+"you see I am going away."--"Will you give me leave to talk with these
+poor men about it?"--"Yes, with all my heart," said I: "and oblige them
+to give heed to what you say too."--"As to that," said he, "we must leave
+them to the mercy of Christ; but it is your business to assist them,
+encourage them, and instruct them; and if you give me leave, and God His
+blessing, I do not doubt but the poor ignorant souls shall be brought
+home to the great circle of Christianity, if not into the particular
+faith we all embrace, and that even while you stay here."  Upon this I
+said, "I shall not only give you leave, but give you a thousand thanks
+for it."
+
+I now pressed him for the third article in which we were to blame.  "Why,
+really," says he, "it is of the same nature.  It is about your poor
+savages, who are, as I may say, your conquered subjects.  It is a maxim,
+sir, that is or ought to be received among all Christians, of what church
+or pretended church soever, that the Christian knowledge ought to be
+propagated by all possible means and on all possible occasions.  It is on
+this principle that our Church sends missionaries into Persia, India, and
+China; and that our clergy, even of the superior sort, willingly engage
+in the most hazardous voyages, and the most dangerous residence amongst
+murderers and barbarians, to teach them the knowledge of the true God,
+and to bring them over to embrace the Christian faith.  Now, sir, you
+have such an opportunity here to have six or seven and thirty poor
+savages brought over from a state of idolatry to the knowledge of God,
+their Maker and Redeemer, that I wonder how you can pass such an occasion
+of doing good, which is really worth the expense of a man's whole life."
+
+I was now struck dumb indeed, and had not one word to say.  I had here
+the spirit of true Christian zeal for God and religion before me.  As for
+me, I had not so much as entertained a thought of this in my heart
+before, and I believe I should not have thought of it; for I looked upon
+these savages as slaves, and people whom, had we not had any work for
+them to do, we would have used as such, or would have been glad to have
+transported them to any part of the world; for our business was to get
+rid of them, and we would all have been satisfied if they had been sent
+to any country, so they had never seen their own.  I was confounded at
+his discourse, and knew not what answer to make him.
+
+He looked earnestly at me, seeing my confusion.  "Sir," says he, "I shall
+be very sorry if what I have said gives you any offence."--"No, no," said
+I, "I am offended with nobody but myself; but I am perfectly confounded,
+not only to think that I should never take any notice of this before, but
+with reflecting what notice I am able to take of it now.  You know, sir,"
+said I, "what circumstances I am in; I am bound to the East Indies in a
+ship freighted by merchants, and to whom it would be an insufferable
+piece of injustice to detain their ship here, the men lying all this
+while at victuals and wages on the owners' account.  It is true, I agreed
+to be allowed twelve days here, and if I stay more, I must pay three
+pounds sterling _per diem_ demurrage; nor can I stay upon demurrage above
+eight days more, and I have been here thirteen already; so that I am
+perfectly unable to engage in this work unless I would suffer myself to
+be left behind here again; in which case, if this single ship should
+miscarry in any part of her voyage, I should be just in the same
+condition that I was left in here at first, and from which I have been so
+wonderfully delivered."  He owned the case was very hard upon me as to my
+voyage; but laid it home upon my conscience whether the blessing of
+saving thirty-seven souls was not worth venturing all I had in the world
+for.  I was not so sensible of that as he was.  I replied to him thus:
+"Why, sir, it is a valuable thing, indeed, to be an instrument in God's
+hand to convert thirty-seven heathens to the knowledge of Christ: but as
+you are an ecclesiastic, and are given over to the work, so it seems so
+naturally to fall in the way of your profession; how is it, then, that
+you do not rather offer yourself to undertake it than to press me to do
+it?"
+
+Upon this he faced about just before me, as he walked along, and putting
+me to a full stop, made me a very low bow.  "I most heartily thank God
+and you, sir," said he, "for giving me so evident a call to so blessed a
+work; and if you think yourself discharged from it, and desire me to
+undertake it, I will most readily do it, and think it a happy reward for
+all the hazards and difficulties of such a broken, disappointed voyage as
+I have met with, that I am dropped at last into so glorious a work."
+
+I discovered a kind of rapture in his face while he spoke this to me; his
+eyes sparkled like fire; his face glowed, and his colour came and went;
+in a word, he was fired with the joy of being embarked in such a work.  I
+paused a considerable while before I could tell what to say to him; for I
+was really surprised to find a man of such sincerity, and who seemed
+possessed of a zeal beyond the ordinary rate of men.  But after I had
+considered it a while, I asked him seriously if he was in earnest, and
+that he would venture, on the single consideration of an attempt to
+convert those poor people, to be locked up in an unplanted island for
+perhaps his life, and at last might not know whether he should be able to
+do them good or not?  He turned short upon me, and asked me what I called
+a venture?  "Pray, sir," said he, "what do you think I consented to go in
+your ship to the East Indies for?"--"ay," said I, "that I know not,
+unless it was to preach to the Indians."--"Doubtless it was," said he;
+"and do you think, if I can convert these thirty-seven men to the faith
+of Jesus Christ, it is not worth my time, though I should never be
+fetched off the island again?--nay, is it not infinitely of more worth to
+save so many souls than my life is, or the life of twenty more of the
+same profession?  Yes, sir," says he, "I would give God thanks all my
+days if I could be made the happy instrument of saving the souls of those
+poor men, though I were never to get my foot off this island or see my
+native country any more.  But since you will honour me with putting me
+into this work, for which I will pray for you all the days of my life, I
+have one humble petition to you besides."--"What is that?" said I.--"Why,"
+says he, "it is, that you will leave your man Friday with me, to be my
+interpreter to them, and to assist me; for without some help I cannot
+speak to them, or they to me."
+
+I was sensibly touched at his requesting Friday, because I could not
+think of parting with him, and that for many reasons: he had been the
+companion of my travels; he was not only faithful to me, but sincerely
+affectionate to the last degree; and I had resolved to do something
+considerable for him if he out-lived me, as it was probable he would.
+Then I knew that, as I had bred Friday up to be a Protestant, it would
+quite confound him to bring him to embrace another religion; and he would
+never, while his eyes were open, believe that his old master was a
+heretic, and would be damned; and this might in the end ruin the poor
+fellow's principles, and so turn him back again to his first idolatry.
+However, a sudden thought relieved me in this strait, and it was this: I
+told him I could not say that I was willing to part with Friday on any
+account whatever, though a work that to him was of more value than his
+life ought to be of much more value than the keeping or parting with a
+servant.  On the other hand, I was persuaded that Friday would by no
+means agree to part with me; and I could not force him to it without his
+consent, without manifest injustice; because I had promised I would never
+send him away, and he had promised and engaged that he would never leave
+me, unless I sent him away.
+
+He seemed very much concerned at it, for he had no rational access to
+these poor people, seeing he did not understand one word of their
+language, nor they one of his.  To remove this difficulty, I told him
+Friday's father had learned Spanish, which I found he also understood,
+and he should serve him as an interpreter.  So he was much better
+satisfied, and nothing could persuade him but he would stay and endeavour
+to convert them; but Providence gave another very happy turn to all this.
+
+I come back now to the first part of his objections.  When we came to the
+Englishmen, I sent for them all together, and after some account given
+them of what I had done for them, viz. what necessary things I had
+provided for them, and how they were distributed, which they were very
+sensible of, and very thankful for, I began to talk to them of the
+scandalous life they led, and gave them a full account of the notice the
+clergyman had taken of it; and arguing how unchristian and irreligious a
+life it was, I first asked them if they were married men or bachelors?
+They soon explained their condition to me, and showed that two of them
+were widowers, and the other three were single men, or bachelors.  I
+asked them with what conscience they could take these women, and call
+them their wives, and have so many children by them, and not be lawfully
+married to them?  They all gave me the answer I expected, viz. that there
+was nobody to marry them; that they agreed before the governor to keep
+them as their wives, and to maintain them and own them as their wives;
+and they thought, as things stood with them, they were as legally married
+as if they had been married by a parson and with all the formalities in
+the world.
+
+I told them that no doubt they were married in the sight of God, and were
+bound in conscience to keep them as their wives; but that the laws of men
+being otherwise, they might desert the poor women and children hereafter;
+and that their wives, being poor desolate women, friendless and
+moneyless, would have no way to help themselves.  I therefore told them
+that unless I was assured of their honest intent, I could do nothing for
+them, but would take care that what I did should be for the women and
+children without them; and that, unless they would give me some
+assurances that they would marry the women, I could not think it was
+convenient they should continue together as man and wife; for that it was
+both scandalous to men and offensive to God, who they could not think
+would bless them if they went on thus.
+
+All this went on as I expected; and they told me, especially Will Atkins,
+who now seemed to speak for the rest, that they loved their wives as well
+as if they had been born in their own native country, and would not leave
+them on any account whatever; and they did verily believe that their
+wives were as virtuous and as modest, and did, to the utmost of their
+skill, as much for them and for their children, as any woman could
+possibly do: and they would not part with them on any account.  Will
+Atkins, for his own particular, added that if any man would take him
+away, and offer to carry him home to England, and make him captain of the
+best man-of-war in the navy, he would not go with him if he might not
+carry his wife and children with him; and if there was a clergyman in the
+ship, he would be married to her now with all his heart.
+
+This was just as I would have it.  The priest was not with me at that
+moment, but he was not far off; so to try him further, I told him I had a
+clergyman with me, and, if he was sincere, I would have him married next
+morning, and bade him consider of it, and talk with the rest.  He said,
+as for himself, he need not consider of it at all, for he was very ready
+to do it, and was glad I had a minister with me, and he believed they
+would be all willing also.  I then told him that my friend, the minister,
+was a Frenchman, and could not speak English, but I would act the clerk
+between them.  He never so much as asked me whether he was a Papist or
+Protestant, which was, indeed, what I was afraid of.  We then parted, and
+I went back to my clergyman, and Will Atkins went in to talk with his
+companions.  I desired the French gentleman not to say anything to them
+till the business was thoroughly ripe; and I told him what answer the men
+had given me.
+
+Before I went from their quarter they all came to me and told me they had
+been considering what I had said; that they were glad to hear I had a
+clergyman in my company, and they were very willing to give me the
+satisfaction I desired, and to be formally married as soon as I pleased;
+for they were far from desiring to part with their wives, and that they
+meant nothing but what was very honest when they chose them.  So I
+appointed them to meet me the next morning; and, in the meantime, they
+should let their wives know the meaning of the marriage law; and that it
+was not only to prevent any scandal, but also to oblige them that they
+should not forsake them, whatever might happen.
+
+The women were easily made sensible of the meaning of the thing, and were
+very well satisfied with it, as, indeed, they had reason to be: so they
+failed not to attend all together at my apartment next morning, where I
+brought out my clergyman; and though he had not on a minister's gown,
+after the manner of England, or the habit of a priest, after the manner
+of France, yet having a black vest something like a cassock, with a sash
+round it, he did not look very unlike a minister; and as for his
+language, I was his interpreter.  But the seriousness of his behaviour to
+them, and the scruples he made of marrying the women, because they were
+not baptized and professed Christians, gave them an exceeding reverence
+for his person; and there was no need, after that, to inquire whether he
+was a clergyman or not.  Indeed, I was afraid his scruples would have
+been carried so far as that he would not have married them at all; nay,
+notwithstanding all I was able to say to him, he resisted me, though
+modestly, yet very steadily, and at last refused absolutely to marry
+them, unless he had first talked with the men and the women too; and
+though at first I was a little backward to it, yet at last I agreed to it
+with a good will, perceiving the sincerity of his design.
+
+When he came to them he let them know that I had acquainted him with
+their circumstances, and with the present design; that he was very
+willing to perform that part of his function, and marry them, as I had
+desired; but that before he could do it, he must take the liberty to talk
+with them.  He told them that in the sight of all indifferent men, and in
+the sense of the laws of society, they had lived all this while in a
+state of sin; and that it was true that nothing but the consenting to
+marry, or effectually separating them from one another, could now put an
+end to it; but there was a difficulty in it, too, with respect to the
+laws of Christian matrimony, which he was not fully satisfied about, that
+of marrying one that is a professed Christian to a savage, an idolater,
+and a heathen--one that is not baptized; and yet that he did not see that
+there was time left to endeavour to persuade the women to be baptized, or
+to profess the name of Christ, whom they had, he doubted, heard nothing
+of, and without which they could not be baptized.  He told them he
+doubted they were but indifferent Christians themselves; that they had
+but little knowledge of God or of His ways, and, therefore, he could not
+expect that they had said much to their wives on that head yet; but that
+unless they would promise him to use their endeavours with their wives to
+persuade them to become Christians, and would, as well as they could,
+instruct them in the knowledge and belief of God that made them, and to
+worship Jesus Christ that redeemed them, he could not marry them; for he
+would have no hand in joining Christians with savages, nor was it
+consistent with the principles of the Christian religion, and was,
+indeed, expressly forbidden in God's law.
+
+They heard all this very attentively, and I delivered it very faithfully
+to them from his mouth, as near his own words as I could; only sometimes
+adding something of my own, to convince them how just it was, and that I
+was of his mind; and I always very carefully distinguished between what I
+said from myself and what were the clergyman's words.  They told me it
+was very true what the gentleman said, that they were very indifferent
+Christians themselves, and that they had never talked to their wives
+about religion.  "Lord, sir," says Will Atkins, "how should we teach them
+religion?  Why, we know nothing ourselves; and besides, sir," said he,
+"should we talk to them of God and Jesus Christ, and heaven and hell, it
+would make them laugh at us, and ask us what we believe ourselves.  And
+if we should tell them that we believe all the things we speak of to
+them, such as of good people going to heaven, and wicked people to the
+devil, they would ask us where we intend to go ourselves, that believe
+all this, and are such wicked fellows as we indeed are?  Why, sir; 'tis
+enough to give them a surfeit of religion at first hearing; folks must
+have some religion themselves before they begin to teach other
+people."--"Will Atkins," said I to him, "though I am afraid that what you
+say has too much truth in it, yet can you not tell your wife she is in
+the wrong; that there is a God and a religion better than her own; that
+her gods are idols; that they can neither hear nor speak; that there is a
+great Being that made all things, and that can destroy all that He has
+made; that He rewards the good and punishes the bad; and that we are to
+be judged by Him at last for all we do here?  You are not so ignorant but
+even nature itself will teach you that all this is true; and I am
+satisfied you know it all to be true, and believe it yourself."--"That is
+true, sir," said Atkins; "but with what face can I say anything to my
+wife of all this, when she will tell me immediately it cannot be
+true?"--"Not true!" said I; "what do you mean by that?"--"Why, sir," said
+he, "she will tell me it cannot be true that this God I shall tell her of
+can be just, or can punish or reward, since I am not punished and sent to
+the devil, that have been such a wicked creature as she knows I have
+been, even to her, and to everybody else; and that I should be suffered
+to live, that have been always acting so contrary to what I must tell her
+is good, and to what I ought to have done."--"Why, truly, Atkins," said
+I, "I am afraid thou speakest too much truth;" and with that I informed
+the clergyman of what Atkins had said, for he was impatient to know.
+"Oh," said the priest, "tell him there is one thing will make him the
+best minister in the world to his wife, and that is repentance; for none
+teach repentance like true penitents.  He wants nothing but to repent,
+and then he will be so much the better qualified to instruct his wife; he
+will then be able to tell her that there is not only a God, and that He
+is the just rewarder of good and evil, but that He is a merciful Being,
+and with infinite goodness and long-suffering forbears to punish those
+that offend; waiting to be gracious, and willing not the death of a
+sinner, but rather that he should return and live; and even reserves
+damnation to the general day of retribution; that it is a clear evidence
+of God and of a future state that righteous men receive not their reward,
+or wicked men their punishment, till they come into another world; and
+this will lead him to teach his wife the doctrine of the resurrection and
+of the last judgment.  Let him but repent himself, he will be an
+excellent preacher of repentance to his wife."
+
+I repeated all this to Atkins, who looked very serious all the while,
+and, as we could easily perceive, was more than ordinarily affected with
+it; when being eager, and hardly suffering me to make an end, "I know all
+this, master," says he, "and a great deal more; but I have not the
+impudence to talk thus to my wife, when God and my conscience know, and
+my wife will be an undeniable evidence against me, that I have lived as
+if I had never heard of a God or future state, or anything about it; and
+to talk of my repenting, alas!" (and with that he fetched a deep sigh,
+and I could see that the tears stood in his eyes) "'tis past all that
+with me."--"Past it, Atkins?" said I: "what dost thou mean by that?"--"I
+know well enough what I mean," says he; "I mean 'tis too late, and that
+is too true."
+
+I told the clergyman, word for word, what he said, and this affectionate
+man could not refrain from tears; but, recovering himself, said to me,
+"Ask him but one question.  Is he easy that it is too late; or is he
+troubled, and wishes it were not so?"  I put the question fairly to
+Atkins; and he answered with a great deal of passion, "How could any man
+be easy in a condition that must certainly end in eternal destruction?
+that he was far from being easy; but that, on the contrary, he believed
+it would one time or other ruin him."--"What do you mean by that?" said
+I.--"Why," he said, "he believed he should one time or other cut his
+throat, to put an end to the terror of it."
+
+The clergyman shook his head, with great concern in his face, when I told
+him all this; but turning quick to me upon it, says, "If that be his
+case, we may assure him it is not too late; Christ will give him
+repentance.  But pray," says he, "explain this to him: that as no man is
+saved but by Christ, and the merit of His passion procuring divine mercy
+for him, how can it be too late for any man to receive mercy?  Does he
+think he is able to sin beyond the power or reach of divine mercy?  Pray
+tell him there may be a time when provoked mercy will no longer strive,
+and when God may refuse to hear, but that it is never too late for men to
+ask mercy; and we, that are Christ's servants, are commanded to preach
+mercy at all times, in the name of Jesus Christ, to all those that
+sincerely repent: so that it is never too late to repent."
+
+I told Atkins all this, and he heard me with great earnestness; but it
+seemed as if he turned off the discourse to the rest, for he said to me
+he would go and have some talk with his wife; so he went out a while, and
+we talked to the rest.  I perceived they were all stupidly ignorant as to
+matters of religion, as much as I was when I went rambling away from my
+father; yet there were none of them backward to hear what had been said;
+and all of them seriously promised that they would talk with their wives
+about it, and do their endeavours to persuade them to turn Christians.
+
+The clergyman smiled upon me when I reported what answer they gave, but
+said nothing a good while; but at last, shaking his head, "We that are
+Christ's servants," says he, "can go no further than to exhort and
+instruct: and when men comply, submit to the reproof, and promise what we
+ask, 'tis all we can do; we are bound to accept their good words; but
+believe me, sir," said he, "whatever you may have known of the life of
+that man you call Will Atkin's, I believe he is the only sincere convert
+among them: I will not despair of the rest; but that man is apparently
+struck with the sense of his past life, and I doubt not, when he comes to
+talk of religion to his wife, he will talk himself effectually into it:
+for attempting to teach others is sometimes the best way of teaching
+ourselves.  If that poor Atkins begins but once to talk seriously of
+Jesus Christ to his wife, he will assuredly talk himself into a thorough
+convert, make himself a penitent, and who knows what may follow."
+
+Upon this discourse, however, and their promising, as above, to endeavour
+to persuade their wives to embrace Christianity, he married the two other
+couple; but Will Atkins and his wife were not yet come in.  After this,
+my clergyman, waiting a while, was curious to know where Atkins was gone,
+and turning to me, said, "I entreat you, sir, let us walk out of your
+labyrinth here and look; I daresay we shall find this poor man somewhere
+or other talking seriously to his wife, and teaching her already
+something of religion."  I began to be of the same mind; so we went out
+together, and I carried him a way which none knew but myself, and where
+the trees were so very thick that it was not easy to see through the
+thicket of leaves, and far harder to see in than to see out: when, coming
+to the edge of the wood, I saw Atkins and his tawny wife sitting under
+the shade of a bush, very eager in discourse: I stopped short till my
+clergyman came up to me, and then having showed him where they were, we
+stood and looked very steadily at them a good while.  We observed him
+very earnest with her, pointing up to the sun, and to every quarter of
+the heavens, and then down to the earth, then out to the sea, then to
+himself, then to her, to the woods, to the trees.  "Now," says the
+clergyman, "you see my words are made good, the man preaches to her; mark
+him now, he is telling her that our God has made him, her, and the
+heavens, the earth, the sea, the woods, the trees, &c."--"I believe he
+is," said I.  Immediately we perceived Will Atkins start upon his feet,
+fall down on his knees, and lift up both his hands.  We supposed he said
+something, but we could not hear him; it was too far for that.  He did
+not continue kneeling half a minute, but comes and sits down again by his
+wife, and talks to her again; we perceived then the woman very attentive,
+but whether she said anything to him we could not tell.  While the poor
+fellow was upon his knees I could see the tears run plentifully down my
+clergyman's cheeks, and I could hardly forbear myself; but it was a great
+affliction to us both that we were not near enough to hear anything that
+passed between them.  Well, however, we could come no nearer for fear of
+disturbing them: so we resolved to see an end of this piece of still
+conversation, and it spoke loud enough to us without the help of voice.
+He sat down again, as I have said, close by her, and talked again
+earnestly to her, and two or three times we could see him embrace her
+most passionately; another time we saw him take out his handkerchief and
+wipe her eyes, and then kiss her again with a kind of transport very
+unusual; and after several of these things, we saw him on a sudden jump
+up again, and lend her his hand to help her up, when immediately leading
+her by the hand a step or two, they both kneeled down together, and
+continued so about two minutes.
+
+My friend could bear it no longer, but cries out aloud, "St. Paul!  St.
+Paul! behold he prayeth."  I was afraid Atkins would hear him, therefore
+I entreated him to withhold himself a while, that we might see an end of
+the scene, which to me, I must confess, was the most affecting that ever
+I saw in my life.  Well, he strove with himself for a while, but was in
+such raptures to think that the poor heathen woman was become a
+Christian, that he was not able to contain himself; he wept several
+times, then throwing up his hands and crossing his breast, said over
+several things ejaculatory, and by the way of giving God thanks for so
+miraculous a testimony of the success of our endeavours.  Some he spoke
+softly, and I could not well hear others; some things he said in Latin,
+some in French; then two or three times the tears would interrupt him,
+that he could not speak at all; but I begged that he would contain
+himself, and let us more narrowly and fully observe what was before us,
+which he did for a time, the scene not being near ended yet; for after
+the poor man and his wife were risen again from their knees, we observed
+he stood talking still eagerly to her, and we observed her motion, that
+she was greatly affected with what he said, by her frequently lifting up
+her hands, laying her hand to her breast, and such other postures as
+express the greatest seriousness and attention; this continued about half
+a quarter of an hour, and then they walked away, so we could see no more
+of them in that situation.
+
+I took this interval to say to the clergyman, first, that I was glad to
+see the particulars we had both been witnesses to; that, though I was
+hard enough of belief in such cases, yet that I began to think it was all
+very sincere here, both in the man and his wife, however ignorant they
+might both be, and I hoped such a beginning would yet have a more happy
+end.  "But, my friend," added I, "will you give me leave to start one
+difficulty here?  I cannot tell how to object the least thing against
+that affectionate concern which you show for the turning of the poor
+people from their paganism to the Christian religion; but how does this
+comfort you, while these people are, in your account, out of the pale of
+the Catholic Church, without which you believe there is no salvation? so
+that you esteem these but heretics, as effectually lost as the pagans
+themselves."
+
+To this he answered, with abundance of candour, thus: "Sir, I am a
+Catholic of the Roman Church, and a priest of the order of St. Benedict,
+and I embrace all the principles of the Roman faith; but yet, if you will
+believe me, and that I do not speak in compliment to you, or in respect
+to my circumstances and your civilities; I say nevertheless, I do not
+look upon you, who call yourselves reformed, without some charity.  I
+dare not say (though I know it is our opinion in general) that you cannot
+be saved; I will by no means limit the mercy of Christ so far as think
+that He cannot receive you into the bosom of His Church, in a manner to
+us unperceivable; and I hope you have the same charity for us: I pray
+daily for you being all restored to Christ's Church, by whatsoever method
+He, who is all-wise, is pleased to direct.  In the meantime, surely you
+will allow it consists with me as a Roman to distinguish far between a
+Protestant and a pagan; between one that calls on Jesus Christ, though in
+a way which I do not think is according to the true faith, and a savage
+or a barbarian, that knows no God, no Christ, no Redeemer; and if you are
+not within the pale of the Catholic Church, we hope you are nearer being
+restored to it than those who know nothing of God or of His Church: and I
+rejoice, therefore, when I see this poor man, who you say has been a
+profligate, and almost a murderer kneel down and pray to Jesus Christ, as
+we suppose he did, though not fully enlightened; believing that God, from
+whom every such work proceeds, will sensibly touch his heart, and bring
+him to the further knowledge of that truth in His own time; and if God
+shall influence this poor man to convert and instruct the ignorant
+savage, his wife, I can never believe that he shall be cast away himself.
+And have I not reason, then, to rejoice, the nearer any are brought to
+the knowledge of Christ, though they may not be brought quite home into
+the bosom of the Catholic Church just at the time when I desire it,
+leaving it to the goodness of Christ to perfect His work in His own time,
+and in his own way?  Certainly, I would rejoice if all the savages in
+America were brought, like this poor woman, to pray to God, though they
+were all to be Protestants at first, rather than they should continue
+pagans or heathens; firmly believing, that He that had bestowed the first
+light on them would farther illuminate them with a beam of His heavenly
+grace, and bring them into the pale of His Church when He should see
+good."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII--CONVERSATION BETWIXT WILL ATKINS AND HIS WIFE
+
+
+I was astonished at the sincerity and temper of this pious Papist, as
+much as I was oppressed by the power of his reasoning; and it presently
+occurred to my thoughts, that if such a temper was universal, we might be
+all Catholic Christians, whatever Church or particular profession we
+joined in; that a spirit of charity would soon work us all up into right
+principles; and as he thought that the like charity would make us all
+Catholics, so I told him I believed, had all the members of his Church
+the like moderation, they would soon all be Protestants.  And there we
+left that part; for we never disputed at all.  However, I talked to him
+another way, and taking him by the hand, "My friend," says I, "I wish all
+the clergy of the Romish Church were blessed with such moderation, and
+had an equal share of your charity.  I am entirely of your opinion; but I
+must tell you that if you should preach such doctrine in Spain or Italy,
+they would put you into the Inquisition."--"It may be so," said he; "I
+know not what they would do in Spain or Italy; but I will not say they
+would be the better Christians for that severity; for I am sure there is
+no heresy in abounding with charity."
+
+Well, as Will Atkins and his wife were gone, our business there was over,
+so we went back our own way; and when we came back, we found them waiting
+to be called in.  Observing this, I asked my clergyman if we should
+discover to him that we had seen him under the bush or not; and it was
+his opinion we should not, but that we should talk to him first, and hear
+what he would say to us; so we called him in alone, nobody being in the
+place but ourselves, and I began by asking him some particulars about his
+parentage and education.  He told me frankly enough that his father was a
+clergyman who would have taught him well, but that he, Will Atkins,
+despised all instruction and correction; and by his brutish conduct cut
+the thread of all his father's comforts and shortened his days, for that
+he broke his heart by the most ungrateful, unnatural return for the most
+affectionate treatment a father ever gave.
+
+In what he said there seemed so much sincerity of repentance, that it
+painfully affected me.  I could not but reflect that I, too, had
+shortened the life of a good, tender father by my bad conduct and
+obstinate self-will.  I was, indeed, so surprised with what he had told
+me, that I thought, instead of my going about to teach and instruct him,
+the man was made a teacher and instructor to me in a most unexpected
+manner.
+
+I laid all this before the young clergyman, who was greatly affected with
+it, and said to me, "Did I not say, sir, that when this man was converted
+he would preach to us all?  I tell you, sir, if this one man be made a
+true penitent, there will be no need of me; he will make Christians of
+all in the island."--But having a little composed myself, I renewed my
+discourse with Will Atkins.  "But, Will," said I, "how comes the sense of
+this matter to touch you just now?"
+
+_W.A._--Sir, you have set me about a work that has struck a dart though
+my very soul; I have been talking about God and religion to my wife, in
+order, as you directed me, to make a Christian of her, and she has
+preached such a sermon to me as I shall never forget while I live.
+
+_R.C._--No, no, it is not your wife has preached to you; but when you
+were moving religious arguments to her, conscience has flung them back
+upon you.
+
+_W.A._--Ay, sir, with such force as is not to be resisted.
+
+_R.C._--Pray, Will, let us know what passed between you and your wife;
+for I know something of it already.
+
+_W.A._--Sir, it is impossible to give you a full account of it; I am too
+full to hold it, and yet have no tongue to express it; but let her have
+said what she will, though I cannot give you an account of it, this I can
+tell you, that I have resolved to amend and reform my life.
+
+_R.C._--But tell us some of it: how did you begin, Will?  For this has
+been an extraordinary case, that is certain.  She has preached a sermon,
+indeed, if she has wrought this upon you.
+
+_W.A._--Why, I first told her the nature of our laws about marriage, and
+what the reasons were that men and women were obliged to enter into such
+compacts as it was neither in the power of one nor other to break; that
+otherwise, order and justice could not be maintained, and men would run
+from their wives, and abandon their children, mix confusedly with one
+another, and neither families be kept entire, nor inheritances be settled
+by legal descent.
+
+_R.C._--You talk like a civilian, Will.  Could you make her understand
+what you meant by inheritance and families?  They know no such things
+among the savages, but marry anyhow, without regard to relation,
+consanguinity, or family; brother and sister, nay, as I have been told,
+even the father and the daughter, and the son and the mother.
+
+_W.A._--I believe, sir, you are misinformed, and my wife assures me of
+the contrary, and that they abhor it; perhaps, for any further relations,
+they may not be so exact as we are; but she tells me never in the near
+relationship you speak of.
+
+_R.C._--Well, what did she say to what you told her?
+
+_W.A._--She said she liked it very well, as it was much better than in
+her country.
+
+_R.C._--But did you tell her what marriage was?
+
+_W.A._--Ay, ay, there began our dialogue.  I asked her if she would be
+married to me our way.  She asked me what way that was; I told her
+marriage was appointed by God; and here we had a strange talk together,
+indeed, as ever man and wife had, I believe.
+
+N.B.--This dialogue between Will Atkins and his wife, which I took down
+in writing just after he told it me, was as follows:--
+
+_Wife_.--Appointed by your God!--Why, have you a God in your country?
+
+_W.A._--Yes, my dear, God is in every country.
+
+_Wife_.--No your God in my country; my country have the great old
+Benamuckee God.
+
+_W.A._--Child, I am very unfit to show you who God is; God is in heaven
+and made the heaven and the earth, the sea, and all that in them is.
+
+_Wife_.--No makee de earth; no you God makee all earth; no makee my
+country.
+
+[Will Atkins laughed a little at her expression of God not making her
+country.]
+
+_Wife_.--No laugh; why laugh me?  This no ting to laugh.
+
+[He was justly reproved by his wife, for she was more serious than he at
+first.]
+
+_W.A._--That's true, indeed; I will not laugh any more, my dear.
+
+_Wife_.--Why you say you God makee all?
+
+_W.A._--Yes, child, our God made the whole world, and you, and me, and
+all things; for He is the only true God, and there is no God but Him.  He
+lives for ever in heaven.
+
+_Wife_.--Why you no tell me long ago?
+
+_W.A._--That's true, indeed; but I have been a wicked wretch, and have
+not only forgotten to acquaint thee with anything before, but have lived
+without God in the world myself.
+
+_Wife_.--What, have you a great God in your country, you no know Him?  No
+say O to Him?  No do good ting for Him?  That no possible.
+
+_W.A._--It is true; though, for all that, we live as if there was no God
+in heaven, or that He had no power on earth.
+
+_Wife_.--But why God let you do so?  Why He no makee you good live?
+
+_W.A._--It is all our own fault.
+
+_Wife_.--But you say me He is great, much great, have much great power;
+can makee kill when He will: why He no makee kill when you no serve Him?
+no say O to Him? no be good mans?
+
+_W.A._--That is true, He might strike me dead; and I ought to expect it,
+for I have been a wicked wretch, that is true; but God is merciful, and
+does not deal with us as we deserve.
+
+_Wife_.--But then do you not tell God thankee for that too?
+
+_W. A._--No, indeed, I have not thanked God for His mercy, any more than
+I have feared God from His power.
+
+_Wife_.--Then you God no God; me no think, believe He be such one, great
+much power, strong: no makee kill you, though you make Him much angry.
+
+_W.A._--What, will my wicked life hinder you from believing in God?  What
+a dreadful creature am I! and what a sad truth is it, that the horrid
+lives of Christians hinder the conversion of heathens!
+
+_Wife_.--How me tink you have great much God up there [she points up to
+heaven], and yet no do well, no do good ting?  Can He tell?  Sure He no
+tell what you do?
+
+_W.A._--Yes, yes, He knows and sees all things; He hears us speak, sees
+what we do, knows what we think though we do not speak.
+
+_Wife_.--What!  He no hear you curse, swear, speak de great damn?
+
+_W.A._--Yes, yes, He hears it all.
+
+_Wife_.--Where be then the much great power strong?
+
+_W.A._--He is merciful, that is all we can say for it; and this proves
+Him to be the true God; He is God, and not man, and therefore we are not
+consumed.
+
+[Here Will Atkins told us he was struck with horror to think how he could
+tell his wife so clearly that God sees, and hears, and knows the secret
+thoughts of the heart, and all that we do, and yet that he had dared to
+do all the vile things he had done.]
+
+_Wife_.--Merciful!  What you call dat?
+
+_W.A._--He is our Father and Maker, and He pities and spares us.
+
+_Wife_.--So then He never makee kill, never angry when you do wicked;
+then He no good Himself, or no great able.
+
+_W.A._--Yes, yes, my dear, He is infinitely good and infinitely great,
+and able to punish too; and sometimes, to show His justice and vengeance,
+He lets fly His anger to destroy sinners and make examples; many are cut
+off in their sins.
+
+_Wife_.--But no makee kill you yet; then He tell you, maybe, that He no
+makee you kill: so you makee the bargain with Him, you do bad thing, He
+no be angry at you when He be angry at other mans.
+
+_W.A._--No, indeed, my sins are all presumptions upon His goodness; and
+He would be infinitely just if He destroyed me, as He has done other men.
+
+_Wife_.--Well, and yet no kill, no makee you dead: what you say to Him
+for that?  You no tell Him thankee for all that too?
+
+_W.A._--I am an unthankful, ungrateful dog, that is true.
+
+_Wife_.--Why He no makee you much good better? you say He makee you.
+
+_W.A._--He made me as He made all the world: it is I have deformed myself
+and abused His goodness, and made myself an abominable wretch.
+
+_Wife_.--I wish you makee God know me.  I no makee Him angry--I no do bad
+wicked thing.
+
+[Here Will Atkins said his heart sunk within him to hear a poor untaught
+creature desire to be taught to know God, and he such a wicked wretch,
+that he could not say one word to her about God, but what the reproach of
+his own carriage would make most irrational to her to believe; nay, that
+already she had told him that she could not believe in God, because he,
+that was so wicked, was not destroyed.]
+
+_W.A._--My dear, you mean, you wish I could teach you to know God, not
+God to know you; for He knows you already, and every thought in your
+heart.
+
+_Wife_.--Why, then, He know what I say to you now: He know me wish to
+know Him.  How shall me know who makee me?
+
+_W.A._--Poor creature, He must teach thee: I cannot teach thee.  I will
+pray to Him to teach thee to know Him, and forgive me, that am unworthy
+to teach thee.
+
+[The poor fellow was in such an agony at her desiring him to make her
+know God, and her wishing to know Him, that he said he fell down on his
+knees before her, and prayed to God to enlighten her mind with the saving
+knowledge of Jesus Christ, and to pardon his sins, and accept of his
+being the unworthy instrument of instructing her in the principles of
+religion: after which he sat down by her again, and their dialogue went
+on.  This was the time when we saw him kneel down and hold up his hands.]
+
+_Wife_.--What you put down the knee for?  What you hold up the hand for?
+What you say?  Who you speak to?  What is all that?
+
+_W.A._--My dear, I bow my knees in token of my submission to Him that
+made me: I said O to Him, as you call it, and as your old men do to their
+idol Benamuckee; that is, I prayed to Him.
+
+_Wife_.--What say you O to Him for?
+
+_W.A._--I prayed to Him to open your eyes and your understanding, that
+you may know Him, and be accepted by Him.
+
+_Wife_.--Can He do that too?
+
+_W.A._--Yes, He can: He can do all things.
+
+_Wife_.--But now He hear what you say?
+
+_W.A._--Yes, He has bid us pray to Him, and promised to hear us.
+
+_Wife_.--Bid you pray?  When He bid you?  How He bid you?  What you hear
+Him speak?
+
+_W.A._--No, we do not hear Him speak; but He has revealed Himself many
+ways to us.
+
+[Here he was at a great loss to make her understand that God has revealed
+Himself to us by His word, and what His word was; but at last he told it
+to her thus.]
+
+_W.A._--God has spoken to some good men in former days, even from heaven,
+by plain words; and God has inspired good men by His Spirit; and they
+have written all His laws down in a book.
+
+_Wife_.--Me no understand that; where is book?
+
+_W.A._--Alas! my poor creature, I have not this book; but I hope I shall
+one time or other get it for you, and help you to read it.
+
+[Here he embraced her with great affection, but with inexpressible grief
+that he had not a Bible.]
+
+_Wife_.--But how you makee me know that God teachee them to write that
+book?
+
+_W.A._--By the same rule that we know Him to be God.
+
+_Wife_.--What rule?  What way you know Him?
+
+_W.A._--Because He teaches and commands nothing but what is good,
+righteous, and holy, and tends to make us perfectly good, as well as
+perfectly happy; and because He forbids and commands us to avoid all that
+is wicked, that is evil in itself, or evil in its consequence.
+
+_Wife_.--That me would understand, that me fain see; if He teachee all
+good thing, He makee all good thing, He give all thing, He hear me when I
+say O to Him, as you do just now; He makee me good if I wish to be good;
+He spare me, no makee kill me, when I no be good: all this you say He do,
+yet He be great God; me take, think, believe Him to be great God; me say
+O to Him with you, my dear.
+
+Here the poor man could forbear no longer, but raised her up, made her
+kneel by him, and he prayed to God aloud to instruct her in the knowledge
+of Himself, by His Spirit; and that by some good providence, if possible,
+she might, some time or other, come to have a Bible, that she might read
+the word of God, and be taught by it to know Him.  This was the time that
+we saw him lift her up by the hand, and saw him kneel down by her, as
+above.
+
+They had several other discourses, it seems, after this; and particularly
+she made him promise that, since he confessed his own life had been a
+wicked, abominable course of provocations against God, that he would
+reform it, and not make God angry any more, lest He should make him dead,
+as she called it, and then she would be left alone, and never be taught
+to know this God better; and lest he should be miserable, as he had told
+her wicked men would be after death.
+
+This was a strange account, and very affecting to us both, but
+particularly to the young clergyman; he was, indeed, wonderfully
+surprised with it, but under the greatest affliction imaginable that he
+could not talk to her, that he could not speak English to make her
+understand him; and as she spoke but very broken English, he could not
+understand her; however, he turned himself to me, and told me that he
+believed that there must be more to do with this woman than to marry her.
+I did not understand him at first; but at length he explained himself,
+viz. that she ought to be baptized.  I agreed with him in that part
+readily, and wished it to be done presently.  "No, no; hold, sir," says
+he; "though I would have her be baptized, by all means, for I must
+observe that Will Atkins, her husband, has indeed brought her, in a
+wonderful manner, to be willing to embrace a religious life, and has
+given her just ideas of the being of a God; of His power, justice, and
+mercy: yet I desire to know of him if he has said anything to her of
+Jesus Christ, and of the salvation of sinners; of the nature of faith in
+Him, and redemption by Him; of the Holy Spirit, the resurrection, the
+last judgment, and the future state."
+
+I called Will Atkins again, and asked him; but the poor fellow fell
+immediately into tears, and told us he had said something to her of all
+those things, but that he was himself so wicked a creature, and his own
+conscience so reproached him with his horrid, ungodly life, that he
+trembled at the apprehensions that her knowledge of him should lessen the
+attention she should give to those things, and make her rather contemn
+religion than receive it; but he was assured, he said, that her mind was
+so disposed to receive due impressions of all those things, and that if I
+would but discourse with her, she would make it appear to my satisfaction
+that my labour would not be lost upon her.
+
+Accordingly I called her in, and placing myself as interpreter between my
+religious priest and the woman, I entreated him to begin with her; but
+sure such a sermon was never preached by a Popish priest in these latter
+ages of the world; and as I told him, I thought he had all the zeal, all
+the knowledge, all the sincerity of a Christian, without the error of a
+Roman Catholic; and that I took him to be such a clergyman as the Roman
+bishops were before the Church of Rome assumed spiritual sovereignty over
+the consciences of men.  In a word, he brought the poor woman to embrace
+the knowledge of Christ, and of redemption by Him, not with wonder and
+astonishment only, as she did the first notions of a God, but with joy
+and faith; with an affection, and a surprising degree of understanding,
+scarce to be imagined, much less to be expressed; and, at her own
+request, she was baptized.
+
+When he was preparing to baptize her, I entreated him that he would
+perform that office with some caution, that the man might not perceive he
+was of the Roman Church, if possible, because of other ill consequences
+which might attend a difference among us in that very religion which we
+were instructing the other in.  He told me that as he had no consecrated
+chapel, nor proper things for the office, I should see he would do it in
+a manner that I should not know by it that he was a Roman Catholic
+myself, if I had not known it before; and so he did; for saying only some
+words over to himself in Latin, which I could not understand, he poured a
+whole dishful of water upon the woman's head, pronouncing in French, very
+loud, "Mary" (which was the name her husband desired me to give her, for
+I was her godfather), "I baptize thee in the name of the Father, and of
+the Son, and of the Holy Ghost;" so that none could know anything by it
+what religion he was of.  He gave the benediction afterwards in Latin,
+but either Will Atkins did not know but it was French, or else did not
+take notice of it at that time.
+
+As soon as this was over we married them; and after the marriage was
+over, he turned to Will Atkins, and in a very affectionate manner
+exhorted him, not only to persevere in that good disposition he was in,
+but to support the convictions that were upon him by a resolution to
+reform his life: told him it was in vain to say he repented if he did not
+forsake his crimes; represented to him how God had honoured him with
+being the instrument of bringing his wife to the knowledge of the
+Christian religion, and that he should be careful he did not dishonour
+the grace of God; and that if he did, he would see the heathen a better
+Christian than himself; the savage converted, and the instrument cast
+away.  He said a great many good things to them both; and then,
+recommending them to God's goodness, gave them the benediction again, I
+repeating everything to them in English; and thus ended the ceremony.  I
+think it was the most pleasant and agreeable day to me that ever I passed
+in my whole life.  But my clergyman had not done yet: his thoughts hung
+continually upon the conversion of the thirty-seven savages, and fain be
+would have stayed upon the island to have undertaken it; but I convinced
+him, first, that his undertaking was impracticable in itself; and,
+secondly, that perhaps I would put it into a way of being done in his
+absence to his satisfaction.
+
+Having thus brought the affairs of the island to a narrow compass, I was
+preparing to go on board the ship, when the young man I had taken out of
+the famished ship's company came to me, and told me he understood I had a
+clergyman with me, and that I had caused the Englishmen to be married to
+the savages; that he had a match too, which he desired might be finished
+before I went, between two Christians, which he hoped would not be
+disagreeable to me.
+
+I knew this must be the young woman who was his mother's servant, for
+there was no other Christian woman on the island: so I began to persuade
+him not to do anything of that kind rashly, or because he found himself
+in this solitary circumstance.  I represented to him that he had some
+considerable substance in the world, and good friends, as I understood by
+himself, and the maid also; that the maid was not only poor, and a
+servant, but was unequal to him, she being six or seven and twenty years
+old, and he not above seventeen or eighteen; that he might very probably,
+with my assistance, make a remove from this wilderness, and come into his
+own country again; and that then it would be a thousand to one but he
+would repent his choice, and the dislike of that circumstance might be
+disadvantageous to both.  I was going to say more, but he interrupted me,
+smiling, and told me, with a great deal of modesty, that I mistook in my
+guesses--that he had nothing of that kind in his thoughts; and he was
+very glad to hear that I had an intent of putting them in a way to see
+their own country again; and nothing should have made him think of
+staying there, but that the voyage I was going was so exceeding long and
+hazardous, and would carry him quite out of the reach of all his friends;
+that he had nothing to desire of me but that I would settle him in some
+little property in the island where he was, give him a servant or two,
+and some few necessaries, and he would live here like a planter, waiting
+the good time when, if ever I returned to England, I would redeem him.  He
+hoped I would not be unmindful of him when I came to England: that he
+would give me some letters to his friends in London, to let them know how
+good I had been to him, and in what part of the world and what
+circumstances I had left him in: and he promised me that whenever I
+redeemed him, the plantation, and all the improvements he had made upon
+it, let the value be what it would, should be wholly mine.
+
+His discourse was very prettily delivered, considering his youth, and was
+the more agreeable to me, because he told me positively the match was not
+for himself. I gave him all possible assurances that if I lived to come
+safe to England, I would deliver his letters, and do his business
+effectually; and that he might depend I should never forget the
+circumstances I had left him in.  But still I was impatient to know who
+was the person to be married; upon which he told me it was my Jack-of-all-
+trades and his maid Susan.  I was most agreeably surprised when he named
+the match; for, indeed, I thought it very suitable.  The character of
+that man I have given already; and as for the maid, she was a very
+honest, modest, sober, and religious young woman: had a very good share
+of sense, was agreeable enough in her person, spoke very handsomely and
+to the purpose, always with decency and good manners, and was neither too
+backward to speak when requisite, nor impertinently forward when it was
+not her business; very handy and housewifely, and an excellent manager;
+fit, indeed, to have been governess to the whole island; and she knew
+very well how to behave in every respect.
+
+The match being proposed in this manner, we married them the same day;
+and as I was father at the altar, and gave her away, so I gave her a
+portion; for I appointed her and her husband a handsome large space of
+ground for their plantation; and indeed this match, and the proposal the
+young gentleman made to give him a small property in the island, put me
+upon parcelling it out amongst them, that they might not quarrel
+afterwards about their situation.
+
+This sharing out the land to them I left to Will Atkins, who was now
+grown a sober, grave, managing fellow, perfectly reformed, exceedingly
+pious and religious; and, as far as I may be allowed to speak positively
+in such a case, I verily believe he was a true penitent.  He divided
+things so justly, and so much to every one's satisfaction, that they only
+desired one general writing under my hand for the whole, which I caused
+to be drawn up, and signed and sealed, setting out the bounds and
+situation of every man's plantation, and testifying that I gave them
+thereby severally a right to the whole possession and inheritance of the
+respective plantations or farms, with their improvements, to them and
+their heirs, reserving all the rest of the island as my own property, and
+a certain rent for every particular plantation after eleven years, if I,
+or any one from me, or in my name, came to demand it, producing an
+attested copy of the same writing.  As to the government and laws among
+them, I told them I was not capable of giving them better rules than they
+were able to give themselves; only I made them promise me to live in love
+and good neighbourhood with one another; and so I prepared to leave them.
+
+One thing I must not omit, and that is, that being now settled in a kind
+of commonwealth among themselves, and having much business in hand, it
+was odd to have seven-and-thirty Indians live in a nook of the island,
+independent, and, indeed, unemployed; for except the providing themselves
+food, which they had difficulty enough to do sometimes, they had no
+manner of business or property to manage.  I proposed, therefore, to the
+governor Spaniard that he should go to them, with Friday's father, and
+propose to them to remove, and either plant for themselves, or be taken
+into their several families as servants to be maintained for their
+labour, but without being absolute slaves; for I would not permit them to
+make them slaves by force, by any means; because they had their liberty
+given them by capitulation, as it were articles of surrender, which they
+ought not to break.
+
+They most willingly embraced the proposal, and came all very cheerfully
+along with him: so we allotted them land and plantations, which three or
+four accepted of, but all the rest chose to be employed as servants in
+the several families we had settled.  Thus my colony was in a manner
+settled as follows: The Spaniards possessed my original habitation, which
+was the capital city, and extended their plantations all along the side
+of the brook, which made the creek that I have so often described, as far
+as my bower; and as they increased their culture, it went always
+eastward.  The English lived in the north-east part, where Will Atkins
+and his comrades began, and came on southward and south-west, towards the
+back part of the Spaniards; and every plantation had a great addition of
+land to take in, if they found occasion, so that they need not jostle one
+another for want of room.  All the east end of the island was left
+uninhabited, that if any of the savages should come on shore there only
+for their customary barbarities, they might come and go; if they
+disturbed nobody, nobody would disturb them: and no doubt but they were
+often ashore, and went away again; for I never heard that the planters
+were ever attacked or disturbed any more.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII--SAILS FROM THE ISLAND FOR THE BRAZILS
+
+
+It now came into my thoughts that I had hinted to my friend the clergyman
+that the work of converting the savages might perhaps be set on foot in
+his absence to his satisfaction, and I told him that now I thought that
+it was put in a fair way; for the savages, being thus divided among the
+Christians, if they would but every one of them do their part with those
+which came under their hands, I hoped it might have a very good effect.
+
+He agreed presently in that, if they did their part.  "But how," says he,
+"shall we obtain that of them?"  I told him we would call them all
+together, and leave it in charge with them, or go to them, one by one,
+which he thought best; so we divided it--he to speak to the Spaniards,
+who were all Papists, and I to speak to the English, who were all
+Protestants; and we recommended it earnestly to them, and made them
+promise that they would never make any distinction of Papist or
+Protestant in their exhorting the savages to turn Christians, but teach
+them the general knowledge of the true God, and of their Saviour Jesus
+Christ; and they likewise promised us that they would never have any
+differences or disputes one with another about religion.
+
+When I came to Will Atkins's house, I found that the young woman I have
+mentioned above, and Will Atkins's wife, were become intimates; and this
+prudent, religious young woman had perfected the work Will Atkins had
+begun; and though it was not above four days after what I have related,
+yet the new-baptized savage woman was made such a Christian as I have
+seldom heard of in all my observation or conversation in the world.  It
+came next into my mind, in the morning before I went to them, that
+amongst all the needful things I had to leave with them I had not left
+them a Bible, in which I showed myself less considering for them than my
+good friend the widow was for me when she sent me the cargo of a hundred
+pounds from Lisbon, where she packed up three Bibles and a Prayer-book.
+However, the good woman's charity had a greater extent than ever she
+imagined, for they were reserved for the comfort and instruction of those
+that made much better use of them than I had done.
+
+I took one of the Bibles in my pocket, and when I came to Will Atkins's
+tent, or house, and found the young woman and Atkins's baptized wife had
+been discoursing of religion together--for Will Atkins told it me with a
+great deal of joy--I asked if they were together now, and he said, "Yes";
+so I went into the house, and he with me, and we found them together very
+earnest in discourse.  "Oh, sir," says Will Atkins, "when God has sinners
+to reconcile to Himself, and aliens to bring home, He never wants a
+messenger; my wife has got a new instructor: I knew I was unworthy, as I
+was incapable of that work; that young woman has been sent hither from
+heaven--she is enough to convert a whole island of savages."  The young
+woman blushed, and rose up to go away, but I desired her to sit-still; I
+told her she had a good work upon her hands, and I hoped God would bless
+her in it.
+
+We talked a little, and I did not perceive that they had any book among
+them, though I did not ask; but I put my hand into my pocket, and pulled
+out my Bible.  "Here," said I to Atkins, "I have brought you an assistant
+that perhaps you had not before."  The man was so confounded that he was
+not able to speak for some time; but, recovering himself, he takes it
+with both his hands, and turning to his wife, "Here, my dear," says he,
+"did not I tell you our God, though He lives above, could hear what we
+have said?  Here's the book I prayed for when you and I kneeled down
+under the bush; now God has heard us and sent it."  When he had said so,
+the man fell into such passionate transports, that between the joy of
+having it, and giving God thanks for it, the tears ran down his face like
+a child that was crying.
+
+The woman was surprised, and was like to have run into a mistake that
+none of us were aware of; for she firmly believed God had sent the book
+upon her husband's petition.  It is true that providentially it was so,
+and might be taken so in a consequent sense; but I believe it would have
+been no difficult matter at that time to have persuaded the poor woman to
+have believed that an express messenger came from heaven on purpose to
+bring that individual book.  But it was too serious a matter to suffer
+any delusion to take place, so I turned to the young woman, and told her
+we did not desire to impose upon the new convert in her first and more
+ignorant understanding of things, and begged her to explain to her that
+God may be very properly said to answer our petitions, when, in the
+course of His providence, such things are in a particular manner brought
+to pass as we petitioned for; but we did not expect returns from heaven
+in a miraculous and particular manner, and it is a mercy that it is not
+so.
+
+This the young woman did afterwards effectually, so that there was no
+priestcraft used here; and I should have thought it one of the most
+unjustifiable frauds in the world to have had it so.  But the effect upon
+Will Atkins is really not to be expressed; and there, we may be sure, was
+no delusion.  Sure no man was ever more thankful in the world for
+anything of its kind than he was for the Bible, nor, I believe, never any
+man was glad of a Bible from a better principle; and though he had been a
+most profligate creature, headstrong, furious, and desperately wicked,
+yet this man is a standing rule to us all for the well instructing
+children, viz. that parents should never give over to teach and instruct,
+nor ever despair of the success of their endeavours, let the children be
+ever so refractory, or to appearance insensible to instruction; for if
+ever God in His providence touches the conscience of such, the force of
+their education turns upon them, and the early instruction of parents is
+not lost, though it may have been many years laid asleep, but some time
+or other they may find the benefit of it.  Thus it was with this poor
+man: however ignorant he was of religion and Christian knowledge, he
+found he had some to do with now more ignorant than himself, and that the
+least part of the instruction of his good father that now came to his
+mind was of use to him.
+
+Among the rest, it occurred to him, he said, how his father used to
+insist so much on the inexpressible value of the Bible, and the privilege
+and blessing of it to nations, families, and persons; but he never
+entertained the least notion of the worth of it till now, when, being to
+talk to heathens, savages, and barbarians, he wanted the help of the
+written oracle for his assistance.  The young woman was glad of it also
+for the present occasion, though she had one, and so had the youth, on
+board our ship among their goods, which were not yet brought on shore.
+And now, having said so many things of this young woman, I cannot omit
+telling one story more of her and myself, which has something in it very
+instructive and remarkable.
+
+I have related to what extremity the poor young woman was reduced; how
+her mistress was starved to death, and died on board that unhappy ship we
+met at sea, and how the whole ship's company was reduced to the last
+extremity.  The gentlewoman, and her son, and this maid, were first
+hardly used as to provisions, and at last totally neglected and
+starved--that is to say, brought to the last extremity of hunger.  One
+day, being discoursing with her on the extremities they suffered, I asked
+her if she could describe, by what she had felt, what it was to starve,
+and how it appeared?  She said she believed she could, and told her tale
+very distinctly thus:--
+
+"First, we had for some days fared exceedingly hard, and suffered very
+great hunger; but at last we were wholly without food of any kind except
+sugar, and a little wine and water.  The first day after I had received
+no food at all, I found myself towards evening, empty and sick at the
+stomach, and nearer night much inclined to yawning and sleep.  I lay down
+on the couch in the great cabin to sleep, and slept about three hours,
+and awaked a little refreshed, having taken a glass of wine when I lay
+down; after being about three hours awake, it being about five o'clock in
+the morning, I found myself empty, and my stomach sickish, and lay down
+again, but could not sleep at all, being very faint and ill; and thus I
+continued all the second day with a strange variety--first hungry, then
+sick again, with retchings to vomit.  The second night, being obliged to
+go to bed again without any food more than a draught of fresh water, and
+being asleep, I dreamed I was at Barbadoes, and that the market was
+mightily stocked with provisions; that I bought some for my mistress, and
+went and dined very heartily.  I thought my stomach was full after this,
+as it would have been after a good dinner; but when I awaked I was
+exceedingly sunk in my spirits to find myself in the extremity of family.
+The last glass of wine we had I drank, and put sugar in it, because of
+its having some spirit to supply nourishment; but there being no
+substance in the stomach for the digesting office to work upon, I found
+the only effect of the wine was to raise disagreeable fumes from the
+stomach into the head; and I lay, as they told me, stupid and senseless,
+as one drunk, for some time.  The third day, in the morning, after a
+night of strange, confused, and inconsistent dreams, and rather dozing
+than sleeping, I awaked ravenous and furious with hunger; and I question,
+had not my understanding returned and conquered it, whether if I had been
+a mother, and had had a little child with me, its life would have been
+safe or not.  This lasted about three hours, during which time I was
+twice raging mad as any creature in Bedlam, as my young master told me,
+and as he can now inform you.
+
+"In one of these fits of lunacy or distraction I fell down and struck my
+face against the corner of a pallet-bed, in which my mistress lay, and
+with the blow the blood gushed out of my nose; and the cabin-boy bringing
+me a little basin, I sat down and bled into it a great deal; and as the
+blood came from me I came to myself, and the violence of the flame or
+fever I was in abated, and so did the ravenous part of the hunger.  Then
+I grew sick, and retched to vomit, but could not, for I had nothing in my
+stomach to bring up.  After I had bled some time I swooned, and they all
+believed I was dead; but I came to myself soon after, and then had a most
+dreadful pain in my stomach not to be described--not like the colic, but
+a gnawing, eager pain for food; and towards night it went off with a kind
+of earnest wishing or longing for food.  I took another draught of water
+with sugar in it; but my stomach loathed the sugar and brought it all up
+again; then I took a draught of water without sugar, and that stayed with
+me; and I laid me down upon the bed, praying most heartily that it would
+please God to take me away; and composing my mind in hopes of it, I
+slumbered a while, and then waking, thought myself dying, being light
+with vapours from an empty stomach.  I recommended my soul then to God,
+and then earnestly wished that somebody would throw me into the into the
+sea.
+
+"All this while my mistress lay by me, just, as I thought, expiring, but
+she bore it with much more patience than I, and gave the last bit of
+bread she had left to her child, my young master, who would not have
+taken it, but she obliged him to eat it; and I believe it saved his life.
+Towards the morning I slept again, and when I awoke I fell into a violent
+passion of crying, and after that had a second fit of violent hunger.  I
+got up ravenous, and in a most dreadful condition; and once or twice I
+was going to bite my own arm.  At last I saw the basin in which was the
+blood I had bled at my nose the day before: I ran to it, and swallowed it
+with such haste, and such a greedy appetite, as if I wondered nobody had
+taken it before, and afraid it should be taken from me now.  After it was
+down, though the thoughts of it filled me with horror, yet it checked the
+fit of hunger, and I took another draught of water, and was composed and
+refreshed for some hours after.  This was the fourth day; and this I kept
+up till towards night, when, within the compass of three hours, I had all
+the several circumstances over again, one after another, viz. sick,
+sleepy, eagerly hungry, pain in the stomach, then ravenous again, then
+sick, then lunatic, then crying, then ravenous again, and so every
+quarter of an hour, and my strength wasted exceedingly; at night I lay me
+down, having no comfort but in the hope that I should die before morning.
+
+"All this night I had no sleep; but the hunger was now turned into a
+disease; and I had a terrible colic and griping, by wind instead of food
+having found its way into the bowels; and in this condition I lay till
+morning, when I was surprised by the cries and lamentations of my young
+master, who called out to me that his mother was dead.  I lifted myself
+up a little, for I had not strength to rise, but found she was not dead,
+though she was able to give very little signs of life.  I had then such
+convulsions in my stomach, for want of some sustenance, as I cannot
+describe; with such frequent throes and pangs of appetite as nothing but
+the tortures of death can imitate; and in this condition I was when I
+heard the seamen above cry out, 'A sail! a sail!' and halloo and jump
+about as if they were distracted.  I was not able to get off from the
+bed, and my mistress much less; and my young master was so sick that I
+thought he had been expiring; so we could not open the cabin door, or get
+any account what it was that occasioned such confusion; nor had we had
+any conversation with the ship's company for twelve days, they having
+told us that they had not a mouthful of anything to eat in the ship; and
+this they told us afterwards--they thought we had been dead.  It was this
+dreadful condition we were in when you were sent to save our lives; and
+how you found us, sir, you know as well as I, and better too."
+
+This was her own relation, and is such a distinct account of starving to
+death, as, I confess, I never met with, and was exceeding instructive to
+me.  I am the rather apt to believe it to be a true account, because the
+youth gave me an account of a good part of it; though I must own, not so
+distinct and so feeling as the maid; and the rather, because it seems his
+mother fed him at the price of her own life: but the poor maid, whose
+constitution was stronger than that of her mistress, who was in years,
+and a weakly woman too, might struggle harder with it; nevertheless she
+might be supposed to feel the extremity something sooner than her
+mistress, who might be allowed to keep the last bit something longer than
+she parted with any to relieve her maid.  No question, as the case is
+here related, if our ship or some other had not so providentially met
+them, but a few days more would have ended all their lives.  I now return
+to my disposition of things among the people.  And, first, it is to be
+observed here, that for many reasons I did not think fit to let them know
+anything of the sloop I had framed, and which I thought of setting up
+among them; for I found, at least at my first coming, such seeds of
+division among them, that I saw plainly, had I set up the sloop, and left
+it among them, they would, upon every light disgust, have separated, and
+gone away from one another; or perhaps have turned pirates, and so made
+the island a den of thieves, instead of a plantation of sober and
+religious people, as I intended it; nor did I leave the two pieces of
+brass cannon that I had on board, or the extra two quarter-deck guns that
+my nephew had provided, for the same reason.  I thought it was enough to
+qualify them for a defensive war against any that should invade them, but
+not to set them up for an offensive war, or to go abroad to attack
+others; which, in the end, would only bring ruin and destruction upon
+them.  I reserved the sloop, therefore, and the guns, for their service
+another way, as I shall observe in its place.
+
+Having now done with the island, I left them all in good circumstances
+and in a flourishing condition, and went on board my ship again on the
+6th of May, having been about twenty-five days among them: and as they
+were all resolved to stay upon the island till I came to remove them, I
+promised to send them further relief from the Brazils, if I could
+possibly find an opportunity.  I particularly promised to send them some
+cattle, such as sheep, hogs, and cows: as to the two cows and calves
+which I brought from England, we had been obliged, by the length of our
+voyage, to kill them at sea, for want of hay to feed them.
+
+The next day, giving them a salute of five guns at parting, we set sail,
+and arrived at the bay of All Saints in the Brazils in about twenty-two
+days, meeting nothing remarkable in our passage but this: that about
+three days after we had sailed, being becalmed, and the current setting
+strong to the ENE., running, as it were, into a bay or gulf on the land
+side, we were driven something out of our course, and once or twice our
+men cried out, "Land to the eastward!" but whether it was the continent
+or islands we could not tell by any means.  But the third day, towards
+evening, the sea smooth, and the weather calm, we saw the sea as it were
+covered towards the land with something very black; not being able to
+discover what it was till after some time, our chief mate, going up the
+main shrouds a little way, and looking at them with a perspective, cried
+out it was an army.  I could not imagine what he meant by an army, and
+thwarted him a little hastily.  "Nay, sir," says he, "don't be angry, for
+'tis an army, and a fleet too: for I believe there are a thousand canoes,
+and you may see them paddle along, for they are coming towards us apace."
+
+I was a little surprised then, indeed, and so was my nephew the captain;
+for he had heard such terrible stories of them in the island, and having
+never been in those seas before, that he could not tell what to think of
+it, but said, two or three times, we should all be devoured.  I must
+confess, considering we were becalmed, and the current set strong towards
+the shore, I liked it the worse; however, I bade them not be afraid, but
+bring the ship to an anchor as soon as we came so near as to know that we
+must engage them.  The weather continued calm, and they came on apace
+towards us, so I gave orders to come to an anchor, and furl all our
+sails; as for the savages, I told them they had nothing to fear but fire,
+and therefore they should get their boats out, and fasten them, one close
+by the head and the other by the stern, and man them both well, and wait
+the issue in that posture: this I did, that the men in the boats might he
+ready with sheets and buckets to put out any fire these savages might
+endeavour to fix to the outside of the ship.
+
+In this posture we lay by for them, and in a little while they came up
+with us; but never was such a horrid sight seen by Christians; though my
+mate was much mistaken in his calculation of their number, yet when they
+came up we reckoned about a hundred and twenty-six canoes; some of them
+had sixteen or seventeen men in them, and some more, and the least six or
+seven.  When they came nearer to us, they seemed to be struck with wonder
+and astonishment, as at a sight which doubtless they had never seen
+before; nor could they at first, as we afterwards understood, know what
+to make of us; they came boldly up, however, very near to us, and seemed
+to go about to row round us; but we called to our men in the boats not to
+let them come too near them.  This very order brought us to an engagement
+with them, without our designing it; for five or six of the large canoes
+came so near our long-boat, that our men beckoned with their hands to
+keep them back, which they understood very well, and went back: but at
+their retreat about fifty arrows came on board us from those boats, and
+one of our men in the long-boat was very much wounded.  However, I called
+to them not to fire by any means; but we handed down some deal boards
+into the boat, and the carpenter presently set up a kind of fence, like
+waste boards, to cover them from the arrows of the savages, if they
+should shoot again.
+
+About half-an-hour afterwards they all came up in a body astern of us,
+and so near that we could easily discern what they were, though we could
+not tell their design; and I easily found they were some of my old
+friends, the same sort of savages that I had been used to engage with.  In
+a short time more they rowed a little farther out to sea, till they came
+directly broadside with us, and then rowed down straight upon us, till
+they came so near that they could hear us speak; upon this, I ordered all
+my men to keep close, lest they should shoot any more arrows, and made
+all our guns ready; but being so near as to be within hearing, I made
+Friday go out upon the deck, and call out aloud to them in his language,
+to know what they meant.  Whether they understood him or not, that I knew
+not; but as soon as he had called to them, six of them, who were in the
+foremost or nighest boat to us, turned their canoes from us, and stooping
+down, showed us their naked backs; whether this was a defiance or
+challenge we knew not, or whether it was done in mere contempt, or as a
+signal to the rest; but immediately Friday cried out they were going to
+shoot, and, unhappily for him, poor fellow, they let fly about three
+hundred of their arrows, and to my inexpressible grief, killed poor
+Friday, no other man being in their sight.  The poor fellow was shot with
+no less than three arrows, and about three more fell very near him; such
+unlucky marksmen they were!
+
+I was so annoyed at the loss of my old trusty servant and companion, that
+I immediately ordered five guns to be loaded with small shot, and four
+with great, and gave them such a broadside as they had never heard in
+their lives before.  They were not above half a cable's length off when
+we fired; and our gunners took their aim so well, that three or four of
+their canoes were overset, as we had reason to believe, by one shot only.
+The ill manners of turning up their bare backs to us gave us no great
+offence; neither did I know for certain whether that which would pass for
+the greatest contempt among us might be understood so by them or not;
+therefore, in return, I had only resolved to have fired four or five guns
+at them with powder only, which I knew would frighten them sufficiently:
+but when they shot at us directly with all the fury they were capable of,
+and especially as they had killed my poor Friday, whom I so entirely
+loved and valued, and who, indeed, so well deserved it, I thought myself
+not only justifiable before God and man, but would have been very glad if
+I could have overset every canoe there, and drowned every one of them.
+
+I can neither tell how many we killed nor how many we wounded at this
+broadside, but sure such a fright and hurry never were seen among such a
+multitude; there were thirteen or fourteen of their canoes split and
+overset in all, and the men all set a-swimming: the rest, frightened out
+of their wits, scoured away as fast as they could, taking but little care
+to save those whose boats were split or spoiled with our shot; so I
+suppose that many of them were lost; and our men took up one poor fellow
+swimming for his life, above an hour after they were all gone.  The small
+shot from our cannon must needs kill and wound a great many; but, in
+short, we never knew how it went with them, for they fled so fast, that
+in three hours or thereabouts we could not see above three or four
+straggling canoes, nor did we ever see the rest any more; for a breeze of
+wind springing up the same evening, we weighed and set sail for the
+Brazils.
+
+We had a prisoner, indeed, but the creature was so sullen that he would
+neither cat nor speak, and we all fancied he would starve himself to
+death.  But I took a way to cure him: for I had made them take him and
+turn him into the long-boat, and make him believe they would toss him
+into the sea again, and so leave him where they found him, if he would
+not speak; nor would that do, but they really did throw him into the sea,
+and came away from him.  Then he followed them, for he swam like a cork,
+and called to them in his tongue, though they knew not one word of what
+he said; however at last they took him in again, and then he began to be
+more tractable: nor did I ever design they should drown him.
+
+We were now under sail again, but I was the most disconsolate creature
+alive for want of my man Friday, and would have been very glad to have
+gone back to the island, to have taken one of the rest from thence for my
+occasion, but it could not be: so we went on.  We had one prisoner, as I
+have said, and it was a long time before we could make him understand
+anything; but in time our men taught him some English, and he began to be
+a little tractable.  Afterwards, we inquired what country he came from;
+but could make nothing of what he said; for his speech was so odd, all
+gutturals, and he spoke in the throat in such a hollow, odd manner, that
+we could never form a word after him; and we were all of opinion that
+they might speak that language as well if they were gagged as otherwise;
+nor could we perceive that they had any occasion either for teeth,
+tongue, lips, or palate, but formed their words just as a hunting-horn
+forms a tune with an open throat.  He told us, however, some time after,
+when we had taught him to speak a little English, that they were going
+with their kings to fight a great battle.  When he said kings, we asked
+him how many kings?  He said they were five nation (we could not make him
+understand the plural 's), and that they all joined to go against two
+nation.  We asked him what made them come up to us?  He said, "To makee
+te great wonder look."  Here it is to be observed that all those natives,
+as also those of Africa when they learn English, always add two e's at
+the end of the words where we use one; and they place the accent upon
+them, as makee, takee, and the like; nay, I could hardly make Friday
+leave it off, though at last he did.
+
+And now I name the poor fellow once more, I must take my last leave of
+him.  Poor honest Friday!  We buried him with all the decency and
+solemnity possible, by putting him into a coffin, and throwing him into
+the sea; and I caused them to fire eleven guns for him.  So ended the
+life of the most grateful, faithful, honest, and most affectionate
+servant that ever man had.
+
+We went now away with a fair wind for Brazil; and in about twelve days'
+time we made land, in the latitude of five degrees south of the line,
+being the north-easternmost land of all that part of America.  We kept on
+S. by E., in sight of the shore four days, when we made Cape St.
+Augustine, and in three days came to an anchor off the bay of All Saints,
+the old place of my deliverance, from whence came both my good and evil
+fate.  Never ship came to this port that had less business than I had,
+and yet it was with great difficulty that we were admitted to hold the
+least correspondence on shore: not my partner himself, who was alive, and
+made a great figure among them, not my two merchant-trustees, not the
+fame of my wonderful preservation in the island, could obtain me that
+favour.  My partner, however, remembering that I had given five hundred
+moidores to the prior of the monastery of the Augustines, and two hundred
+and seventy-two to the poor, went to the monastery, and obliged the prior
+that then was to go to the governor, and get leave for me personally,
+with the captain and one more, besides eight seamen, to come on shore,
+and no more; and this upon condition, absolutely capitulated for, that we
+should not offer to land any goods out of the ship, or to carry any
+person away without licence.  They were so strict with us as to landing
+any goods, that it was with extreme difficulty that I got on shore three
+bales of English goods, such as fine broadcloths, stuffs, and some linen,
+which I had brought for a present to my partner.
+
+He was a very generous, open-hearted man, although he began, like me,
+with little at first.  Though he knew not that I had the least design of
+giving him anything, he sent me on board a present of fresh provisions,
+wine, and sweetmeats, worth about thirty moidores, including some
+tobacco, and three or four fine medals of gold: but I was even with him
+in my present, which, as I have said, consisted of fine broadcloth,
+English stuffs, lace, and fine holland; also, I delivered him about the
+value of one hundred pounds sterling in the same goods, for other uses;
+and I obliged him to set up the sloop, which I had brought with me from
+England, as I have said, for the use of my colony, in order to send the
+refreshments I intended to my plantation.
+
+Accordingly, he got hands, and finished the sloop in a very few days, for
+she was already framed; and I gave the master of her such instructions
+that he could not miss the place; nor did he, as I had an account from my
+partner afterwards.  I got him soon loaded with the small cargo I sent
+them; and one of our seamen, that had been on shore with me there,
+offered to go with the sloop and settle there, upon my letter to the
+governor Spaniard to allot him a sufficient quantity of land for a
+plantation, and on my giving him some clothes and tools for his planting
+work, which he said he understood, having been an old planter at
+Maryland, and a buccaneer into the bargain.  I encouraged the fellow by
+granting all he desired; and, as an addition, I gave him the savage whom
+we had taken prisoner of war to be his slave, and ordered the governor
+Spaniard to give him his share of everything he wanted with the rest.
+
+When we came to fit this man out, my old partner told me there was a
+certain very honest fellow, a Brazil planter of his acquaintance, who had
+fallen into the displeasure of the Church.  "I know not what the matter
+is with him," says he, "but, on my conscience, I think he is a heretic in
+his heart, and he has been obliged to conceal himself for fear of the
+Inquisition." He then told me that he would be very glad of such an
+opportunity to make his escape, with his wife and two daughters; and if I
+would let them go to my island, and allot them a plantation, he would
+give them a small stock to begin with--for the officers of the
+Inquisition had seized all his effects and estate, and he had nothing
+left but a little household stuff and two slaves; "and," adds he, "though
+I hate his principles, yet I would not have him fall into their hands,
+for he will be assuredly burned alive if he does."  I granted this
+presently, and joined my Englishman with them; and we concealed the man,
+and his wife and daughters, on board our ship, till the sloop put out to
+go to sea; and then having put all their goods on board some time before,
+we put them on board the sloop after she was got out of the bay.  Our
+seaman was mightily pleased with this new partner; and their stocks,
+indeed, were much alike, rich in tools, in preparations, and a farm--but
+nothing to begin with, except as above: however, they carried over with
+them what was worth all the rest, some materials for planting
+sugar-canes, with some plants of canes, which he, I mean the Brazil
+planter, understood very well.
+
+Among the rest of the supplies sent to my tenants in the island, I sent
+them by the sloop three milch cows and five calves; about twenty-two
+hogs, among them three sows; two mares, and a stone-horse.  For my
+Spaniards, according to my promise, I engaged three Brazil women to go,
+and recommended it to them to marry them, and use them kindly.  I could
+have procured more women, but I remembered that the poor persecuted man
+had two daughters, and that there were but five of the Spaniards that
+wanted partners; the rest had wives of their own, though in another
+country.  All this cargo arrived safe, and, as you may easily suppose,
+was very welcome to my old inhabitants, who were now, with this addition,
+between sixty and seventy people, besides little children, of which there
+were a great many.  I found letters at London from them all, by way of
+Lisbon, when I came back to England.
+
+I have now done with the island, and all manner of discourse about it:
+and whoever reads the rest of my memorandums would do well to turn his
+thoughts entirely from it, and expect to read of the follies of an old
+man, not warned by his own harms, much less by those of other men, to
+beware; not cooled by almost forty years' miseries and
+disappointments--not satisfied with prosperity beyond expectation, nor
+made cautious by afflictions and distress beyond example.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX--DREADFUL OCCURRENCES IN MADAGASCAR
+
+
+I had no more business to go to the East Indies than a man at full
+liberty has to go to the turnkey at Newgate, and desire him to lock him
+up among the prisoners there, and starve him.  Had I taken a small vessel
+from England and gone directly to the island; had I loaded her, as I did
+the other vessel, with all the necessaries for the plantation and for my
+people; taken a patent from the government here to have secured my
+property, in subjection only to that of England; had I carried over
+cannon and ammunition, servants and people to plant, and taken possession
+of the place, fortified and strengthened it in the name of England, and
+increased it with people, as I might easily have done; had I then settled
+myself there, and sent the ship back laden with good rice, as I might
+also have done in six months' time, and ordered my friends to have fitted
+her out again for our supply--had I done this, and stayed there myself, I
+had at least acted like a man of common sense.  But I was possessed of a
+wandering spirit, and scorned all advantages: I pleased myself with being
+the patron of the people I placed there, and doing for them in a kind of
+haughty, majestic way, like an old patriarchal monarch, providing for
+them as if I had been father of the whole family, as well as of the
+plantation.  But I never so much as pretended to plant in the name of any
+government or nation, or to acknowledge any prince, or to call my people
+subjects to any one nation more than another; nay, I never so much as
+gave the place a name, but left it as I found it, belonging to nobody,
+and the people under no discipline or government but my own, who, though
+I had influence over them as a father and benefactor, had no authority or
+power to act or command one way or other, further than voluntary consent
+moved them to comply.  Yet even this, had I stayed there, would have done
+well enough; but as I rambled from them, and came there no more, the last
+letters I had from any of them were by my partner's means, who afterwards
+sent another sloop to the place, and who sent me word, though I had not
+the letter till I got to London, several years after it was written, that
+they went on but poorly; were discontented with their long stay there;
+that Will Atkins was dead; that five of the Spaniards were come away; and
+though they had not been much molested by the savages, yet they had had
+some skirmishes with them; and that they begged of him to write to me to
+think of the promise I had made to fetch them away, that they might see
+their country again before they died.
+
+But I was gone a wildgoose chase indeed, and they that will have any more
+of me must be content to follow me into a new variety of follies,
+hardships, and wild adventures, wherein the justice of Providence may be
+duly observed; and we may see how easily Heaven can gorge us with our own
+desires, make the strongest of our wishes be our affliction, and punish
+us most severely with those very things which we think it would be our
+utmost happiness to be allowed to possess.  Whether I had business or no
+business, away I went: it is no time now to enlarge upon the reason or
+absurdity of my own conduct, but to come to the history--I was embarked
+for the voyage, and the voyage I went.
+
+I shall only add a word or two concerning my honest Popish clergyman, for
+let their opinion of us, and all other heretics in general, as they call
+us, be as uncharitable as it may, I verily believe this man was very
+sincere, and wished the good of all men: yet I believe he used reserve in
+many of his expressions, to prevent giving me offence; for I scarce heard
+him once call on the Blessed Virgin, or mention St. Jago, or his guardian
+angel, though so common with the rest of them.  However, I say I had not
+the least doubt of his sincerity and pious intentions; and I am firmly of
+opinion, if the rest of the Popish missionaries were like him, they would
+strive to visit even the poor Tartars and Laplanders, where they have
+nothing to give them, as well as covet to flock to India, Persia, China,
+&c., the most wealthy of the heathen countries; for if they expected to
+bring no gains to their Church by it, it may well be admired how they
+came to admit the Chinese Confucius into the calendar of the Christian
+saints.
+
+A ship being ready to sail for Lisbon, my pious priest asked me leave to
+go thither; being still, as he observed, bound never to finish any voyage
+he began.  How happy it had been for me if I had gone with him.  But it
+was too late now; all things Heaven appoints for the best: had I gone
+with him I had never had so many things to be thankful for, and the
+reader had never heard of the second part of the travels and adventures
+of Robinson Crusoe: so I must here leave exclaiming at myself, and go on
+with my voyage.  From the Brazils we made directly over the Atlantic Sea
+to the Cape of Good Hope, and had a tolerably good voyage, our course
+generally south-east, now and then a storm, and some contrary winds; but
+my disasters at sea were at an end--my future rubs and cross events were
+to befall me on shore, that it might appear the land was as well prepared
+to be our scourge as the sea.
+
+Our ship was on a trading voyage, and had a supercargo on board, who was
+to direct all her motions after she arrived at the Cape, only being
+limited to a certain number of days for stay, by charter-party, at the
+several ports she was to go to.  This was none of my business, neither
+did I meddle with it; my nephew, the captain, and the supercargo
+adjusting all those things between them as they thought fit.  We stayed
+at the Cape no longer than was needful to take in-fresh water, but made
+the best of our way for the coast of Coromandel.  We were, indeed,
+informed that a French man-of-war, of fifty guns, and two large merchant
+ships, were gone for the Indies; and as I knew we were at war with
+France, I had some apprehensions of them; but they went their own way,
+and we heard no more of them.
+
+I shall not pester the reader with a tedious description of places,
+journals of our voyage, variations of the compass, latitudes,
+trade-winds, &c.; it is enough to name the ports and places which we
+touched at, and what occurred to us upon our passages from one to
+another.  We touched first at the island of Madagascar, where, though the
+people are fierce and treacherous, and very well armed with lances and
+bows, which they use with inconceivable dexterity, yet we fared very well
+with them a while.  They treated us very civilly; and for some trifles
+which we gave them, such as knives, scissors, &c., they brought us eleven
+good fat bullocks, of a middling size, which we took in, partly for fresh
+provisions for our present spending, and the rest to salt for the ship's
+use.
+
+We were obliged to stay here some time after we had furnished ourselves
+with provisions; and I, who was always too curious to look into every
+nook of the world wherever I came, went on shore as often as I could.  It
+was on the east side of the island that we went on shore one evening: and
+the people, who, by the way, are very numerous, came thronging about us,
+and stood gazing at us at a distance.  As we had traded freely with them,
+and had been kindly used, we thought ourselves in no danger; but when we
+saw the people, we cut three boughs out of a tree, and stuck them up at a
+distance from us; which, it seems, is a mark in that country not only of
+a truce and friendship, but when it is accepted the other side set up
+three poles or boughs, which is a signal that they accept the truce too;
+but then this is a known condition of the truce, that you are not to pass
+beyond their three poles towards them, nor they to come past your three
+poles or boughs towards you; so that you are perfectly secure within the
+three poles, and all the space between your poles and theirs is allowed
+like a market for free converse, traffic, and commerce.  When you go
+there you must not carry your weapons with you; and if they come into
+that space they stick up their javelins and lances all at the first
+poles, and come on unarmed; but if any violence is offered them, and the
+truce thereby broken, away they run to the poles, and lay hold of their
+weapons, and the truce is at an end.
+
+It happened one evening, when we went on shore, that a greater number of
+their people came down than usual, but all very friendly and civil; and
+they brought several kinds of provisions, for which we satisfied them
+with such toys as we had; the women also brought us milk and roots, and
+several things very acceptable to us, and all was quiet; and we made us a
+little tent or hut of some boughs or trees, and lay on shore all night.  I
+know not what was the occasion, but I was not so well satisfied to lie on
+shore as the rest; and the boat riding at an anchor at about a stone's
+cast from the land, with two men in her to take care of her, I made one
+of them come on shore; and getting some boughs of trees to cover us also
+in the boat, I spread the sail on the bottom of the boat, and lay under
+the cover of the branches of the trees all night in the boat.
+
+About two o'clock in the morning we heard one of our men making a
+terrible noise on the shore, calling out, for God's sake, to bring the
+boat in and come and help them, for they were all like to be murdered;
+and at the same time I heard the fire of five muskets, which was the
+number of guns they had, and that three times over; for it seems the
+natives here were not so easily frightened with guns as the savages were
+in America, where I had to do with them.  All this while, I knew not what
+was the matter, but rousing immediately from sleep with the noise, I
+caused the boat to be thrust in, and resolved with three fusees we had on
+board to land and assist our men.  We got the boat soon to the shore, but
+our men were in too much haste; for being come to the shore, they plunged
+into the water, to get to the boat with all the expedition they could,
+being pursued by between three and four hundred men.  Our men were but
+nine in all, and only five of them had fusees with them; the rest had
+pistols and swords, indeed, but they were of small use to them.
+
+We took up seven of our men, and with difficulty enough too, three of
+them being very ill wounded; and that which was still worse was, that
+while we stood in the boat to take our men in, we were in as much danger
+as they were in on shore; for they poured their arrows in upon us so
+thick that we were glad to barricade the side of the boat up with the
+benches, and two or three loose boards which, to our great satisfaction,
+we had by mere accident in the boat.  And yet, had it been daylight, they
+are, it seems, such exact marksmen, that if they could have seen but the
+least part of any of us, they would have been sure of us.  We had, by the
+light of the moon, a little sight of them, as they stood pelting us from
+the shore with darts and arrows; and having got ready our firearms, we
+gave them a volley that we could hear, by the cries of some of them, had
+wounded several; however, they stood thus in battle array on the shore
+till break of day, which we supposed was that they might see the better
+to take their aim at us.
+
+In this condition we lay, and could not tell how to weigh our anchor, or
+set up our sail, because we must needs stand up in the boat, and they
+were as sure to hit us as we were to hit a bird in a tree with small
+shot.  We made signals of distress to the ship, and though she rode a
+league off, yet my nephew, the captain, hearing our firing, and by
+glasses perceiving the posture we lay in, and that we fired towards the
+shore, pretty well understood us; and weighing anchor with all speed, he
+stood as near the shore as he durst with the ship, and then sent another
+boat with ten hands in her, to assist us.  We called to them not to come
+too near, telling them what condition we were in; however, they stood in
+near to us, and one of the men taking the end of a tow-line in his hand,
+and keeping our boat between him and the enemy, so that they could not
+perfectly see him, swam on board us, and made fast the line to the boat:
+upon which we slipped out a little cable, and leaving our anchor behind,
+they towed us out of reach of the arrows; we all the while lying close
+behind the barricade we had made.  As soon as we were got from between
+the ship and the shore, that we could lay her side to the shore, she ran
+along just by them, and poured in a broadside among them, loaded with
+pieces of iron and lead, small bullets, and such stuff, besides the great
+shot, which made a terrible havoc among them.
+
+When we were got on board and out of danger, we had time to examine into
+the occasion of this fray; and indeed our supercargo, who had been often
+in those parts, put me upon it; for he said he was sure the inhabitants
+would not have touched us after we had made a truce, if we had not done
+something to provoke them to it.  At length it came out that an old
+woman, who had come to sell us some milk, had brought it within our
+poles, and a young woman with her, who also brought us some roots or
+herbs; and while the old woman (whether she was mother to the young woman
+or no they could not tell) was selling us the milk, one of our men
+offered some rudeness to the girl that was with her, at which the old
+woman made a great noise: however, the seaman would not quit his prize,
+but carried her out of the old woman's sight among the trees, it being
+almost dark; the old woman went away without her, and, as we may suppose,
+made an outcry among the people she came from; who, upon notice, raised
+that great army upon us in three or four hours, and it was great odds but
+we had all been destroyed.
+
+One of our men was killed with a lance thrown at him just at the
+beginning of the attack, as he sallied out of the tent they had made; the
+rest came off free, all but the fellow who was the occasion of all the
+mischief, who paid dear enough for his brutality, for we could not hear
+what became of him for a great while.  We lay upon the shore two days
+after, though the wind presented, and made signals for him, and made our
+boat sail up shore and down shore several leagues, but in vain; so we
+were obliged to give him over; and if he alone had suffered for it, the
+loss had been less.  I could not satisfy myself, however, without
+venturing on shore once more, to try if I could learn anything of him or
+them; it was the third night after the action that I had a great mind to
+learn, if I could by any means, what mischief we had done, and how the
+game stood on the Indians' side.  I was careful to do it in the dark,
+lest we should be attacked again: but I ought indeed to have been sure
+that the men I went with had been under my command, before I engaged in a
+thing so hazardous and mischievous as I was brought into by it, without
+design.
+
+We took twenty as stout fellows with us as any in the ship, besides the
+supercargo and myself, and we landed two hours before midnight, at the
+same place where the Indians stood drawn up in the evening before.  I
+landed here, because my design, as I have said, was chiefly to see if
+they had quitted the field, and if they had left any marks behind them of
+the mischief we had done them, and I thought if we could surprise one or
+two of them, perhaps we might get our man again, by way of exchange.
+
+We landed without any noise, and divided our men into two bodies, whereof
+the boatswain commanded one and I the other.  We neither saw nor heard
+anybody stir when we landed: and we marched up, one body at a distance
+from another, to the place.  At first we could see nothing, it being very
+dark; till by-and-by our boatswain, who led the first party, stumbled and
+fell over a dead body.  This made them halt a while; for knowing by the
+circumstances that they were at the place where the Indians had stood,
+they waited for my coming up there.  We concluded to halt till the moon
+began to rise, which we knew would be in less than an hour, when we could
+easily discern the havoc we had made among them.  We told thirty-two
+bodies upon the ground, whereof two were not quite dead; some had an arm
+and some a leg shot off, and one his head; those that were wounded, we
+supposed, they had carried away.  When we had made, as I thought, a full
+discovery of all we could come to the knowledge of, I resolved on going
+on board; but the boatswain and his party sent me word that they were
+resolved to make a visit to the Indian town, where these dogs, as they
+called them, dwelt, and asked me to go along with them; and if they could
+find them, as they still fancied they should, they did not doubt of
+getting a good booty; and it might be they might find Tom Jeffry there:
+that was the man's name we had lost.
+
+Had they sent to ask my leave to go, I knew well enough what answer to
+have given them; for I should have commanded them instantly on board,
+knowing it was not a hazard fit for us to run, who had a ship and ship-
+loading in our charge, and a voyage to make which depended very much upon
+the lives of the men; but as they sent me word they were resolved to go,
+and only asked me and my company to go along with them, I positively
+refused it, and rose up, for I was sitting on the ground, in order to go
+to the boat.  One or two of the men began to importune me to go; and when
+I refused, began to grumble, and say they were not under my command, and
+they would go.  "Come, Jack," says one of the men, "will you go with me?
+I'll go for one."  Jack said he would--and then another--and, in a word,
+they all left me but one, whom I persuaded to stay, and a boy left in the
+boat.  So the supercargo and I, with the third man, went back to the
+boat, where we told them we would stay for them, and take care to take in
+as many of them as should be left; for I told them it was a mad thing
+they were going about, and supposed most of them would have the fate of
+Tom Jeffry.
+
+They told me, like seamen, they would warrant it they would come off
+again, and they would take care, &c.; so away they went.  I entreated
+them to consider the ship and the voyage, that their lives were not their
+own, and that they were entrusted with the voyage, in some measure; that
+if they miscarried, the ship might be lost for want of their help, and
+that they could not answer for it to God or man.  But I might as well
+have talked to the mainmast of the ship: they were mad upon their
+journey; only they gave me good words, and begged I would not be angry;
+that they did not doubt but they would be back again in about an hour at
+furthest; for the Indian town, they said, was not above half-a mile off,
+though they found it above two miles before they got to it.
+
+Well, they all went away, and though the attempt was desperate, and such
+as none but madmen would have gone about, yet, to give them their due,
+they went about it as warily as boldly; they were gallantly armed, for
+they had every man a fusee or musket, a bayonet, and a pistol; some of
+them had broad cutlasses, some of them had hangers, and the boatswain and
+two more had poleaxes; besides all which they had among them thirteen
+hand grenadoes.  Bolder fellows, and better provided, never went about
+any wicked work in the world.  When they went out their chief design was
+plunder, and they were in mighty hopes of finding gold there; but a
+circumstance which none of them were aware of set them on fire with
+revenge, and made devils of them all.
+
+When they came to the few Indian houses which they thought had been the
+town, which was not above half a mile off, they were under great
+disappointment, for there were not above twelve or thirteen houses, and
+where the town was, or how big, they knew not.  They consulted,
+therefore, what to do, and were some time before they could resolve; for
+if they fell upon these, they must cut all their throats; and it was ten
+to one but some of them might escape, it being in the night, though the
+moon was up; and if one escaped, he would run and raise all the town, so
+they should have a whole army upon them; on the other hand, if they went
+away and left those untouched, for the people were all asleep, they could
+not tell which way to look for the town; however, the last was the best
+advice, so they resolved to leave them, and look for the town as well as
+they could.  They went on a little way, and found a cow tied to a tree;
+this, they presently concluded, would be a good guide to them; for, they
+said, the cow certainly belonged to the town before them, or the town
+behind them, and if they untied her, they should see which way she went:
+if she went back, they had nothing to say to her; but if she went
+forward, they would follow her.  So they cut the cord, which was made of
+twisted flags, and the cow went on before them, directly to the town;
+which, as they reported, consisted of above two hundred houses or huts,
+and in some of these they found several families living together.
+
+Here they found all in silence, as profoundly secure as sleep could make
+them: and first, they called another council, to consider what they had
+to do; and presently resolved to divide themselves into three bodies, and
+so set three houses on fire in three parts of the town; and as the men
+came out, to seize them and bind them (if any resisted, they need not be
+asked what to do then), and so to search the rest of the houses for
+plunder: but they resolved to march silently first through the town, and
+see what dimensions it was of, and if they might venture upon it or no.
+
+They did so, and desperately resolved that they would venture upon them:
+but while they were animating one another to the work, three of them, who
+were a little before the rest, called out aloud to them, and told them
+that they had found--Tom Jeffry: they all ran up to the place, where they
+found the poor fellow hanging up naked by one arm, and his throat cut.
+There was an Indian house just by the tree, where they found sixteen or
+seventeen of the principal Indians, who had been concerned in the fray
+with us before, and two or three of them wounded with our shot; and our
+men found they were awake, and talking one to another in that house, but
+knew not their number.
+
+The sight of their poor mangled comrade so enraged them, as before, that
+they swore to one another that they would be revenged, and that not an
+Indian that came into their hands should have any quarter; and to work
+they went immediately, and yet not so madly as might be expected from the
+rage and fury they were in.  Their first care was to get something that
+would soon take fire, but, after a little search, they found that would
+be to no purpose; for most of the houses were low, and thatched with
+flags and rushes, of which the country is full; so they presently made
+some wildfire, as we call it, by wetting a little powder in the palm of
+their hands, and in a quarter of an hour they set the town on fire in
+four or five places, and particularly that house where the Indians were
+not gone to bed.
+
+As soon as the fire begun to blaze, the poor frightened creatures began
+to rush out to save their lives, but met with their fate in the attempt;
+and especially at the door, where they drove them back, the boatswain
+himself killing one or two with his poleaxe.  The house being large, and
+many in it, he did not care to go in, but called for a hand grenado, and
+threw it among them, which at first frightened them, but, when it burst,
+made such havoc among them that they cried out in a hideous manner.  In
+short, most of the Indians who were in the open part of the house were
+killed or hurt with the grenado, except two or three more who pressed to
+the door, which the boatswain and two more kept, with their bayonets on
+the muzzles of their pieces, and despatched all that came in their way;
+but there was another apartment in the house, where the prince or king,
+or whatever he was, and several others were; and these were kept in till
+the house, which was by this time all in a light flame, fell in upon
+them, and they were smothered together.
+
+All this while they fired not a gun, because they would not waken the
+people faster than they could master them; but the fire began to waken
+them fast enough, and our fellows were glad to keep a little together in
+bodies; for the fire grew so raging, all the houses being made of light
+combustible stuff, that they could hardly bear the street between them.
+Their business was to follow the fire, for the surer execution: as fast
+as the fire either forced the people out of those houses which were
+burning, or frightened them out of others, our people were ready at their
+doors to knock them on the head, still calling and hallooing one to
+another to remember Tom Jeffry.
+
+While this was doing, I must confess I was very uneasy, and especially
+when I saw the flames of the town, which, it being night, seemed to be
+close by me.  My nephew, the captain, who was roused by his men seeing
+such a fire, was very uneasy, not knowing what the matter was, or what
+danger I was in, especially hearing the guns too, for by this time they
+began to use their firearms; a thousand thoughts oppressed his mind
+concerning me and the supercargo, what would become of us; and at last,
+though he could ill spare any more men, yet not knowing what exigence we
+might be in, he took another boat, and with thirteen men and himself came
+ashore to me.
+
+He was surprised to see me and the supercargo in the boat with no more
+than two men; and though he was glad that we were well, yet he was in the
+same impatience with us to know what was doing; for the noise continued,
+and the flame increased; in short, it was next to an impossibility for
+any men in the world to restrain their curiosity to know what had
+happened, or their concern for the safety of the men: in a word, the
+captain told me he would go and help his men, let what would come.  I
+argued with him, as I did before with the men, the safety of the ship,
+the danger of the voyage, the interests of the owners and merchants, &c.,
+and told him I and the two men would go, and only see if we could at a
+distance learn what was likely to be the event, and come back and tell
+him.  It was in vain to talk to my nephew, as it was to talk to the rest
+before; he would go, he said; and he only wished he had left but ten men
+in the ship, for he could not think of having his men lost for want of
+help: he had rather lose the ship, the voyage, and his life, and all; and
+away he went.
+
+I was no more able to stay behind now than I was to persuade them not to
+go; so the captain ordered two men to row back the pinnace, and fetch
+twelve men more, leaving the long-boat at an anchor; and that, when they
+came back, six men should keep the two boats, and six more come after us;
+so that he left only sixteen men in the ship: for the whole ship's
+company consisted of sixty-five men, whereof two were lost in the late
+quarrel which brought this mischief on.
+
+Being now on the march, we felt little of the ground we trod on; and
+being guided by the fire, we kept no path, but went directly to the place
+of the flame.  If the noise of the guns was surprising to us before, the
+cries of the poor people were now quite of another nature, and filled us
+with horror.  I must confess I was never at the sacking a city, or at the
+taking a town by storm.  I had heard of Oliver Cromwell taking Drogheda,
+in Ireland, and killing man, woman, and child; and I had read of Count
+Tilly sacking the city of Magdeburg and cutting the throats of twenty-two
+thousand of all sexes; but I never had an idea of the thing itself
+before, nor is it possible to describe it, or the horror that was upon
+our minds at hearing it.  However, we went on, and at length came to the
+town, though there was no entering the streets of it for the fire.  The
+first object we met with was the ruins of a hut or house, or rather the
+ashes of it, for the house was consumed; and just before it, plainly now
+to be seen by the light of the fire, lay four men and three women,
+killed, and, as we thought, one or two more lay in the heap among the
+fire; in short, there were such instances of rage, altogether barbarous,
+and of a fury something beyond what was human, that we thought it
+impossible our men could be guilty of it; or, if they were the authors of
+it, we thought they ought to be every one of them put to the worst of
+deaths.  But this was not all: we saw the fire increase forward, and the
+cry went on just as the fire went on; so that we were in the utmost
+confusion.  We advanced a little way farther, and behold, to our
+astonishment, three naked women, and crying in a most dreadful manner,
+came flying as if they had wings, and after them sixteen or seventeen
+men, natives, in the same terror and consternation, with three of our
+English butchers in the rear, who, when they could not overtake them,
+fired in among them, and one that was killed by their shot fell down in
+our sight.  When the rest saw us, believing us to be their enemies, and
+that we would murder them as well as those that pursued them, they set up
+a most dreadful shriek, especially the women; and two of them fell down,
+as if already dead, with the fright.
+
+My very soul shrunk within me, and my blood ran chill in my veins, when I
+saw this; and, I believe, had the three English sailors that pursued them
+come on, I had made our men kill them all; however, we took some means to
+let the poor flying creatures know that we would not hurt them; and
+immediately they came up to us, and kneeling down, with their hands
+lifted up, made piteous lamentation to us to save them, which we let them
+know we would: whereupon they crept all together in a huddle close behind
+us, as for protection.  I left my men drawn up together, and, charging
+them to hurt nobody, but, if possible, to get at some of our people, and
+see what devil it was possessed them, and what they intended to do, and
+to command them off; assuring them that if they stayed till daylight they
+would have a hundred thousand men about their ears: I say I left them,
+and went among those flying people, taking only two of our men with me;
+and there was, indeed, a piteous spectacle among them.  Some of them had
+their feet terribly burned with trampling and running through the fire;
+others their hands burned; one of the women had fallen down in the fire,
+and was very much burned before she could get out again; and two or three
+of the men had cuts in their backs and thighs, from our men pursuing; and
+another was shot through the body and died while I was there.
+
+I would fain have learned what the occasion of all this was; but I could
+not understand one word they said; though, by signs, I perceived some of
+them knew not what was the occasion themselves.  I was so terrified in my
+thoughts at this outrageous attempt that I could not stay there, but went
+back to my own men, and resolved to go into the middle of the town,
+through the fire, or whatever might be in the way, and put an end to it,
+cost what it would; accordingly, as I came back to my men, I told them my
+resolution, and commanded them to follow me, when, at the very moment,
+came four of our men, with the boatswain at their head, roving over heaps
+of bodies they had killed, all covered with blood and dust, as if they
+wanted more people to massacre, when our men hallooed to them as loud as
+they could halloo; and with much ado one of them made them hear, so that
+they knew who we were, and came up to us.
+
+As soon as the boatswain saw us, he set up a halloo like a shout of
+triumph, for having, as he thought, more help come; and without waiting
+to hear me, "Captain," says he, "noble captain!  I am glad you are come;
+we have not half done yet.  Villainous hell-hound dogs!  I'll kill as
+many of them as poor Tom has hairs upon his head: we have sworn to spare
+none of them; we'll root out the very nation of them from the earth;" and
+thus he ran on, out of breath, too, with action, and would not give us
+leave to speak a word.  At last, raising my voice that I might silence
+him a little, "Barbarous dog!" said I, "what are you doing!  I won't have
+one creature touched more, upon pain of death; I charge you, upon your
+life, to stop your hands, and stand still here, or you are a dead man
+this minute."--"Why, sir," says he, "do you know what you do, or what
+they have done?  If you want a reason for what we have done, come
+hither;" and with that he showed me the poor fellow hanging, with his
+throat cut.
+
+I confess I was urged then myself, and at another time would have been
+forward enough; but I thought they had carried their rage too far, and
+remembered Jacob's words to his sons Simeon and Levi: "Cursed be their
+anger, for it was fierce; and their wrath, for it was cruel."  But I had
+now a new task upon my hands; for when the men I had carried with me saw
+the sight, as I had done, I had as much to do to restrain them as I
+should have had with the others; nay, my nephew himself fell in with
+them, and told me, in their hearing, that he was only concerned for fear
+of the men being overpowered; and as to the people, he thought not one of
+them ought to live; for they had all glutted themselves with the murder
+of the poor man, and that they ought to be used like murderers.  Upon
+these words, away ran eight of my men, with the boatswain and his crew,
+to complete their bloody work; and I, seeing it quite out of my power to
+restrain them, came away pensive and sad; for I could not bear the sight,
+much less the horrible noise and cries of the poor wretches that fell
+into their hands.
+
+I got nobody to come back with me but the supercargo and two men, and
+with these walked back to the boat.  It was a very great piece of folly
+in me, I confess, to venture back, as it were, alone; for as it began now
+to be almost day, and the alarm had run over the country, there stood
+about forty men armed with lances and boughs at the little place where
+the twelve or thirteen houses stood, mentioned before: but by accident I
+missed the place, and came directly to the seaside, and by the time I got
+to the seaside it was broad day: immediately I took the pinnace and went
+on board, and sent her back to assist the men in what might happen.  I
+observed, about the time that I came to the boat-side, that the fire was
+pretty well out, and the noise abated; but in about half-an-hour after I
+got on board, I heard a volley of our men's firearms, and saw a great
+smoke.  This, as I understood afterwards, was our men falling upon the
+men, who, as I said, stood at the few houses on the way, of whom they
+killed sixteen or seventeen, and set all the houses on fire, but did not
+meddle with the women or children.
+
+By the time the men got to the shore again with the pinnace our men began
+to appear; they came dropping in, not in two bodies as they went, but
+straggling here and there in such a manner, that a small force of
+resolute men might have cut them all off.  But the dread of them was upon
+the whole country; and the men were surprised, and so frightened, that I
+believe a hundred of them would have fled at the sight of but five of our
+men.  Nor in all this terrible action was there a man that made any
+considerable defence: they were so surprised between the terror of the
+fire and the sudden attack of our men in the dark, that they knew not
+which way to turn themselves; for if they fled one way they were met by
+one party, if back again by another, so that they were everywhere knocked
+down; nor did any of our men receive the least hurt, except one that
+sprained his foot, and another that had one of his hands burned.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X--HE IS LEFT ON SHORE
+
+
+I was very angry with my nephew, the captain, and indeed with all the
+men, but with him in particular, as well for his acting so out of his
+duty as a commander of the ship, and having the charge of the voyage upon
+him, as in his prompting, rather than cooling, the rage of his blind men
+in so bloody and cruel an enterprise.  My nephew answered me very
+respectfully, but told me that when he saw the body of the poor seaman
+whom they had murdered in so cruel and barbarous a manner, he was not
+master of himself, neither could he govern his passion; he owned he
+should not have done so, as he was commander of the ship; but as he was a
+man, and nature moved him, he could not bear it.  As for the rest of the
+men, they were not subject to me at all, and they knew it well enough; so
+they took no notice of my dislike.  The next day we set sail, so we never
+heard any more of it.  Our men differed in the account of the number they
+had killed; but according to the best of their accounts, put all
+together, they killed or destroyed about one hundred and fifty people,
+men, women, and children, and left not a house standing in the town.  As
+for the poor fellow Tom Jeffry, as he was quite dead (for his throat was
+so cut that his head was half off), it would do him no service to bring
+him away; so they only took him down from the tree, where he was hanging
+by one hand.
+
+However just our men thought this action, I was against them in it, and I
+always, after that time, told them God would blast the voyage; for I
+looked upon all the blood they shed that night to be murder in them.  For
+though it is true that they had killed Tom Jeffry, yet Jeffry was the
+aggressor, had broken the truce, and had ill-used a young woman of
+theirs, who came down to them innocently, and on the faith of the public
+capitulation.
+
+The boatswain defended this quarrel when we were afterwards on board.  He
+said it was true that we seemed to break the truce, but really had not;
+and that the war was begun the night before by the natives themselves,
+who had shot at us, and killed one of our men without any just
+provocation; so that as we were in a capacity to fight them now, we might
+also be in a capacity to do ourselves justice upon them in an
+extraordinary manner; that though the poor man had taken a little liberty
+with the girl, he ought not to have been murdered, and that in such a
+villainous manner: and that they did nothing but what was just and what
+the laws of God allowed to be done to murderers.  One would think this
+should have been enough to have warned us against going on shore amongst
+the heathens and barbarians; but it is impossible to make mankind wise
+but at their own expense, and their experience seems to be always of most
+use to them when it is dearest bought.
+
+We were now bound to the Gulf of Persia, and from thence to the coast of
+Coromandel, only to touch at Surat; but the chief of the supercargo's
+design lay at the Bay of Bengal, where, if he missed his business outward-
+bound, he was to go out to China, and return to the coast as he came
+home.  The first disaster that befell us was in the Gulf of Persia, where
+five of our men, venturing on shore on the Arabian side of the gulf, were
+surrounded by the Arabians, and either all killed or carried away into
+slavery; the rest of the boat's crew were not able to rescue them, and
+had but just time to get off their boat.  I began to upbraid them with
+the just retribution of Heaven in this case; but the boatswain very
+warmly told me, he thought I went further in my censures than I could
+show any warrant for in Scripture; and referred to Luke xiii. 4, where
+our Saviour intimates that those men on whom the Tower of Siloam fell
+were not sinners above all the Galileans; but that which put me to
+silence in the case was, that not one of these five men who were now lost
+were of those who went on shore to the massacre of Madagascar, so I
+always called it, though our men could not bear to hear the word
+_massacre_ with any patience.
+
+But my frequent preaching to them on this subject had worse consequences
+than I expected; and the boatswain, who had been the head of the attempt,
+came up boldly to me one time, and told me he found that I brought that
+affair continually upon the stage; that I made unjust reflections upon
+it, and had used the men very ill on that account, and himself in
+particular; that as I was but a passenger, and had no command in the
+ship, or concern in the voyage, they were not obliged to bear it; that
+they did not know but I might have some ill-design in my head, and
+perhaps to call them to an account for it when they came to England; and
+that, therefore, unless I would resolve to have done with it, and also
+not to concern myself any further with him, or any of his affairs, he
+would leave the ship; for he did not think it safe to sail with me among
+them.
+
+I heard him patiently enough till he had done, and then told him that I
+confessed I had all along opposed the massacre of Madagascar, and that I
+had, on all occasions, spoken my mind freely about it, though not more
+upon him than any of the rest; that as to having no command in the ship,
+that was true; nor did I exercise any authority, only took the liberty of
+speaking my mind in things which publicly concerned us all; and what
+concern I had in the voyage was none of his business; that I was a
+considerable owner in the ship.  In that claim I conceived I had a right
+to speak even further than I had done, and would not be accountable to
+him or any one else, and began to be a little warm with him.  He made but
+little reply to me at that time, and I thought the affair had been over.
+We were at this time in the road at Bengal; and being willing to see the
+place, I went on shore with the supercargo in the ship's boat to divert
+myself; and towards evening was preparing to go on board, when one of the
+men came to me, and told me he would not have me trouble myself to come
+down to the boat, for they had orders not to carry me on board any more.
+Any one may guess what a surprise I was in at so insolent a message; and
+I asked the man who bade him deliver that message to me?  He told me the
+coxswain.
+
+I immediately found out the supercargo, and told him the story, adding
+that I foresaw there would be a mutiny in the ship; and entreated him to
+go immediately on board and acquaint the captain of it.  But I might have
+spared this intelligence, for before I had spoken to him on shore the
+matter was effected on board.  The boatswain, the gunner, the carpenter,
+and all the inferior officers, as soon as I was gone off in the boat,
+came up, and desired to speak with the captain; and then the boatswain,
+making a long harangue, and repeating all he had said to me, told the
+captain that as I was now gone peaceably on shore, they were loath to use
+any violence with me, which, if I had not gone on shore, they would
+otherwise have done, to oblige me to have gone.  They therefore thought
+fit to tell him that as they shipped themselves to serve in the ship
+under his command, they would perform it well and faithfully; but if I
+would not quit the ship, or the captain oblige me to quit it, they would
+all leave the ship, and sail no further with him; and at that word _all_
+he turned his face towards the main-mast, which was, it seems, a signal
+agreed on, when the seamen, being got together there, cried out, "_One
+and all_! _one and all_!"
+
+My nephew, the captain, was a man of spirit, and of great presence of
+mind; and though he was surprised, yet he told them calmly that he would
+consider of the matter, but that he could do nothing in it till he had
+spoken to me about it.  He used some arguments with them, to show them
+the unreasonableness and injustice of the thing, but it was all in vain;
+they swore, and shook hands round before his face, that they would all go
+on shore unless he would engage to them not to suffer me to come any more
+on board the ship.
+
+This was a hard article upon him, who knew his obligation to me, and did
+not know how I might take it.  So he began to talk smartly to them; told
+them that I was a very considerable owner of the ship, and that if ever
+they came to England again it would cost them very dear; that the ship
+was mine, and that he could not put me out of it; and that he would
+rather lose the ship, and the voyage too, than disoblige me so much: so
+they might do as they pleased.  However, he would go on shore and talk
+with me, and invited the boatswain to go with him, and perhaps they might
+accommodate the matter with me.  But they all rejected the proposal, and
+said they would have nothing to do with me any more; and if I came on
+board they would all go on shore.  "Well," said the captain, "if you are
+all of this mind, let me go on shore and talk with him."  So away he came
+to me with this account, a little after the message had been brought to
+me from the coxswain.
+
+I was very glad to see my nephew, I must confess; for I was not without
+apprehensions that they would confine him by violence, set sail, and run
+away with the ship; and then I had been stripped naked in a remote
+country, having nothing to help myself; in short, I had been in a worse
+case than when I was alone in the island.  But they had not come to that
+length, it seems, to my satisfaction; and when my nephew told me what
+they had said to him, and how they had sworn and shook hands that they
+would, one and all, leave the ship if I was suffered to come on board, I
+told him he should not be concerned at it at all, for I would stay on
+shore.  I only desired he would take care and send me all my necessary
+things on shore, and leave me a sufficient sum of money, and I would find
+my way to England as well as I could.  This was a heavy piece of news to
+my nephew, but there was no way to help it but to comply; so, in short,
+he went on board the ship again, and satisfied the men that his uncle had
+yielded to their importunity, and had sent for his goods from on board
+the ship; so that the matter was over in a few hours, the men returned to
+their duty, and I began to consider what course I should steer.
+
+I was now alone in a most remote part of the world, for I was near three
+thousand leagues by sea farther off from England than I was at my island;
+only, it is true, I might travel here by land over the Great Mogul's
+country to Surat, might go from thence to Bassora by sea, up the Gulf of
+Persia, and take the way of the caravans, over the desert of Arabia, to
+Aleppo and Scanderoon; from thence by sea again to Italy, and so overland
+into France.  I had another way before me, which was to wait for some
+English ships, which were coming to Bengal from Achin, on the island of
+Sumatra, and get passage on board them from England.  But as I came
+hither without any concern with the East Indian Company, so it would be
+difficult to go from hence without their licence, unless with great
+favour of the captains of the ships, or the company's factors: and to
+both I was an utter stranger.
+
+Here I had the mortification to see the ship set sail without me;
+however, my nephew left me two servants, or rather one companion and one
+servant; the first was clerk to the purser, whom he engaged to go with
+me, and the other was his own servant.  I then took a good lodging in the
+house of an Englishwoman, where several merchants lodged, some French,
+two Italians, or rather Jews, and one Englishman.  Here I stayed above
+nine months, considering what course to take.  I had some English goods
+with me of value, and a considerable sum of money; my nephew furnishing
+me with a thousand pieces of eight, and a letter of credit for more if I
+had occasion, that I might not be straitened, whatever might happen.  I
+quickly disposed of my goods to advantage; and, as I originally intended,
+I bought here some very good diamonds, which, of all other things, were
+the most proper for me in my present circumstances, because I could
+always carry my whole estate about me.
+
+During my stay here many proposals were made for my return to England,
+but none falling out to my mind, the English merchant who lodged with me,
+and whom I had contracted an intimate acquaintance with, came to me one
+morning, saying: "Countryman, I have a project to communicate, which, as
+it suits with my thoughts, may, for aught I know, suit with yours also,
+when you shall have thoroughly considered it.  Here we are posted, you by
+accident and I by my own choice, in a part of the world very remote from
+our own country; but it is in a country where, by us who understand trade
+and business, a great deal of money is to be got.  If you will put one
+thousand pounds to my one thousand pounds, we will hire a ship here, the
+first we can get to our minds.  You shall be captain, I'll be merchant,
+and we'll go a trading voyage to China; for what should we stand still
+for?  The whole world is in motion; why should we be idle?"
+
+I liked this proposal very well; and the more so because it seemed to be
+expressed with so much goodwill.  In my loose, unhinged circumstances, I
+was the fitter to embrace a proposal for trade, or indeed anything else.
+I might perhaps say with some truth, that if trade was not my element,
+rambling was; and no proposal for seeing any part of the world which I
+had never seen before could possibly come amiss to me.  It was, however,
+some time before we could get a ship to our minds, and when we had got a
+vessel, it was not easy to get English sailors--that is to say, so many
+as were necessary to govern the voyage and manage the sailors which we
+should pick up there.  After some time we got a mate, a boatswain, and a
+gunner, English; a Dutch carpenter, and three foremast men.  With these
+we found we could do well enough, having Indian seamen, such as they
+were, to make up.
+
+When all was ready we set sail for Achin, in the island of Sumatra, and
+from thence to Siam, where we exchanged some of our wares for opium and
+some arrack; the first a commodity which bears a great price among the
+Chinese, and which at that time was much wanted there.  Then we went up
+to Saskan, were eight months out, and on our return to Bengal I was very
+well satisfied with my adventure.  Our people in England often admire how
+officers, which the company send into India, and the merchants which
+generally stay there, get such very great estates as they do, and
+sometimes come home worth sixty or seventy thousand pounds at a time; but
+it is little matter for wonder, when we consider the innumerable ports
+and places where they have a free commerce; indeed, at the ports where
+the English ships come there is such great and constant demands for the
+growth of all other countries, that there is a certain vent for the
+returns, as well as a market abroad for the goods carried out.
+
+I got so much money by my first adventure, and such an insight into the
+method of getting more, that had I been twenty years younger, I should
+have been tempted to have stayed here, and sought no farther for making
+my fortune; but what was all this to a man upwards of threescore, that
+was rich enough, and came abroad more in obedience to a restless desire
+of seeing the world than a covetous desire of gaining by it?  A restless
+desire it really was, for when I was at home I was restless to go abroad;
+and when I was abroad I was restless to be at home.  I say, what was this
+gain to me?  I was rich enough already, nor had I any uneasy desires
+about getting more money; therefore the profit of the voyage to me was of
+no great force for the prompting me forward to further undertakings.
+Hence, I thought that by this voyage I had made no progress at all,
+because I was come back, as I might call it, to the place from whence I
+came, as to a home: whereas, my eye, like that which Solomon speaks of,
+was never satisfied with seeing.  I was come into a part of the world
+which I was never in before, and that part, in particular, which I heard
+much of, and was resolved to see as much of it as I could: and then I
+thought I might say I had seen all the world that was worth seeing.
+
+But my fellow-traveller and I had different notions: I acknowledge his
+were the more suited to the end of a merchant's life: who, when he is
+abroad upon adventures, is wise to stick to that, as the best thing for
+him, which he is likely to get the most money by.  On the other hand,
+mine was the notion of a mad, rambling boy, that never cares to see a
+thing twice over.  But this was not all: I had a kind of impatience upon
+me to be nearer home, and yet an unsettled resolution which way to go.  In
+the interval of these consultations, my friend, who was always upon the
+search for business, proposed another voyage among the Spice Islands, to
+bring home a loading of cloves from the Manillas, or thereabouts.
+
+We were not long in preparing for this voyage; the chief difficulty was
+in bringing me to come into it.  However, at last, nothing else offering,
+and as sitting still, to me especially, was the unhappiest part of life,
+I resolved on this voyage too, which we made very successfully, touching
+at Borneo and several other islands, and came home in about five months,
+when we sold our spices, with very great profit, to the Persian
+merchants, who carried them away to the Gulf.  My friend, when we made up
+this account, smiled at me: "Well, now," said he, with a sort of friendly
+rebuke on my indolent temper, "is not this better than walking about
+here, like a man with nothing to do, and spending our time in staring at
+the nonsense and ignorance of the Pagans?"--"Why, truly," said I, "my
+friend, I think it is, and I begin to be a convert to the principles of
+merchandising; but I must tell you, by the way, you do not know what I am
+doing; for if I once conquer my backwardness, and embark heartily, old as
+I am, I shall harass you up and down the world till I tire you; for I
+shall pursue it so eagerly, I shall never let you lie still."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI--WARNED OF DANGER BY A COUNTRYMAN
+
+
+A little while after this there came in a Dutch ship from Batavia; she
+was a coaster, not an European trader, of about two hundred tons burden;
+the men, as they pretended, having been so sickly that the captain had
+not hands enough to go to sea with, so he lay by at Bengal; and having,
+it seems, got money enough, or being willing, for other reasons, to go
+for Europe, he gave public notice he would sell his ship.  This came to
+my ears before my new partner heard of it, and I had a great mind to buy
+it; so I went to him and told him of it.  He considered a while, for he
+was no rash man neither; and at last replied, "She is a little too
+big--however, we will have her."  Accordingly, we bought the ship, and
+agreeing with the master, we paid for her, and took possession.  When we
+had done so we resolved to engage the men, if we could, to join with
+those we had, for the pursuing our business; but, on a sudden, they
+having received not their wages, but their share of the money, as we
+afterwards learned, not one of them was to be found; we inquired much
+about them, and at length were told that they were all gone together by
+land to Agra, the great city of the Mogul's residence, to proceed from
+thence to Surat, and then go by sea to the Gulf of Persia.
+
+Nothing had so much troubled me a good while as that I should miss the
+opportunity of going with them; for such a ramble, I thought, and in such
+company as would both have guarded and diverted me, would have suited
+mightily with my great design; and I should have both seen the world and
+gone homeward too.  But I was much better satisfied a few days after,
+when I came to know what sort of fellows they were; for, in short, their
+history was, that this man they called captain was the gunner only, not
+the commander; that they had been a trading voyage, in which they had
+been attacked on shore by some of the Malays, who had killed the captain
+and three of his men; and that after the captain was killed, these men,
+eleven in number, having resolved to run away with the ship, brought her
+to Bengal, leaving the mate and five men more on shore.
+
+Well, let them get the ship how they would, we came honestly by her, as
+we thought, though we did not, I confess, examine into things so exactly
+as we ought; for we never inquired anything of the seamen, who would
+certainly have faltered in their account, and contradicted one another.
+Somehow or other we should have had reason to have suspected, them; but
+the man showed us a bill of sale for the ship, to one Emanuel
+Clostershoven, or some such name, for I suppose it was all a forgery, and
+called himself by that name, and we could not contradict him: and withal,
+having no suspicion of the thing, we went through with our bargain.  We
+picked up some more English sailors here after this, and some Dutch, and
+now we resolved on a second voyage to the south-east for cloves, &c.--that
+is to say, among the Philippine and Malacca isles.  In short, not to fill
+up this part of my story with trifles when what is to come is so
+remarkable, I spent, from first to last, six years in this country,
+trading from port to port, backward and forward, and with very good
+success, and was now the last year with my new partner, going in the ship
+above mentioned, on a voyage to China, but designing first to go to Siam
+to buy rice.
+
+In this voyage, being by contrary winds obliged to beat up and down a
+great while in the Straits of Malacca and among the islands, we were no
+sooner got clear of those difficult seas than we found our ship had
+sprung a leak, but could not discover where it was.  This forced us to
+make some port; and my partner, who knew the country better than I did,
+directed the captain to put into the river of Cambodia; for I had made
+the English mate, one Mr. Thompson, captain, not being willing to take
+the charge of the ship upon myself.  This river lies on the north side of
+the great bay or gulf which goes up to Siam.  While we were here, and
+going often on shore for refreshment, there comes to me one day an
+Englishman, a gunner's mate on board an English East India ship, then
+riding in the same river.  "Sir," says he, addressing me, "you are a
+stranger to me, and I to you; but I have something to tell you that very
+nearly concerns you.  I am moved by the imminent danger you are in, and,
+for aught I see, you have no knowledge of it."--"I know no danger I am
+in," said I, "but that my ship is leaky, and I cannot find it out; but I
+intend to lay her aground to-morrow, to see if I can find it."--"But,
+sir," says he, "leaky or not leaky, you will be wiser than to lay your
+ship on shore to-morrow when you hear what I have to say to you.  Do you
+know, sir," said he, "the town of Cambodia lies about fifteen leagues up
+the river; and there are two large English ships about five leagues on
+this side, and three Dutch?"--"Well," said I, "and what is that to
+me?"--"Why, sir," said be, "is it for a man that is upon such adventures
+as you are to come into a port, and not examine first what ships there
+are there, and whether he is able to deal with them?  I suppose you do
+not think you are a match for them?"  I could not conceive what he meant;
+and I turned short upon him, and said: "I wish you would explain
+yourself; I cannot imagine what reason I have to be afraid of any of the
+company's ships, or Dutch ships.  I am no interloper.  What can they have
+to say to me?"--"Well, sir," says he, with a smile, "if you think
+yourself secure you must take your chance; but take my advice, if you do
+not put to sea immediately, you will the very next tide be attacked by
+five longboats full of men, and perhaps if you are taken you will be
+hanged for a pirate, and the particulars be examined afterwards.  I
+thought, sir," added he, "I should have met with a better reception than
+this for doing you a piece of service of such importance."--"I can never
+be ungrateful," said I, "for any service, or to any man that offers me
+any kindness; but it is past my comprehension what they should have such
+a design upon me for: however, since you say there is no time to be lost,
+and that there is some villainous design on hand against me, I will go on
+board this minute, and put to sea immediately, if my men can stop the
+leak; but, sir," said I, "shall I go away ignorant of the cause of all
+this?  Can you give me no further light into it?"
+
+"I can tell you but part of the story, sir," says he; "but I have a Dutch
+seaman here with me, and I believe I could persuade him to tell you the
+rest; but there is scarce time for it.  But the short of the story is
+this--the first part of which I suppose you know well enough--that you
+were with this ship at Sumatra; that there your captain was murdered by
+the Malays, with three of his men; and that you, or some of those that
+were on board with you, ran away with the ship, and are since turned
+pirates.  This is the sum of the story, and you will all be seized as
+pirates, I can assure you, and executed with very little ceremony; for
+you know merchant ships show but little law to pirates if they get them
+into their power."--"Now you speak plain English," said I, "and I thank
+you; and though I know nothing that we have done like what you talk of,
+for I am sure we came honestly and fairly by the ship; yet seeing such a
+work is doing, as you say, and that you seem to mean honestly, I will be
+upon my guard."--"Nay, sir," says he, "do not talk of being upon your
+guard; the best defence is to be out of danger.  If you have any regard
+for your life and the lives of all your men, put to sea without fail at
+high-water; and as you have a whole tide before you, you will be gone too
+far out before they can come down; for they will come away at high-water,
+and as they have twenty miles to come, you will get near two hours of
+them by the difference of the tide, not reckoning the length of the way:
+besides, as they are only boats, and not ships, they will not venture to
+follow you far out to sea, especially if it blows."--"Well," said I, "you
+have been very kind in this: what shall I do to make you amends?"--"Sir,"
+says he, "you may not be willing to make me any amends, because you may
+not be convinced of the truth of it.  I will make an offer to you: I have
+nineteen months' pay due to me on board the ship ---, which I came out of
+England in; and the Dutchman that is with me has seven months' pay due to
+him.  If you will make good our pay to us we will go along with you; if
+you find nothing more in it we will desire no more; but if we do convince
+you that we have saved your lives, and the ship, and the lives of all the
+men in her, we will leave the rest to you."
+
+I consented to this readily, and went immediately on board, and the two
+men with me.  As soon as I came to the ship's side, my partner, who was
+on board, came out on the quarter-deck, and called to me, with a great
+deal of joy, "We have stopped the leak--we have stopped the leak!"--"Say
+you so?" said I; "thank God; but weigh anchor, then,
+immediately."--"Weigh!" says he; "what do you mean by that?  What is the
+matter?"--"Ask no questions," said I; "but set all hands to work, and
+weigh without losing a minute."  He was surprised; however, he called the
+captain, and he immediately ordered the anchor to be got up; and though
+the tide was not quite down, yet a little land-breeze blowing, we stood
+out to sea.  Then I called him into the cabin, and told him the story;
+and we called in the men, and they told us the rest of it; but as it took
+up a great deal of time, before we had done a seaman comes to the cabin
+door, and called out to us that the captain bade him tell us we were
+chased by five sloops, or boats, full of men.  "Very well," said I, "then
+it is apparent there is something in it."  I then ordered all our men to
+be called up, and told them there was a design to seize the ship, and
+take us for pirates, and asked them if they would stand by us, and by one
+another; the men answered cheerfully, one and all, that they would live
+and die with us.  Then I asked the captain what way he thought best for
+us to manage a fight with them; for resist them I was resolved we would,
+and that to the last drop.  He said readily, that the way was to keep
+them off with our great shot as long as we could, and then to use our
+small arms, to keep them from boarding us; but when neither of these
+would do any longer, we would retire to our close quarters, for perhaps
+they had not materials to break open our bulkheads, or get in upon us.
+
+The gunner had in the meantime orders to bring two guns, to bear fore and
+aft, out of the steerage, to clear the deck, and load them with musket-
+bullets, and small pieces of old iron, and what came next to hand.  Thus
+we made ready for fight; but all this while we kept out to sea, with wind
+enough, and could see the boats at a distance, being five large
+longboats, following us with all the sail they could make.
+
+Two of those boats (which by our glasses we could see were English)
+outsailed the rest, were near two leagues ahead of them, and gained upon
+us considerably, so that we found they would come up with us; upon which
+we fired a gun without ball, to intimate that they should bring to: and
+we put out a flag of truce, as a signal for parley: but they came
+crowding after us till within shot, when we took in our white flag, they
+having made no answer to it, and hung out a red flag, and fired at them
+with a shot.  Notwithstanding this, they came on till they were near
+enough to call to them with a speaking-trumpet, bidding them keep off at
+their peril.
+
+It was all one; they crowded after us, and endeavoured to come under our
+stern, so as to board us on our quarter; upon which, seeing they were
+resolute for mischief, and depended upon the strength that followed them,
+I ordered to bring the ship to, so that they lay upon our broadside; when
+immediately we fired five guns at them, one of which had been levelled so
+true as to carry away the stern of the hindermost boat, and we then
+forced them to take down their sail, and to run all to the head of the
+boat, to keep her from sinking; so she lay by, and had enough of it; but
+seeing the foremost boat crowd on after us, we made ready to fire at her
+in particular.  While this was doing one of the three boats that followed
+made up to the boat which we had disabled, to relieve her, and we could
+see her take out the men.  We then called again to the foremost boat, and
+offered a truce, to parley again, and to know what her business was with
+us; but had no answer, only she crowded close under our stern.  Upon
+this, our gunner who was a very dexterous fellow ran out his two case-
+guns, and fired again at her, but the shot missing, the men in the boat
+shouted, waved their caps, and came on.  The gunner, getting quickly
+ready again, fired among them a second time, one shot of which, though it
+missed the boat itself, yet fell in among the men, and we could easily
+see did a great deal of mischief among them.  We now wore the ship again,
+and brought our quarter to bear upon them, and firing three guns more, we
+found the boat was almost split to pieces; in particular, her rudder and
+a piece of her stern were shot quite away; so they handed her sail
+immediately, and were in great disorder.  To complete their misfortune,
+our gunner let fly two guns at them again; where he hit them we could not
+tell, but we found the boat was sinking, and some of the men already in
+the water: upon this, I immediately manned out our pinnace, with orders
+to pick up some of the men if they could, and save them from drowning,
+and immediately come on board ship with them, because we saw the rest of
+the boats began to come up.  Our men in the pinnace followed their
+orders, and took up three men, one of whom was just drowning, and it was
+a good while before we could recover him.  As soon as they were on board
+we crowded all the sail we could make, and stood farther out to the sea;
+and we found that when the other boats came up to the first, they gave
+over their chase.
+
+Being thus delivered from a danger which, though I knew not the reason of
+it, yet seemed to be much greater than I apprehended, I resolved that we
+should change our course, and not let any one know whither we were going;
+so we stood out to sea eastward, quite out of the course of all European
+ships, whether they were bound to China or anywhere else, within the
+commerce of the European nations.  When we were at sea we began to
+consult with the two seamen, and inquire what the meaning of all this
+should be; and the Dutchman confirmed the gunner's story about the false
+sale of the ship and of the murder of the captain, and also how that he,
+this Dutchman, and four more got into the woods, where they wandered
+about a great while, till at length he made his escape, and swam off to a
+Dutch ship, which was sailing near the shore in its way from China.
+
+He then told us that he went to Batavia, where two of the seamen
+belonging to the ship arrived, having deserted the rest in their travels,
+and gave an account that the fellow who had run away with the ship, sold
+her at Bengal to a set of pirates, who were gone a-cruising in her, and
+that they had already taken an English ship and two Dutch ships very
+richly laden.  This latter part we found to concern us directly, though
+we knew it to be false; yet, as my partner said, very justly, if we had
+fallen into their hands, and they had had such a prepossession against us
+beforehand, it had been in vain for us to have defended ourselves, or to
+hope for any good quarter at their hands; especially considering that our
+accusers had been our judges, and that we could have expected nothing
+from them but what rage would have dictated, and an ungoverned passion
+have executed.  Therefore it was his opinion we should go directly back
+to Bengal, from whence we came, without putting in at any port
+whatever--because where we could give a good account of ourselves, could
+prove where we were when the ship put in, of whom we bought her, and the
+like; and what was more than all the rest, if we were put upon the
+necessity of bringing it before the proper judges, we should be sure to
+have some justice, and not to be hanged first and judged afterwards.
+
+I was some time of my partner's opinion; but after a little more serious
+thinking, I told him I thought it was a very great hazard for us to
+attempt returning to Bengal, for that we were on the wrong side of the
+Straits of Malacca, and that if the alarm was given, we should be sure to
+be waylaid on every side--that if we should be taken, as it were, running
+away, we should even condemn ourselves, and there would want no more
+evidence to destroy us.  I also asked the English sailor's opinion, who
+said he was of my mind, and that we certainly should be taken.  This
+danger a little startled my partner and all the ship's company, and we
+immediately resolved to go away to the coast of Tonquin, and so on to the
+coast of China--and pursuing the first design as to trade, find some way
+or other to dispose of the ship, and come back in some of the vessels of
+the country such as we could get.  This was approved of as the best
+method for our security, and accordingly we steered away NNE., keeping
+above fifty leagues off from the usual course to the eastward.  This,
+however, put us to some inconvenience: for, first, the winds, when we
+came that distance from the shore, seemed to be more steadily against us,
+blowing almost trade, as we call it, from the E. and ENE., so that we
+were a long while upon our voyage, and we were but ill provided with
+victuals for so long a run; and what was still worse, there was some
+danger that those English and Dutch ships whose boats pursued us, whereof
+some were bound that way, might have got in before us, and if not, some
+other ship bound to China might have information of us from them, and
+pursue us with the same vigour.
+
+I must confess I was now very uneasy, and thought myself, including the
+late escape from the longboats, to have been in the most dangerous
+condition that ever I was in through my past life; for whatever ill
+circumstances I had been in, I was never pursued for a thief before; nor
+had I ever done anything that merited the name of dishonest or
+fraudulent, much less thievish.  I had chiefly been my own enemy, or, as
+I may rightly say, I had been nobody's enemy but my own; but now I was
+woefully embarrassed: for though I was perfectly innocent, I was in no
+condition to make that innocence appear; and if I had been taken, it had
+been under a supposed guilt of the worst kind.  This made me very anxious
+to make an escape, though which way to do it I knew not, or what port or
+place we could go to.  My partner endeavoured to encourage me by
+describing the several ports of that coast, and told me he would put in
+on the coast of Cochin China, or the bay of Tonquin, intending afterwards
+to go to Macao, where a great many European families resided, and
+particularly the missionary priests, who usually went thither in order to
+their going forward to China.
+
+Hither then we resolved to go; and, accordingly, though after a tedious
+course, and very much straitened for provisions, we came within sight of
+the coast very early in the morning; and upon reflection on the past
+circumstances of danger we were in, we resolved to put into a small
+river, which, however, had depth enough of water for us, and to see if we
+could, either overland or by the ship's pinnace, come to know what ships
+were in any port thereabouts.  This happy step was, indeed, our
+deliverance: for though we did not immediately see any European ships in
+the bay of Tonquin, yet the next morning there came into the bay two
+Dutch ships; and a third without any colours spread out, but which we
+believed to be a Dutchman, passed by at about two leagues' distance,
+steering for the coast of China; and in the afternoon went by two English
+ships steering the same course; and thus we thought we saw ourselves
+beset with enemies both one way and the other.  The place we were in was
+wild and barbarous, the people thieves by occupation; and though it is
+true we had not much to seek of them, and, except getting a few
+provisions, cared not how little we had to do with them, yet it was with
+much difficulty that we kept ourselves from being insulted by them
+several ways.  We were in a small river of this country, within a few
+leagues of its utmost limits northward; and by our boat we coasted north-
+east to the point of land which opens the great bay of Tonquin; and it
+was in this beating up along the shore that we discovered we were
+surrounded with enemies.  The people we were among were the most
+barbarous of all the inhabitants of the coast; and among other customs
+they have this one: that if any vessel has the misfortune to be
+shipwrecked upon their coast, they make the men all prisoners or slaves;
+and it was not long before we found a spice of their kindness this way,
+on the occasion following.
+
+I have observed above that our ship sprung a leak at sea, and that we
+could not find it out; and it happened that, as I have said, it was
+stopped unexpectedly, on the eve of our being pursued by the Dutch and
+English ships in the bay of Siam; yet, as we did not find the ship so
+perfectly tight and sound as we desired, we resolved while we were at
+this place to lay her on shore, and clean her bottom, and, if possible,
+to find out where the leaks were.  Accordingly, having lightened the
+ship, and brought all our guns and other movables to one side, we tried
+to bring her down, that we might come at her bottom; but, on second
+thoughts, we did not care to lay her on dry ground, neither could we find
+out a proper place for it.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII--THE CARPENTER'S WHIMSICAL CONTRIVANCE
+
+
+The inhabitants came wondering down the shore to look at us; and seeing
+the ship lie down on one side in such a manner, and heeling in towards
+the shore, and not seeing our men, who were at work on her bottom with
+stages, and with their boats on the off-side, they presently concluded
+that the ship was cast away, and lay fast on the ground.  On this
+supposition they came about us in two or three hours' time with ten or
+twelve large boats, having some of them eight, some ten men in a boat,
+intending, no doubt, to have come on board and plundered the ship, and if
+they found us there, to have carried us away for slaves.
+
+When they came up to the ship, and began to row round her, they
+discovered us all hard at work on the outside of the ship's bottom and
+side, washing, and graving, and stopping, as every seafaring man knows
+how.  They stood for a while gazing at us, and we, who were a little
+surprised, could not imagine what their design was; but being willing to
+be sure, we took this opportunity to get some of us into the ship, and
+others to hand down arms and ammunition to those that were at work, to
+defend themselves with if there should be occasion.  And it was no more
+than need: for in less than a quarter of an hour's consultation, they
+agreed, it seems, that the ship was really a wreck, and that we were all
+at work endeavouring to save her, or to save our lives by the help of our
+boats; and when we handed our arms into the boat, they concluded, by that
+act, that we were endeavouring to save some of our goods.  Upon this,
+they took it for granted we all belonged to them, and away they came
+directly upon our men, as if it had been in a line-of-battle.
+
+Our men, seeing so many of them, began to be frightened, for we lay but
+in an ill posture to fight, and cried out to us to know what they should
+do.  I immediately called to the men that worked upon the stages to slip
+them down, and get up the side into the ship, and bade those in the boat
+to row round and come on board.  The few who were on board worked with
+all the strength and hands we had to bring the ship to rights; however,
+neither the men upon the stages nor those in the boats could do as they
+were ordered before the Cochin Chinese were upon them, when two of their
+boats boarded our longboat, and began to lay hold of the men as their
+prisoners.
+
+The first man they laid hold of was an English seaman, a stout, strong
+fellow, who having a musket in his hand, never offered to fire it, but
+laid it down in the boat, like a fool, as I thought; but he understood
+his business better than I could teach him, for he grappled the Pagan,
+and dragged him by main force out of their boat into ours, where, taking
+him by the ears, he beat his head so against the boat's gunnel that the
+fellow died in his hands.  In the meantime, a Dutchman, who stood next,
+took up the musket, and with the butt-end of it so laid about him, that
+he knocked down five of them who attempted to enter the boat.  But this
+was doing little towards resisting thirty or forty men, who, fearless
+because ignorant of their danger, began to throw themselves into the
+longboat, where we had but five men in all to defend it; but the
+following accident, which deserved our laughter, gave our men a complete
+victory.
+
+Our carpenter being prepared to grave the outside of the ship, as well as
+to pay the seams where he had caulked her to stop the leaks, had got two
+kettles just let down into the boat, one filled with boiling pitch, and
+the other with rosin, tallow, and oil, and such stuff as the shipwrights
+use for that work; and the man that attended the carpenter had a great
+iron ladle in his hand, with which he supplied the men that were at work
+with the hot stuff.  Two of the enemy's men entered the boat just where
+this fellow stood in the foresheets; he immediately saluted them with a
+ladle full of the stuff, boiling hot which so burned and scalded them,
+being half-naked that they roared out like bulls, and, enraged with the
+fire, leaped both into the sea.  The carpenter saw it, and cried out,
+"Well done, Jack! give them some more of it!" and stepping forward
+himself, takes one of the mops, and dipping it in the pitch-pot, he and
+his man threw it among them so plentifully that, in short, of all the men
+in the three boats, there was not one that escaped being scalded in a
+most frightful manner, and made such a howling and crying that I never
+heard a worse noise.
+
+I was never better pleased with a victory in my life; not only as it was
+a perfect surprise to me, and that our danger was imminent before, but as
+we got this victory without any bloodshed, except of that man the seaman
+killed with his naked hands, and which I was very much concerned at.
+Although it maybe a just thing, because necessary (for there is no
+necessary wickedness in nature), yet I thought it was a sad sort of life,
+when we must be always obliged to be killing our fellow-creatures to
+preserve ourselves; and, indeed, I think so still; and I would even now
+suffer a great deal rather than I would take away the life even of the
+worst person injuring me; and I believe all considering people, who know
+the value of life, would be of my opinion, if they entered seriously into
+the consideration of it.
+
+All the while this was doing, my partner and I, who managed the rest of
+the men on board, had with great dexterity brought the ship almost to
+rights, and having got the guns into their places again, the gunner
+called to me to bid our boat get out of the way, for he would let fly
+among them.  I called back again to him, and bid him not offer to fire,
+for the carpenter would do the work without him; but bid him heat another
+pitch-kettle, which our cook, who was on broad, took care of.  However,
+the enemy was so terrified with what they had met with in their first
+attack, that they would not come on again; and some of them who were
+farthest off, seeing the ship swim, as it were, upright, began, as we
+suppose, to see their mistake, and gave over the enterprise, finding it
+was not as they expected.  Thus we got clear of this merry fight; and
+having got some rice and some roots and bread, with about sixteen hogs,
+on board two days before, we resolved to stay here no longer, but go
+forward, whatever came of it; for we made no doubt but we should be
+surrounded the next day with rogues enough, perhaps more than our pitch-
+kettle would dispose of for us.  We therefore got all our things on board
+the same evening, and the next morning were ready to sail: in the
+meantime, lying at anchor at some distance from the shore, we were not so
+much concerned, being now in a fighting posture, as well as in a sailing
+posture, if any enemy had presented.  The next day, having finished our
+work within board, and finding our ship was perfectly healed of all her
+leaks, we set sail.  We would have gone into the bay of Tonquin, for we
+wanted to inform ourselves of what was to be known concerning the Dutch
+ships that had been there; but we durst not stand in there, because we
+had seen several ships go in, as we supposed, but a little before; so we
+kept on NE. towards the island of Formosa, as much afraid of being seen
+by a Dutch or English merchant ship as a Dutch or English merchant ship
+in the Mediterranean is of an Algerine man-of-war.
+
+When we were thus got to sea, we kept on NE., as if we would go to the
+Manillas or the Philippine Islands; and this we did that we might not
+fall into the way of any of the European ships; and then we steered
+north, till we came to the latitude of 22 degrees 30 seconds, by which
+means we made the island of Formosa directly, where we came to an anchor,
+in order to get water and fresh provisions, which the people there, who
+are very courteous in their manners, supplied us with willingly, and
+dealt very fairly and punctually with us in all their agreements and
+bargains.  This is what we did not find among other people, and may be
+owing to the remains of Christianity which was once planted here by a
+Dutch missionary of Protestants, and it is a testimony of what I have
+often observed, viz. that the Christian religion always civilises the
+people, and reforms their manners, where it is received, whether it works
+saving effects upon them or no.
+
+From thence we sailed still north, keeping the coast of China at an equal
+distance, till we knew we were beyond all the ports of China where our
+European ships usually come; being resolved, if possible, not to fall
+into any of their hands, especially in this country, where, as our
+circumstances were, we could not fail of being entirely ruined.  Being
+now come to the latitude of 30 degrees, we resolved to put into the first
+trading port we should come at; and standing in for the shore, a boat
+came of two leagues to us with an old Portuguese pilot on board, who,
+knowing us to be an European ship, came to offer his service, which,
+indeed, we were glad of and took him on board; upon which, without asking
+us whither we would go, he dismissed the boat he came in, and sent it
+back.  I thought it was now so much in our choice to make the old man
+carry us whither we would, that I began to talk to him about carrying us
+to the Gulf of Nankin, which is the most northern part of the coast of
+China.  The old man said he knew the Gulf of Nankin very well; but
+smiling, asked us what we would do there?  I told him we would sell our
+cargo and purchase China wares, calicoes, raw silks, tea, wrought silks,
+&c.; and so we would return by the same course we came.  He told us our
+best port would have been to put in at Macao, where we could not have
+failed of a market for our opium to our satisfaction, and might for our
+money have purchased all sorts of China goods as cheap as we could at
+Nankin.
+
+Not being able to put the old man out of his talk, of which he was very
+opinionated or conceited, I told him we were gentlemen as well as
+merchants, and that we had a mind to go and see the great city of Pekin,
+and the famous court of the monarch of China.  "Why, then," says the old
+man, "you should go to Ningpo, where, by the river which runs into the
+sea there, you may go up within five leagues of the great canal.  This
+canal is a navigable stream, which goes through the heart of that vast
+empire of China, crosses all the rivers, passes some considerable hills
+by the help of sluices and gates, and goes up to the city of Pekin, being
+in length near two hundred and seventy leagues."--"Well," said I,
+"Seignior Portuguese, but that is not our business now; the great
+question is, if you can carry us up to the city of Nankin, from whence we
+can travel to Pekin afterwards?"  He said he could do so very well, and
+that there was a great Dutch ship gone up that way just before.  This
+gave me a little shock, for a Dutch ship was now our terror, and we had
+much rather have met the devil, at least if he had not come in too
+frightful a figure; and we depended upon it that a Dutch ship would be
+our destruction, for we were in no condition to fight them; all the ships
+they trade with into those parts being of great burden, and of much
+greater force than we were.
+
+The old man found me a little confused, and under some concern when he
+named a Dutch ship, and said to me, "Sir, you need be under no
+apprehensions of the Dutch; I suppose they are not now at war with your
+nation?"--"No," said I, "that's true; but I know not what liberties men
+may take when they are out of the reach of the laws of their own
+country."--"Why," says he, "you are no pirates; what need you fear?  They
+will not meddle with peaceable merchants, sure."  These words put me into
+the greatest disorder and confusion imaginable; nor was it possible for
+me to conceal it so, but the old man easily perceived it.
+
+"Sir," says he, "I find you are in some disorder in your thoughts at my
+talk: pray be pleased to go which way you think fit, and depend upon it,
+I'll do you all the service I can."  Upon this we fell into further
+discourse, in which, to my alarm and amazement, he spoke of the
+villainous doings of a certain pirate ship that had long been the talk of
+mariners in those seas; no other, in a word, than the very ship he was
+now on board of, and which we had so unluckily purchased.  I presently
+saw there was no help for it but to tell him the plain truth, and explain
+all the danger and trouble we had suffered through this misadventure,
+and, in particular, our earnest wish to be speedily quit of the ship
+altogether; for which reason we had resolved to carry her up to Nankin.
+
+The old man was amazed at this relation, and told us we were in the right
+to go away to the north; and that, if he might advise us, it should be to
+sell the ship in China, which we might well do, and buy, or build another
+in the country; adding that I should meet with customers enough for the
+ship at Nankin, that a Chinese junk would serve me very well to go back
+again, and that he would procure me people both to buy one and sell the
+other.  "Well, but, seignior," said I, "as you say they know the ship so
+well, I may, perhaps, if I follow your measures, be instrumental to bring
+some honest, innocent men into a terrible broil; for wherever they find
+the ship they will prove the guilt upon the men, by proving this was the
+ship."--"Why," says the old man, "I'll find out a way to prevent that;
+for as I know all those commanders you speak of very well, and shall see
+them all as they pass by, I will be sure to set them to rights in the
+thing, and let them know that they had been so much in the wrong; that
+though the people who were on board at first might run away with the
+ship, yet it was not true that they had turned pirates; and that, in
+particular, these were not the men that first went off with the ship, but
+innocently bought her for their trade; and I am persuaded they will so
+far believe me as at least to act more cautiously for the time to come."
+
+In about thirteen days' sail we came to an anchor, at the south-west
+point of the great Gulf of Nankin; where I learned by accident that two
+Dutch ships were gone the length before me, and that I should certainly
+fall into their hands.  I consulted my partner again in this exigency,
+and he was as much at a loss as I was.  I then asked the old pilot if
+there was no creek or harbour which I might put into and pursue my
+business with the Chinese privately, and be in no danger of the enemy.  He
+told me if I would sail to the southward about forty-two leagues, there
+was a little port called Quinchang, where the fathers of the mission
+usually landed from Macao, on their progress to teach the Christian
+religion to the Chinese, and where no European ships ever put in; and if
+I thought to put in there, I might consider what further course to take
+when I was on shore.  He confessed, he said, it was not a place for
+merchants, except that at some certain times they had a kind of a fair
+there, when the merchants from Japan came over thither to buy Chinese
+merchandises.  The name of the port I may perhaps spell wrong, having
+lost this, together with the names of many other places set down in a
+little pocket-book, which was spoiled by the water by an accident; but
+this I remember, that the Chinese merchants we corresponded with called
+it by a different name from that which our Portuguese pilot gave it, who
+pronounced it Quinchang.  As we were unanimous in our resolution to go to
+this place, we weighed the next day, having only gone twice on shore
+where we were, to get fresh water; on both which occasions the people of
+the country were very civil, and brought abundance of provisions to sell
+to us; but nothing without money.
+
+We did not come to the other port (the wind being contrary) for five
+days; but it was very much to our satisfaction, and I was thankful when I
+set my foot on shore, resolving, and my partner too, that if it was
+possible to dispose of ourselves and effects any other way, though not
+profitably, we would never more set foot on board that unhappy vessel.
+Indeed, I must acknowledge, that of all the circumstances of life that
+ever I had any experience of, nothing makes mankind so completely
+miserable as that of being in constant fear.  Well does the Scripture
+say, "The fear of man brings a snare"; it is a life of death, and the
+mind is so entirely oppressed by it, that it is capable of no relief.
+
+Nor did it fail of its usual operations upon the fancy, by heightening
+every danger; representing the English and Dutch captains to be men
+incapable of hearing reason, or of distinguishing between honest men and
+rogues; or between a story calculated for our own turn, made out of
+nothing, on purpose to deceive, and a true, genuine account of our whole
+voyage, progress, and design; for we might many ways have convinced any
+reasonable creatures that we were not pirates; the goods we had on board,
+the course we steered, our frankly showing ourselves, and entering into
+such and such ports; and even our very manner, the force we had, the
+number of men, the few arms, the little ammunition, short provisions; all
+these would have served to convince any men that we were no pirates.  The
+opium and other goods we had on board would make it appear the ship had
+been at Bengal.  The Dutchmen, who, it was said, had the names of all the
+men that were in the ship, might easily see that we were a mixture of
+English, Portuguese, and Indians, and but two Dutchmen on board.  These,
+and many other particular circumstances, might have made it evident to
+the understanding of any commander, whose hands we might fall into, that
+we were no pirates.
+
+But fear, that blind, useless passion, worked another way, and threw us
+into the vapours; it bewildered our understandings, and set the
+imagination at work to form a thousand terrible things that perhaps might
+never happen.  We first supposed, as indeed everybody had related to us,
+that the seamen on board the English and Dutch ships, but especially the
+Dutch, were so enraged at the name of a pirate, and especially at our
+beating off their boats and escaping, that they would not give themselves
+leave to inquire whether we were pirates or no, but would execute us off-
+hand, without giving us any room for a defence.  We reflected that there
+really was so much apparent evidence before them, that they would scarce
+inquire after any more; as, first, that the ship was certainly the same,
+and that some of the seamen among them knew her, and had been on board
+her; and, secondly, that when we had intelligence at the river of
+Cambodia that they were coming down to examine us, we fought their boats
+and fled.  Therefore we made no doubt but they were as fully satisfied of
+our being pirates as we were satisfied of the contrary; and, as I often
+said, I know not but I should have been apt to have taken those
+circumstances for evidence, if the tables were turned, and my case was
+theirs; and have made no scruple of cutting all the crew to pieces,
+without believing, or perhaps considering, what they might have to offer
+in their defence.
+
+But let that be how it will, these were our apprehensions; and both my
+partner and I scarce slept a night without dreaming of halters and yard-
+arms; of fighting, and being taken; of killing, and being killed: and one
+night I was in such a fury in my dream, fancying the Dutchmen had boarded
+us, and I was knocking one of their seamen down, that I struck my doubled
+fist against the side of the cabin I lay in with such a force as wounded
+my hand grievously, broke my knuckles, and cut and bruised the flesh, so
+that it awaked me out of my sleep.  Another apprehension I had was, the
+cruel usage we might meet with from them if we fell into their hands;
+then the story of Amboyna came into my head, and how the Dutch might
+perhaps torture us, as they did our countrymen there, and make some of
+our men, by extremity of torture, confess to crimes they never were
+guilty of, or own themselves and all of us to be pirates, and so they
+would put us to death with a formal appearance of justice; and that they
+might be tempted to do this for the gain of our ship and cargo, worth
+altogether four or five thousand pounds.  We did not consider that the
+captains of ships have no authority to act thus; and if we had
+surrendered prisoners to them, they could not answer the destroying us,
+or torturing us, but would be accountable for it when they came to their
+country.  However, if they were to act thus with us, what advantage would
+it be to us that they should be called to an account for it?--or if we
+were first to be murdered, what satisfaction would it be to us to have
+them punished when they came home?
+
+I cannot refrain taking notice here what reflections I now had upon the
+vast variety of my particular circumstances; how hard I thought it that
+I, who had spent forty years in a life of continual difficulties, and was
+at last come, as it were, to the port or haven which all men drive at,
+viz. to have rest and plenty, should be a volunteer in new sorrows by my
+own unhappy choice, and that I, who had escaped so many dangers in my
+youth, should now come to be hanged in my old age, and in so remote a
+place, for a crime which I was not in the least inclined to, much less
+guilty of.  After these thoughts something of religion would come in; and
+I would be considering that this seemed to me to be a disposition of
+immediate Providence, and I ought to look upon it and submit to it as
+such.  For, although I was innocent as to men, I was far from being
+innocent as to my Maker; and I ought to look in and examine what other
+crimes in my life were most obvious to me, and for which Providence might
+justly inflict this punishment as a retribution; and thus I ought to
+submit to this, just as I would to a shipwreck, if it had pleased God to
+have brought such a disaster upon me.
+
+In its turn natural courage would sometimes take its place, and then I
+would be talking myself up to vigorous resolutions; that I would not be
+taken to be barbarously used by a parcel of merciless wretches in cold
+blood; that it were much better to have fallen into the hands of the
+savages, though I were sure they would feast upon me when they had taken
+me, than those who would perhaps glut their rage upon me by inhuman
+tortures and barbarities; that in the case of the savages, I always
+resolved to die fighting to the last gasp, and why should I not do so
+now?  Whenever these thoughts prevailed, I was sure to put myself into a
+kind of fever with the agitation of a supposed fight; my blood would
+boil, and my eyes sparkle, as if I was engaged, and I always resolved to
+take no quarter at their hands; but even at last, if I could resist no
+longer, I would blow up the ship and all that was in her, and leave them
+but little booty to boast of.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII--ARRIVAL IN CHINA
+
+
+The greater weight the anxieties and perplexities of these things were to
+our thoughts while we were at sea, the greater was our satisfaction when
+we saw ourselves on shore; and my partner told me he dreamed that he had
+a very heavy load upon his back, which he was to carry up a hill, and
+found that he was not able to stand longer under it; but that the
+Portuguese pilot came and took it off his back, and the hill disappeared,
+the ground before him appearing all smooth and plain: and truly it was
+so; they were all like men who had a load taken off their backs.  For my
+part I had a weight taken off from my heart that it was not able any
+longer to bear; and as I said above we resolved to go no more to sea in
+that ship.  When we came on shore, the old pilot, who was now our friend,
+got us a lodging, together with a warehouse for our goods; it was a
+little hut, with a larger house adjoining to it, built and also
+palisadoed round with canes, to keep out pilferers, of which there were
+not a few in that country: however, the magistrates allowed us a little
+guard, and we had a soldier with a kind of half-pike, who stood sentinel
+at our door, to whom we allowed a pint of rice and a piece of money about
+the value of three-pence per day, so that our goods were kept very safe.
+
+The fair or mart usually kept at this place had been over some time;
+however, we found that there were three or four junks in the river, and
+two ships from Japan, with goods which they had bought in China, and were
+not gone away, having some Japanese merchants on shore.
+
+The first thing our old Portuguese pilot did for us was to get us
+acquainted with three missionary Romish priests who were in the town, and
+who had been there some time converting the people to Christianity; but
+we thought they made but poor work of it, and made them but sorry
+Christians when they had done.  One of these was a Frenchman, whom they
+called Father Simon; another was a Portuguese; and a third a Genoese.
+Father Simon was courteous, and very agreeable company; but the other two
+were more reserved, seemed rigid and austere, and applied seriously to
+the work they came about, viz. to talk with and insinuate themselves
+among the inhabitants wherever they had opportunity.  We often ate and
+drank with those men; and though I must confess the conversion, as they
+call it, of the Chinese to Christianity is so far from the true
+conversion required to bring heathen people to the faith of Christ, that
+it seems to amount to little more than letting them know the name of
+Christ, and say some prayers to the Virgin Mary and her Son, in a tongue
+which they understood not, and to cross themselves, and the like; yet it
+must be confessed that the religionists, whom we call missionaries, have
+a firm belief that these people will be saved, and that they are the
+instruments of it; and on this account they undergo not only the fatigue
+of the voyage, and the hazards of living in such places, but oftentimes
+death itself, and the most violent tortures, for the sake of this work.
+
+Father Simon was appointed, it seems, by order of the chief of the
+mission, to go up to Pekin, and waited only for another priest, who was
+ordered to come to him from Macao, to go along with him.  We scarce ever
+met together but he was inviting me to go that journey; telling me how he
+would show me all the glorious things of that mighty empire, and, among
+the rest, Pekin, the greatest city in the world: "A city," said he, "that
+your London and our Paris put together cannot be equal to."  But as I
+looked on those things with different eyes from other men, so I shall
+give my opinion of them in a few words, when I come in the course of my
+travels to speak more particularly of them.
+
+Dining with Father Simon one day, and being very merry together, I showed
+some little inclination to go with him; and he pressed me and my partner
+very hard to consent.  "Why, father," says my partner, "should you desire
+our company so much? you know we are heretics, and you do not love us,
+nor cannot keep us company with any pleasure."--"Oh," says he, "you may
+perhaps be good Catholics in time; my business here is to convert
+heathens, and who knows but I may convert you too?"--"Very well, father,"
+said I, "so you will preach to us all the way?"--"I will not be
+troublesome to you," says he; "our religion does not divest us of good
+manners; besides, we are here like countrymen; and so we are, compared to
+the place we are in; and if you are Huguenots, and I a Catholic, we may
+all be Christians at last; at least, we are all gentlemen, and we may
+converse so, without being uneasy to one another."  I liked this part of
+his discourse very well, and it began to put me in mind of my priest that
+I had left in the Brazils; but Father Simon did not come up to his
+character by a great deal; for though this friar had no appearance of a
+criminal levity in him, yet he had not that fund of Christian zeal,
+strict piety, and sincere affection to religion that my other good
+ecclesiastic had.
+
+But to leave him a little, though he never left us, nor solicited us to
+go with him; we had something else before us at first, for we had all
+this while our ship and our merchandise to dispose of, and we began to be
+very doubtful what we should do, for we were now in a place of very
+little business.  Once I was about to venture to sail for the river of
+Kilam, and the city of Nankin; but Providence seemed now more visibly, as
+I thought, than ever to concern itself in our affairs; and I was
+encouraged, from this very time, to think I should, one way or other, get
+out of this entangled circumstance, and be brought home to my own country
+again, though I had not the least view of the manner.  Providence, I say,
+began here to clear up our way a little; and the first thing that offered
+was, that our old Portuguese pilot brought a Japan merchant to us, who
+inquired what goods we had: and, in the first place, he bought all our
+opium, and gave us a very good price for it, paying us in gold by weight,
+some in small pieces of their own coin, and some in small wedges, of
+about ten or twelves ounces each.  While we were dealing with him for our
+opium, it came into my head that he might perhaps deal for the ship too,
+and I ordered the interpreter to propose it to him.  He shrunk up his
+shoulders at it when it was first proposed to him; but in a few days
+after he came to me, with one of the missionary priests for his
+interpreter, and told me he had a proposal to make to me, which was this:
+he had bought a great quantity of our goods, when he had no thoughts of
+proposals made to him of buying the ship; and that, therefore, he had not
+money to pay for the ship: but if I would let the same men who were in
+the ship navigate her, he would hire the ship to go to Japan; and would
+send them from thence to the Philippine Islands with another loading,
+which he would pay the freight of before they went from Japan: and that
+at their return he would buy the ship.  I began to listen to his
+proposal, and so eager did my head still run upon rambling, that I could
+not but begin to entertain a notion of going myself with him, and so to
+set sail from the Philippine Islands away to the South Seas; accordingly,
+I asked the Japanese merchant if he would not hire us to the Philippine
+Islands and discharge us there.  He said No, he could not do that, for
+then he could not have the return of his cargo; but he would discharge us
+in Japan, at the ship's return.  Well, still I was for taking him at that
+proposal, and going myself; but my partner, wiser than myself, persuaded
+me from it, representing the dangers, as well of the seas as of the
+Japanese, who are a false, cruel, and treacherous people; likewise those
+of the Spaniards at the Philippines, more false, cruel, and treacherous
+than they.
+
+But to bring this long turn of our affairs to a conclusion; the first
+thing we had to do was to consult with the captain of the ship, and with
+his men, and know if they were willing to go to Japan.  While I was doing
+this, the young man whom my nephew had left with me as my companion came
+up, and told me that he thought that voyage promised very fair, and that
+there was a great prospect of advantage, and he would be very glad if I
+undertook it; but that if I would not, and would give him leave, he would
+go as a merchant, or as I pleased to order him; that if ever he came to
+England, and I was there and alive, he would render me a faithful account
+of his success, which should be as much mine as I pleased.  I was loath
+to part with him; but considering the prospect of advantage, which really
+was considerable, and that he was a young fellow likely to do well in it,
+I inclined to let him go; but I told him I would consult my partner, and
+give him an answer the next day.  I discoursed about it with my partner,
+who thereupon made a most generous offer: "You know it has been an
+unlucky ship," said he, "and we both resolve not to go to sea in it
+again; if your steward" (so he called my man) "will venture the voyage, I
+will leave my share of the vessel to him, and let him make the best of
+it; and if we live to meet in England, and he meets with success abroad,
+he shall account for one half of the profits of the ship's freight to us;
+the other shall be his own."
+
+If my partner, who was no way concerned with my young man, made him such
+an offer, I could not do less than offer him the same; and all the ship's
+company being willing to go with him, we made over half the ship to him
+in property, and took a writing from him, obliging him to account for the
+other, and away he went to Japan.  The Japan merchant proved a very
+punctual, honest man to him: protected him at Japan, and got him a
+licence to come on shore, which the Europeans in general have not lately
+obtained.  He paid him his freight very punctually; sent him to the
+Philippines loaded with Japan and China wares, and a supercargo of their
+own, who, trafficking with the Spaniards, brought back European goods
+again, and a great quantity of spices; and there he was not only paid his
+freight very well, and at a very good price, but not being willing to
+sell the ship, then the merchant furnished him goods on his own account;
+and with some money, and some spices of his own which he brought with
+him, he went back to the Manillas, where he sold his cargo very well.
+Here, having made a good acquaintance at Manilla, he got his ship made a
+free ship, and the governor of Manilla hired him to go to Acapulco, on
+the coast of America, and gave him a licence to land there, and to travel
+to Mexico, and to pass in any Spanish ship to Europe with all his men.  He
+made the voyage to Acapulco very happily, and there he sold his ship: and
+having there also obtained allowance to travel by land to Porto Bello, he
+found means to get to Jamaica, with all his treasure, and about eight
+years after came to England exceeding rich.
+
+But to return to our particular affairs, being now to part with the ship
+and ship's company, it came before us, of course, to consider what
+recompense we should give to the two men that gave us such timely notice
+of the design against us in the river Cambodia.  The truth was, they had
+done us a very considerable service, and deserved well at our hands;
+though, by the way, they were a couple of rogues, too; for, as they
+believed the story of our being pirates, and that we had really run away
+with the ship, they came down to us, not only to betray the design that
+was formed against us, but to go to sea with us as pirates.  One of them
+confessed afterwards that nothing else but the hopes of going a-roguing
+brought him to do it: however, the service they did us was not the less,
+and therefore, as I had promised to be grateful to them, I first ordered
+the money to be paid them which they said was due to them on board their
+respective ships: over and above that, I gave each of them a small sum of
+money in gold, which contented them very well.  I then made the
+Englishman gunner in the ship, the gunner being now made second mate and
+purser; the Dutchman I made boatswain; so they were both very well
+pleased, and proved very serviceable, being both able seamen, and very
+stout fellows.
+
+We were now on shore in China; if I thought myself banished, and remote
+from my own country at Bengal, where I had many ways to get home for my
+money, what could I think of myself now, when I was about a thousand
+leagues farther off from home, and destitute of all manner of prospect of
+return?  All we had for it was this: that in about four months' time
+there was to be another fair at the place where we were, and then we
+might be able to purchase various manufactures of the country, and withal
+might possibly find some Chinese junks from Tonquin for sail, that would
+carry us and our goods whither we pleased.  This I liked very well, and
+resolved to wait; besides, as our particular persons were not obnoxious,
+so if any English or Dutch ships came thither, perhaps we might have an
+opportunity to load our goods, and get passage to some other place in
+India nearer home.  Upon these hopes we resolved to continue here; but,
+to divert ourselves, we took two or three journeys into the country.
+
+First, we went ten days' journey to Nankin, a city well worth seeing;
+they say it has a million of people in it: it is regularly built, and the
+streets are all straight, and cross one another in direct lines.  But
+when I come to compare the miserable people of these countries with ours,
+their fabrics, their manner of living, their government, their religion,
+their wealth, and their glory, as some call it, I must confess that I
+scarcely think it worth my while to mention them here.  We wonder at the
+grandeur, the riches, the pomp, the ceremonies, the government, the
+manufactures, the commerce, and conduct of these people; not that there
+is really any matter for wonder, but because, having a true notion of the
+barbarity of those countries, the rudeness and the ignorance that prevail
+there, we do not expect to find any such thing so far off.  Otherwise,
+what are their buildings to the palaces and royal buildings of Europe?
+What their trade to the universal commerce of England, Holland, France,
+and Spain?  What are their cities to ours, for wealth, strength, gaiety
+of apparel, rich furniture, and infinite variety?  What are their ports,
+supplied with a few junks and barks, to our navigation, our merchant
+fleets, our large and powerful navies?  Our city of London has more trade
+than half their mighty empire: one English, Dutch, or French man-of-war
+of eighty guns would be able to fight almost all the shipping belonging
+to China: but the greatness of their wealth, their trade, the power of
+their government, and the strength of their armies, may be a little
+surprising to us, because, as I have said, considering them as a
+barbarous nation of pagans, little better than savages, we did not expect
+such things among them.  But all the forces of their empire, though they
+were to bring two millions of men into the field together, would be able
+to do nothing but ruin the country and starve themselves; a million of
+their foot could not stand before one embattled body of our infantry,
+posted so as not to be surrounded, though they were not to be one to
+twenty in number; nay, I do not boast if I say that thirty thousand
+German or English foot, and ten thousand horse, well managed, could
+defeat all the forces of China.  Nor is there a fortified town in China
+that could hold out one month against the batteries and attacks of an
+European army.  They have firearms, it is true, but they are awkward and
+uncertain in their going off; and their powder has but little strength.
+Their armies are badly disciplined, and want skill to attack, or temper
+to retreat; and therefore, I must confess, it seemed strange to me, when
+I came home, and heard our people say such fine things of the power,
+glory, magnificence, and trade of the Chinese; because, as far as I saw,
+they appeared to be a contemptible herd or crowd of ignorant, sordid
+slaves, subjected to a government qualified only to rule such a people;
+and were not its distance inconceivably, great from Muscovy, and that
+empire in a manner as rude, impotent, and ill governed as they, the Czar
+of Muscovy might with ease drive them all out of their country, and
+conquer them in one campaign; and had the Czar (who is now a growing
+prince) fallen this way, instead of attacking the warlike Swedes, and
+equally improved himself in the art of war, as they say he has done; and
+if none of the powers of Europe had envied or interrupted him, he might
+by this time have been Emperor of China, instead of being beaten by the
+King of Sweden at Narva, when the latter was not one to six in number.
+
+As their strength and their grandeur, so their navigation, commerce, and
+husbandry are very imperfect, compared to the same things in Europe;
+also, in their knowledge, their learning, and in their skill in the
+sciences, they are either very awkward or defective, though they have
+globes or spheres, and a smattering of the mathematics, and think they
+know more than all the world besides.  But they know little of the
+motions of the heavenly bodies; and so grossly and absurdly ignorant are
+their common people, that when the sun is eclipsed, they think a great
+dragon has assaulted it, and is going to run away with it; and they fall
+a clattering with all the drums and kettles in the country, to fright the
+monster away, just as we do to hive a swarm of bees!
+
+As this is the only excursion of the kind which I have made in all the
+accounts I have given of my travels, so I shall make no more such.  It is
+none of my business, nor any part of my design; but to give an account of
+my own adventures through a life of inimitable wanderings, and a long
+variety of changes, which, perhaps, few that come after me will have
+heard the like of: I shall, therefore, say very little of all the mighty
+places, desert countries, and numerous people I have yet to pass through,
+more than relates to my own story, and which my concern among them will
+make necessary.
+
+I was now, as near as I can compute, in the heart of China, about thirty
+degrees north of the line, for we were returned from Nankin.  I had
+indeed a mind to see the city of Pekin, which I had heard so much of, and
+Father Simon importuned me daily to do it.  At length his time of going
+away being set, and the other missionary who was to go with him being
+arrived from Macao, it was necessary that we should resolve either to go
+or not; so I referred it to my partner, and left it wholly to his choice,
+who at length resolved it in the affirmative, and we prepared for our
+journey.  We set out with very good advantage as to finding the way; for
+we got leave to travel in the retinue of one of their mandarins, a kind
+of viceroy or principal magistrate in the province where they reside, and
+who take great state upon them, travelling with great attendance, and
+great homage from the people, who are sometimes greatly impoverished by
+them, being obliged to furnish provisions for them and all their
+attendants in their journeys.  I particularly observed in our travelling
+with his baggage, that though we received sufficient provisions both for
+ourselves and our horses from the country, as belonging to the mandarin,
+yet we were obliged to pay for everything we had, after the market price
+of the country, and the mandarin's steward collected it duly from us.
+Thus our travelling in the retinue of the mandarin, though it was a great
+act of kindness, was not such a mighty favour to us, but was a great
+advantage to him, considering there were above thirty other people
+travelled in the same manner besides us, under the protection of his
+retinue; for the country furnished all the provisions for nothing to him,
+and yet he took our money for them.
+
+We were twenty-five days travelling to Pekin, through a country exceeding
+populous, but I think badly cultivated; the husbandry, the economy, and
+the way of living miserable, though they boast so much of the industry of
+the people: I say miserable, if compared with our own, but not so to
+these poor wretches, who know no other.  The pride of the poor people is
+infinitely great, and exceeded by nothing but their poverty, in some
+parts, which adds to that which I call their misery; and I must needs
+think the savages of America live much more happy than the poorer sort of
+these, because as they have nothing, so they desire nothing; whereas
+these are proud and insolent and in the main are in many parts mere
+beggars and drudges.  Their ostentation is inexpressible; and, if they
+can, they love to keep multitudes of servants or slaves, which is to the
+last degree ridiculous, as well as their contempt of all the world but
+themselves.
+
+I must confess I travelled more pleasantly afterwards in the deserts and
+vast wildernesses of Grand Tartary than here, and yet the roads here are
+well paved and well kept, and very convenient for travellers; but nothing
+was more awkward to me than to see such a haughty, imperious, insolent
+people, in the midst of the grossest simplicity and ignorance; and my
+friend Father Simon and I used to be very merry upon these occasions, to
+see their beggarly pride.  For example, coming by the house of a country
+gentleman, as Father Simon called him, about ten leagues off the city of
+Nankin, we had first of all the honour to ride with the master of the
+house about two miles; the state he rode in was a perfect Don Quixotism,
+being a mixture of pomp and poverty.  His habit was very proper for a
+merry-andrew, being a dirty calico, with hanging sleeves, tassels, and
+cuts and slashes almost on every side: it covered a taffety vest, so
+greasy as to testify that his honour must be a most exquisite sloven.  His
+horse was a poor, starved, hobbling creature, and two slaves followed him
+on foot to drive the poor creature along; he had a whip in his hand, and
+he belaboured the beast as fast about the head as his slaves did about
+the tail; and thus he rode by us, with about ten or twelve servants,
+going from the city to his country seat, about half a league before us.
+We travelled on gently, but this figure of a gentleman rode away before
+us; and as we stopped at a village about an hour to refresh us, when we
+came by the country seat of this great man, we saw him in a little place
+before his door, eating a repast.  It was a kind of garden, but he was
+easy to be seen; and we were given to understand that the more we looked
+at him the better he would be pleased.  He sat under a tree, something
+like the palmetto, which effectually shaded him over the head, and on the
+south side; but under the tree was placed a large umbrella, which made
+that part look well enough.  He sat lolling back in a great elbow-chair,
+being a heavy corpulent man, and had his meat brought him by two women
+slaves.  He had two more, one of whom fed the squire with a spoon, and
+the other held the dish with one hand, and scraped off what he let fall
+upon his worship's beard and taffety vest.
+
+Leaving the poor wretch to please himself with our looking at him, as if
+we admired his idle pomp, we pursued our journey.  Father Simon had the
+curiosity to stay to inform himself what dainties the country justice had
+to feed on in all his state, which he had the honour to taste of, and
+which was, I think, a mess of boiled rice, with a great piece of garlic
+in it, and a little bag filled with green pepper, and another plant which
+they have there, something like our ginger, but smelling like musk, and
+tasting like mustard; all this was put together, and a small piece of
+lean mutton boiled in it, and this was his worship's repast.  Four or
+five servants more attended at a distance, who we supposed were to eat of
+the same after their master.  As for our mandarin with whom we travelled,
+he was respected as a king, surrounded always with his gentlemen, and
+attended in all his appearances with such pomp, that I saw little of him
+but at a distance.  I observed that there was not a horse in his retinue
+but that our carrier's packhorses in England seemed to me to look much
+better; though it was hard to judge rightly, for they were so covered
+with equipage, mantles, trappings, &c., that we could scarce see anything
+but their feet and their heads as they went along.
+
+I was now light-hearted, and all my late trouble and perplexity being
+over, I had no anxious thoughts about me, which made this journey the
+pleasanter to me; in which no ill accident attended me, only in passing
+or fording a small river, my horse fell and made me free of the country,
+as they call it--that is to say, threw me in.  The place was not deep,
+but it wetted me all over.  I mention it because it spoiled my pocket-
+book, wherein I had set down the names of several people and places which
+I had occasion to remember, and which not taking due care of, the leaves
+rotted, and the words were never after to be read.
+
+At length we arrived at Pekin.  I had nobody with me but the youth whom
+my nephew had given me to attend me as a servant and who proved very
+trusty and diligent; and my partner had nobody with him but one servant,
+who was a kinsman.  As for the Portuguese pilot, he being desirous to see
+the court, we bore his charges for his company, and for our use of him as
+an interpreter, for he understood the language of the country, and spoke
+good French and a little English.  Indeed, this old man was most useful
+to us everywhere; for we had not been above a week at Pekin, when he came
+laughing.  "Ah, Seignior Inglese," says he, "I have something to tell
+will make your heart glad."--"My heart glad," says I; "what can that be?
+I don't know anything in this country can either give me joy or grief to
+any great degree."--"Yes, yes," said the old man, in broken English,
+"make you glad, me sorry."--"Why," said I, "will it make you
+sorry?"--"Because," said he, "you have brought me here twenty-five days'
+journey, and will leave me to go back alone; and which way shall I get to
+my port afterwards, without a ship, without a horse, without _pecune_?"
+so he called money, being his broken Latin, of which he had abundance to
+make us merry with.  In short, he told us there was a great caravan of
+Muscovite and Polish merchants in the city, preparing to set out on their
+journey by land to Muscovy, within four or five weeks; and he was sure we
+would take the opportunity to go with them, and leave him behind, to go
+back alone.
+
+I confess I was greatly surprised with this good news, and had scarce
+power to speak to him for some time; but at last I said to him, "How do
+you know this? are you sure it is true?"--"Yes," says he; "I met this
+morning in the street an old acquaintance of mine, an Armenian, who is
+among them.  He came last from Astrakhan, and was designed to go to
+Tonquin, where I formerly knew him, but has altered his mind, and is now
+resolved to go with the caravan to Moscow, and so down the river Volga to
+Astrakhan."--"Well, Seignior," says I, "do not be uneasy about being left
+to go back alone; if this be a method for my return to England, it shall
+be your fault if you go back to Macao at all."  We then went to consult
+together what was to be done; and I asked my partner what he thought of
+the pilot's news, and whether it would suit with his affairs?  He told me
+he would do just as I would; for he had settled all his affairs so well
+at Bengal, and left his effects in such good hands, that as we had made a
+good voyage, if he could invest it in China silks, wrought and raw, he
+would be content to go to England, and then make a voyage back to Bengal
+by the Company's ships.
+
+Having resolved upon this, we agreed that if our Portuguese pilot would
+go with us, we would bear his charges to Moscow, or to England, if he
+pleased; nor, indeed, were we to be esteemed over-generous in that
+either, if we had not rewarded him further, the service he had done us
+being really worth more than that; for he had not only been a pilot to us
+at sea, but he had been like a broker for us on shore; and his procuring
+for us a Japan merchant was some hundreds of pounds in our pockets.  So,
+being willing to gratify him, which was but doing him justice, and very
+willing also to have him with us besides, for he was a most necessary man
+on all occasions, we agreed to give him a quantity of coined gold, which,
+as I computed it, was worth one hundred and seventy-five pounds sterling,
+between us, and to bear all his charges, both for himself and horse,
+except only a horse to carry his goods.  Having settled this between
+ourselves, we called him to let him know what we had resolved.  I told
+him he had complained of our being willing to let him go back alone, and
+I was now about to tell him we designed he should not go back at all.
+That as we had resolved to go to Europe with the caravan, we were very
+willing he should go with us; and that we called him to know his mind.  He
+shook his head and said it was a long journey, and that he had no
+_pecune_ to carry him thither, or to subsist himself when he came there.
+We told him we believed it was so, and therefore we had resolved to do
+something for him that should let him see how sensible we were of the
+service he had done us, and also how agreeable he was to us: and then I
+told him what we had resolved to give him here, which he might lay out as
+we would do our own; and that as for his charges, if he would go with us
+we would set him safe on shore (life and casualties excepted), either in
+Muscovy or England, as he would choose, at our own charge, except only
+the carriage of his goods.  He received the proposal like a man
+transported, and told us he would go with us over all the whole world;
+and so we all prepared for our journey.  However, as it was with us, so
+it was with the other merchants: they had many things to do, and instead
+of being ready in five weeks, it was four months and some days before all
+things were got together.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV--ATTACKED BY TARTARS
+
+
+It was the beginning of February, new style, when we set out from Pekin.
+My partner and the old pilot had gone express back to the port where we
+had first put in, to dispose of some goods which we had left there; and
+I, with a Chinese merchant whom I had some knowledge of at Nankin, and
+who came to Pekin on his own affairs, went to Nankin, where I bought
+ninety pieces of fine damasks, with about two hundred pieces of other
+very fine silk of several sorts, some mixed with gold, and had all these
+brought to Pekin against my partner's return.  Besides this, we bought a
+large quantity of raw silk, and some other goods, our cargo amounting, in
+these goods only, to about three thousand five hundred pounds sterling;
+which, together with tea and some fine calicoes, and three camels' loads
+of nutmegs and cloves, loaded in all eighteen camels for our share,
+besides those we rode upon; these, with two or three spare horses, and
+two horses loaded with provisions, made together twenty-six camels and
+horses in our retinue.
+
+The company was very great, and, as near as I can remember, made between
+three and four hundred horses, and upwards of one hundred and twenty men,
+very well armed and provided for all events; for as the Eastern caravans
+are subject to be attacked by the Arabs, so are these by the Tartars.  The
+company consisted of people of several nations, but there were above
+sixty of them merchants or inhabitants of Moscow, though of them some
+were Livonians; and to our particular satisfaction, five of them were
+Scots, who appeared also to be men of great experience in business, and
+of very good substance.
+
+When we had travelled one day's journey, the guides, who were five in
+number, called all the passengers, except the servants, to a great
+council, as they called it.  At this council every one deposited a
+certain quantity of money to a common stock, for the necessary expense of
+buying forage on the way, where it was not otherwise to be had, and for
+satisfying the guides, getting horses, and the like.  Here, too, they
+constituted the journey, as they call it, viz. they named captains and
+officers to draw us all up, and give the word of command, in case of an
+attack, and give every one their turn of command; nor was this forming us
+into order any more than what we afterwards found needful on the way.
+
+The road all on this side of the country is very populous, and is full of
+potters and earth-makers--that is to say, people, that temper the earth
+for the China ware.  As I was coming along, our Portuguese pilot, who had
+always something or other to say to make us merry, told me he would show
+me the greatest rarity in all the country, and that I should have this to
+say of China, after all the ill-humoured things that I had said of it,
+that I had seen one thing which was not to be seen in all the world
+beside.  I was very importunate to know what it was; at last he told me
+it was a gentleman's house built with China ware.  "Well," says I, "are
+not the materials of their buildings the products of their own country,
+and so it is all China ware, is it not?"--"No, no," says he, "I mean it
+is a house all made of China ware, such as you call it in England, or as
+it is called in our country, porcelain."--"Well," says I, "such a thing
+may be; how big is it?  Can we carry it in a box upon a camel?  If we can
+we will buy it."--"Upon a camel!" says the old pilot, holding up both his
+hands; "why, there is a family of thirty people lives in it."
+
+I was then curious, indeed, to see it; and when I came to it, it was
+nothing but this: it was a timber house, or a house built, as we call it
+in England, with lath and plaster, but all this plastering was really
+China ware--that is to say, it was plastered with the earth that makes
+China ware.  The outside, which the sun shone hot upon, was glazed, and
+looked very well, perfectly white, and painted with blue figures, as the
+large China ware in England is painted, and hard as if it had been burnt.
+As to the inside, all the walls, instead of wainscot, were lined with
+hardened and painted tiles, like the little square tiles we call galley-
+tiles in England, all made of the finest china, and the figures exceeding
+fine indeed, with extraordinary variety of colours, mixed with gold, many
+tiles making but one figure, but joined so artificially, the mortar being
+made of the same earth, that it was very hard to see where the tiles met.
+The floors of the rooms were of the same composition, and as hard as the
+earthen floors we have in use in several parts of England; as hard as
+stone, and smooth, but not burnt and painted, except some smaller rooms,
+like closets, which were all, as it were, paved with the same tile; the
+ceiling and all the plastering work in the whole house were of the same
+earth; and, after all, the roof was covered with tiles of the same, but
+of a deep shining black.  This was a China warehouse indeed, truly and
+literally to be called so, and had I not been upon the journey, I could
+have stayed some days to see and examine the particulars of it.  They
+told me there were fountains and fishponds in the garden, all paved on
+the bottom and sides with the same; and fine statues set up in rows on
+the walks, entirely formed of the porcelain earth, burnt whole.
+
+As this is one of the singularities of China, so they may be allowed to
+excel in it; but I am very sure they excel in their accounts of it; for
+they told me such incredible things of their performance in
+crockery-ware, for such it is, that I care not to relate, as knowing it
+could not be true.  They told me, in particular, of one workman that made
+a ship with all its tackle and masts and sails in earthenware, big enough
+to carry fifty men.  If they had told me he launched it, and made a
+voyage to Japan in it, I might have said something to it indeed; but as
+it was, I knew the whole of the story, which was, in short, that the
+fellow lied: so I smiled, and said nothing to it.  This odd sight kept me
+two hours behind the caravan, for which the leader of it for the day
+fined me about the value of three shillings; and told me if it had been
+three days' journey without the wall, as it was three days' within, he
+must have fined me four times as much, and made me ask pardon the next
+council-day.  I promised to be more orderly; and, indeed, I found
+afterwards the orders made for keeping all together were absolutely
+necessary for our common safety.
+
+In two days more we passed the great China wall, made for a fortification
+against the Tartars: and a very great work it is, going over hills and
+mountains in an endless track, where the rocks are impassable, and the
+precipices such as no enemy could possibly enter, or indeed climb up, or
+where, if they did, no wall could hinder them.  They tell us its length
+is near a thousand English miles, but that the country is five hundred in
+a straight measured line, which the wall bounds without measuring the
+windings and turnings it takes; it is about four fathoms high, and as
+many thick in some places.
+
+I stood still an hour or thereabouts without trespassing on our orders
+(for so long the caravan was in passing the gate), to look at it on every
+side, near and far off; I mean what was within my view: and the guide,
+who had been extolling it for the wonder of the world, was mighty eager
+to hear my opinion of it.  I told him it was a most excellent thing to
+keep out the Tartars; which he happened not to understand as I meant it
+and so took it for a compliment; but the old pilot laughed!  "Oh,
+Seignior Inglese," says he, "you speak in colours."--"In colours!" said
+I; "what do you mean by that?"--"Why, you speak what looks white this way
+and black that way--gay one way and dull another.  You tell him it is a
+good wall to keep out Tartars; you tell me by that it is good for nothing
+but to keep out Tartars.  I understand you, Seignior Inglese, I
+understand you; but Seignior Chinese understood you his own way."--"Well,"
+says I, "do you think it would stand out an army of our country people,
+with a good train of artillery; or our engineers, with two companies of
+miners?  Would not they batter it down in ten days, that an army might
+enter in battalia; or blow it up in the air, foundation and all, that
+there should be no sign of it left?"--"Ay, ay," says he, "I know that."
+The Chinese wanted mightily to know what I said to the pilot, and I gave
+him leave to tell him a few days after, for we were then almost out of
+their country, and he was to leave us a little time after this; but when
+he knew what I said, he was dumb all the rest of the way, and we heard no
+more of his fine story of the Chinese power and greatness while he
+stayed.
+
+After we passed this mighty nothing, called a wall, something like the
+Picts' walls so famous in Northumberland, built by the Romans, we began
+to find the country thinly inhabited, and the people rather confined to
+live in fortified towns, as being subject to the inroads and depredations
+of the Tartars, who rob in great armies, and therefore are not to be
+resisted by the naked inhabitants of an open country.  And here I began
+to find the necessity of keeping together in a caravan as we travelled,
+for we saw several troops of Tartars roving about; but when I came to see
+them distinctly, I wondered more that the Chinese empire could be
+conquered by such contemptible fellows; for they are a mere horde of wild
+fellows, keeping no order and understanding no discipline or manner of
+it.  Their horses are poor lean creatures, taught nothing, and fit for
+nothing; and this we found the first day we saw them, which was after we
+entered the wilder part of the country.  Our leader for the day gave
+leave for about sixteen of us to go a hunting as they call it; and what
+was this but a hunting of sheep!--however, it may be called hunting too,
+for these creatures are the wildest and swiftest of foot that ever I saw
+of their kind! only they will not run a great way, and you are sure of
+sport when you begin the chase, for they appear generally thirty or forty
+in a flock, and, like true sheep, always keep together when they fly.
+
+In pursuit of this odd sort of game it was our hap to meet with about
+forty Tartars: whether they were hunting mutton, as we were, or whether
+they looked for another kind of prey, we know not; but as soon as they
+saw us, one of them blew a hideous blast on a kind of horn.  This was to
+call their friends about them, and in less than ten minutes a troop of
+forty or fifty more appeared, at about a mile distance; but our work was
+over first, as it happened.
+
+One of the Scots merchants of Moscow happened to be amongst us; and as
+soon as he heard the horn, he told us that we had nothing to do but to
+charge them without loss of time; and drawing us up in a line, he asked
+if we were resolved.  We told him we were ready to follow him; so he rode
+directly towards them.  They stood gazing at us like a mere crowd, drawn
+up in no sort of order at all; but as soon as they saw us advance, they
+let fly their arrows, which missed us, very happily.  Not that they
+mistook their aim, but their distance; for their arrows all fell a little
+short of us, but with so true an aim, that had we been about twenty yards
+nearer we must have had several men wounded, if not killed.
+
+Immediately we halted, and though it was at a great distance, we fired,
+and sent them leaden bullets for wooden arrows, following our shot full
+gallop, to fall in among them sword in hand--for so our bold Scot that
+led us directed.  He was, indeed, but a merchant, but he behaved with
+such vigour and bravery on this occasion, and yet with such cool courage
+too, that I never saw any man in action fitter for command.  As soon as
+we came up to them we fired our pistols in their faces and then drew; but
+they fled in the greatest confusion imaginable.  The only stand any of
+them made was on our right, where three of them stood, and, by signs,
+called the rest to come back to them, having a kind of scimitar in their
+hands, and their bows hanging to their backs.  Our brave commander,
+without asking anybody to follow him, gallops up close to them, and with
+his fusee knocks one of them off his horse, killed the second with his
+pistol, and the third ran away.  Thus ended our fight; but we had this
+misfortune attending it, that all our mutton we had in chase got away.  We
+had not a man killed or hurt; as for the Tartars, there were about five
+of them killed--how many were wounded we knew not; but this we knew, that
+the other party were so frightened with the noise of our guns that they
+fled, and never made any attempt upon us.
+
+We were all this while in the Chinese dominions, and therefore the
+Tartars were not so bold as afterwards; but in about five days we entered
+a vast wild desert, which held us three days' and nights' march; and we
+were obliged to carry our water with us in great leathern bottles, and to
+encamp all night, just as I have heard they do in the desert of Arabia.  I
+asked our guides whose dominion this was in, and they told me this was a
+kind of border that might be called no man's land, being a part of Great
+Karakathy, or Grand Tartary: that, however, it was all reckoned as
+belonging to China, but that there was no care taken here to preserve it
+from the inroads of thieves, and therefore it was reckoned the worst
+desert in the whole march, though we were to go over some much larger.
+
+In passing this frightful wilderness we saw, two or three times, little
+parties of the Tartars, but they seemed to be upon their own affairs, and
+to have no design upon us; and so, like the man who met the devil, if
+they had nothing to say to us, we had nothing to say to them: we let them
+go.  Once, however, a party of them came so near as to stand and gaze at
+us.  Whether it was to consider if they should attack us or not, we knew
+not; but when we had passed at some distance by them, we made a
+rear-guard of forty men, and stood ready for them, letting the caravan
+pass half a mile or thereabouts before us.  After a while they marched
+off, but they saluted us with five arrows at their parting, which wounded
+a horse so that it disabled him, and we left him the next day, poor
+creature, in great need of a good farrier.  We saw no more arrows or
+Tartars that time.
+
+We travelled near a month after this, the ways not being so good as at
+first, though still in the dominions of the Emperor of China, but lay for
+the most part in the villages, some of which were fortified, because of
+the incursions of the Tartars.  When we were come to one of these towns
+(about two days and a half's journey before we came to the city of Naum),
+I wanted to buy a camel, of which there are plenty to be sold all the way
+upon that road, and horses also, such as they are, because, so many
+caravans coming that way, they are often wanted.  The person that I spoke
+to to get me a camel would have gone and fetched one for me; but I, like
+a fool, must be officious, and go myself along with him; the place was
+about two miles out of the village, where it seems they kept the camels
+and horses feeding under a guard.
+
+I walked it on foot, with my old pilot and a Chinese, being very desirous
+of a little variety.  When we came to the place it was a low, marshy
+ground, walled round with stones, piled up dry, without mortar or earth
+among them, like a park, with a little guard of Chinese soldiers at the
+door.  Having bought a camel, and agreed for the price, I came away, and
+the Chinese that went with me led the camel, when on a sudden came up
+five Tartars on horseback.  Two of them seized the fellow and took the
+camel from him, while the other three stepped up to me and my old pilot,
+seeing us, as it were, unarmed, for I had no weapon about me but my
+sword, which could but ill defend me against three horsemen.  The first
+that came up stopped short upon my drawing my sword, for they are arrant
+cowards; but a second, coming upon my left, gave me a blow on the head,
+which I never felt till afterwards, and wondered, when I came to myself,
+what was the matter, and where I was, for he laid me flat on the ground;
+but my never-failing old pilot, the Portuguese, had a pistol in his
+pocket, which I knew nothing of, nor the Tartars either: if they had, I
+suppose they would not have attacked us, for cowards are always boldest
+when there is no danger.  The old man seeing me down, with a bold heart
+stepped up to the fellow that had struck me, and laying hold of his arm
+with one hand, and pulling him down by main force a little towards him,
+with the other shot him into the head, and laid him dead upon the spot.
+He then immediately stepped up to him who had stopped us, as I said, and
+before he could come forward again, made a blow at him with a scimitar,
+which he always wore, but missing the man, struck his horse in the side
+of his head, cut one of the ears off by the root, and a great slice down
+by the side of his face.  The poor beast, enraged with the wound, was no
+more to be governed by his rider, though the fellow sat well enough too,
+but away he flew, and carried him quite out of the pilot's reach; and at
+some distance, rising upon his hind legs, threw down the Tartar, and fell
+upon him.
+
+In this interval the poor Chinese came in who had lost the camel, but he
+had no weapon; however, seeing the Tartar down, and his horse fallen upon
+him, away he runs to him, and seizing upon an ugly weapon he had by his
+side, something like a pole-axe, he wrenched it from him, and made shift
+to knock his Tartarian brains out with it.  But my old man had the third
+Tartar to deal with still; and seeing he did not fly, as he expected, nor
+come on to fight him, as he apprehended, but stood stock still, the old
+man stood still too, and fell to work with his tackle to charge his
+pistol again: but as soon as the Tartar saw the pistol away he scoured,
+and left my pilot, my champion I called him afterwards, a complete
+victory.
+
+By this time I was a little recovered.  I thought, when I first began to
+wake, that I had been in a sweet sleep; but, as I said above, I wondered
+where I was, how I came upon the ground, and what was the matter.  A few
+moments after, as sense returned, I felt pain, though I did not know
+where; so I clapped my hand to my head, and took it away bloody; then I
+felt my head ache: and in a moment memory returned, and everything was
+present to me again.  I jumped upon my feet instantly, and got hold of my
+sword, but no enemies were in view: I found a Tartar lying dead, and his
+horse standing very quietly by him; and, looking further, I saw my
+deliverer, who had been to see what the Chinese had done, coming back
+with his hanger in his hand.  The old man, seeing me on my feet, came
+running to me, and joyfully embraced me, being afraid before that I had
+been killed.  Seeing me bloody, he would see how I was hurt; but it was
+not much, only what we call a broken head; neither did I afterwards find
+any great inconvenience from the blow, for it was well again in two or
+three days.
+
+We made no great gain, however, by this victory, for we lost a camel and
+gained a horse.  I paid for the lost camel, and sent for another; but I
+did not go to fetch it myself: I had had enough of that.
+
+The city of Naum, which we were approaching, is a frontier of the Chinese
+empire, and is fortified in their fashion.  We wanted, as I have said,
+above two days' journey of this city when messengers were sent express to
+every part of the road to tell all travellers and caravans to halt till
+they had a guard sent for them; for that an unusual body of Tartars,
+making ten thousand in all, had appeared in the way, about thirty miles
+beyond the city.
+
+This was very bad news to travellers: however, it was carefully done of
+the governor, and we were very glad to hear we should have a guard.
+Accordingly, two days after, we had two hundred soldiers sent us from a
+garrison of the Chinese on our left, and three hundred more from the city
+of Naum, and with these we advanced boldly.  The three hundred soldiers
+from Naum marched in our front, the two hundred in our rear, and our men
+on each side of our camels, with our baggage and the whole caravan in the
+centre; in this order, and well prepared for battle, we thought ourselves
+a match for the whole ten thousand Mogul Tartars, if they had appeared;
+but the next day, when they did appear, it was quite another thing.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV--DESCRIPTION OF AN IDOL, WHICH THEY DESTROY
+
+
+Early in the morning, when marching from a little town called Changu, we
+had a river to pass, which we were obliged to ferry; and, had the Tartars
+had any intelligence, then had been the time to have attacked us, when
+the caravan being over, the rear-guard was behind; but they did not
+appear there.  About three hours after, when we were entered upon a
+desert of about fifteen or sixteen miles over, we knew by a cloud of dust
+they raised, that the enemy was at hand, and presently they came on upon
+the spur.
+
+Our Chinese guards in the front, who had talked so big the day before,
+began to stagger; and the soldiers frequently looked behind them, a
+certain sign in a soldier that he is just ready to run away.  My old
+pilot was of my mind; and being near me, called out, "Seignior Inglese,
+these fellows must be encouraged, or they will ruin us all; for if the
+Tartars come on they will never stand it."--"If am of your mind," said I;
+"but what must be done?"--"Done?" says he, "let fifty of our men advance,
+and flank them on each wing, and encourage them.  They will fight like
+brave fellows in brave company; but without this they will every man turn
+his back."  Immediately I rode up to our leader and told him, who was
+exactly of our mind; accordingly, fifty of us marched to the right wing,
+and fifty to the left, and the rest made a line of rescue; and so we
+marched, leaving the last two hundred men to make a body of themselves,
+and to guard the camels; only that, if need were, they should send a
+hundred men to assist the last fifty.
+
+At last the Tartars came on, and an innumerable company they were; how
+many we could not tell, but ten thousand, we thought, at the least.  A
+party of them came on first, and viewed our posture, traversing the
+ground in the front of our line; and, as we found them within gunshot,
+our leader ordered the two wings to advance swiftly, and give them a
+salvo on each wing with their shot, which was done.  They then went off,
+I suppose to give an account of the reception they were like to meet
+with; indeed, that salute cloyed their stomachs, for they immediately
+halted, stood a while to consider of it, and wheeling off to the left,
+they gave over their design for that time, which was very agreeable to
+our circumstances.
+
+Two days after we came to the city of Naun, or Naum; we thanked the
+governor for his care of us, and collected to the value of a hundred
+crowns, or thereabouts, which we gave to the soldiers sent to guard us;
+and here we rested one day.  This is a garrison indeed, and there were
+nine hundred soldiers kept here; but the reason of it was, that formerly
+the Muscovite frontiers lay nearer to them than they now do, the
+Muscovites having abandoned that part of the country, which lies from
+this city west for about two hundred miles, as desolate and unfit for
+use; and more especially being so very remote, and so difficult to send
+troops thither for its defence; for we were yet above two thousand miles
+from Muscovy properly so called.  After this we passed several great
+rivers, and two dreadful deserts; one of which we were sixteen days
+passing over; and on the 13th of April we came to the frontiers of the
+Muscovite dominions.  I think the first town or fortress, whichever it
+may he called, that belonged to the Czar, was called Arguna, being on the
+west side of the river Arguna.
+
+I could not but feel great satisfaction that I was arrived in a country
+governed by Christians; for though the Muscovites do, in my opinion, but
+just deserve the name of Christians, yet such they pretend to be, and are
+very devout in their way.  It would certainly occur to any reflecting man
+who travels the world as I have done, what a blessing it is to be brought
+into the world where the name of God and a Redeemer is known, adored, and
+worshipped; and not where the people, given up to strong delusions,
+worship the devil, and prostrate themselves to monsters, elements, horrid-
+shaped animals, and monstrous images.  Not a town or city we passed
+through but had their pagodas, their idols, and their temples, and
+ignorant people worshipping even the works of their own hands.  Now we
+came where, at least, a face of the Christian worship appeared; where the
+knee was bowed to Jesus: and whether ignorantly or not, yet the Christian
+religion was owned, and the name of the true God was called upon and
+adored; and it made my soul rejoice to see it.  I saluted the brave Scots
+merchant with my first acknowledgment of this; and taking him by the
+hand, I said to him, "Blessed be God, we are once again amongst
+Christians."  He smiled, and answered, "Do not rejoice too soon,
+countryman; these Muscovites are but an odd sort of Christians; and but
+for the name of it you may see very little of the substance for some
+months further of our journey."--"Well," says I, "but still it is better
+than paganism, and worshipping of devils."--"Why, I will tell you," says
+he; "except the Russian soldiers in the garrisons, and a few of the
+inhabitants of the cities upon the road, all the rest of this country,
+for above a thousand miles farther, is inhabited by the worst and most
+ignorant of pagans."  And so, indeed, we found it.
+
+We now launched into the greatest piece of solid earth that is to be
+found in any part of the world; we had, at least, twelve thousand miles
+to the sea eastward; two thousand to the bottom of the Baltic Sea
+westward; and above three thousand, if we left that sea, and went on
+west, to the British and French channels: we had full five thousand miles
+to the Indian or Persian Sea south; and about eight hundred to the Frozen
+Sea north.
+
+We advanced from the river Arguna by easy and moderate journeys, and were
+very visibly obliged to the care the Czar has taken to have cities and
+towns built in as many places as it is possible to place them, where his
+soldiers keep garrison, something like the stationary soldiers placed by
+the Romans in the remotest countries of their empire; some of which I had
+read of were placed in Britain, for the security of commerce, and for the
+lodging of travellers.  Thus it was here; for wherever we came, though at
+these towns and stations the garrisons and governors were Russians, and
+professed Christians, yet the inhabitants were mere pagans, sacrificing
+to idols, and worshipping the sun, moon, and stars, or all the host of
+heaven; and not only so, but were, of all the heathens and pagans that
+ever I met with, the most barbarous, except only that they did not eat
+men's flesh.
+
+Some instances of this we met with in the country between Arguna, where
+we enter the Muscovite dominions, and a city of Tartars and Russians
+together, called Nortziousky, in which is a continued desert or forest,
+which cost us twenty days to travel over.  In a village near the last of
+these places I had the curiosity to go and see their way of living, which
+is most brutish and unsufferable.  They had, I suppose, a great sacrifice
+that day; for there stood out, upon an old stump of a tree, a diabolical
+kind of idol made of wood; it was dressed up, too, in the most filthy
+manner; its upper garment was of sheepskins, with the wool outward; a
+great Tartar bonnet on the head, with two horns growing through it; it
+was about eight feet high, yet had no feet or legs, nor any other
+proportion of parts.
+
+This scarecrow was set up at the outer side of the village; and when I
+came near to it there were sixteen or seventeen creatures all lying flat
+upon the ground round this hideous block of wood; I saw no motion among
+them, any more than if they had been all logs, like the idol, and at
+first I really thought they had been so; but, when I came a little
+nearer, they started up upon their feet, and raised a howl, as if it had
+been so many deep-mouthed hounds, and walked away, as if they were
+displeased at our disturbing them.  A little way off from the idol, and
+at the door of a hut, made of sheep and cow skins dried, stood three men
+with long knives in their hands; and in the middle of the tent appeared
+three sheep killed, and one young bullock.  These, it seems, were
+sacrifices to that senseless log of an idol; the three men were priests
+belonging to it, and the seventeen prostrated wretches were the people
+who brought the offering, and were offering their prayers to that stock.
+
+I confess I was more moved at their stupidity and brutish worship of a
+hobgoblin than ever I was at anything in my life, and, overcome with
+rage, I rode up to the hideous idol, and with my sword made a stroke at
+the bonnet that was on its head, and cut it in two; and one of our men
+that was with me, taking hold of the sheepskin that covered it, pulled at
+it, when, behold, a most hideous outcry ran through the village, and two
+or three hundred people came about my ears, so that I was glad to scour
+for it, for some had bows and arrows; but I resolved from that moment to
+visit them again.  Our caravan rested three nights at the town, which was
+about four miles off, in order to provide some horses which they wanted,
+several of the horses having been lamed and jaded with the long march
+over the last desert; so we had some leisure here to put my design in
+execution.  I communicated it to the Scots merchant, of whose courage I
+had sufficient testimony; I told him what I had seen, and with what
+indignation I had since thought that human nature could be so degenerate;
+I told him if I could get but four or five men well armed to go with me,
+I was resolved to go and destroy that vile, abominable idol, and let them
+see that it had no power to help itself, and consequently could not be an
+object of worship, or to be prayed to, much less help them that offered
+sacrifices to it.
+
+He at first objected to my plan as useless, seeing that, owing to the
+gross ignorance of the people, they could not be brought to profit by the
+lesson I meant to teach them; and added that, from his knowledge of the
+country and its customs, he feared we should fall into great peril by
+giving offence to these brutal idol worshippers.  This somewhat stayed my
+purpose, but I was still uneasy all that day to put my project in
+execution; and that evening, meeting the Scots merchant in our walk about
+the town, I again called upon him to aid me in it.  When he found me
+resolute he said that, on further thoughts, he could not but applaud the
+design, and told me I should not go alone, but he would go with me; but
+he would go first and bring a stout fellow, one of his countrymen, to go
+also with us; "and one," said he, "as famous for his zeal as you can
+desire any one to be against such devilish things as these."  So we
+agreed to go, only we three and my man-servant, and resolved to put it in
+execution the following night about midnight, with all possible secrecy.
+
+We thought it better to delay it till the next night, because the caravan
+being to set forward in the morning, we suppose the governor could not
+pretend to give them any satisfaction upon us when we were out of his
+power.  The Scots merchant, as steady in his resolution for the
+enterprise as bold in executing, brought me a Tartar's robe or gown of
+sheepskins, and a bonnet, with a bow and arrows, and had provided the
+same for himself and his countryman, that the people, if they saw us,
+should not determine who we were.  All the first night we spent in mixing
+up some combustible matter, with aqua vitae, gunpowder, and such other
+materials as we could get; and having a good quantity of tar in a little
+pot, about an hour after night we set out upon our expedition.
+
+We came to the place about eleven o'clock at night, and found that the
+people had not the least suspicion of danger attending their idol.  The
+night was cloudy: yet the moon gave us light enough to see that the idol
+stood just in the same posture and place that it did before.  The people
+seemed to be all at their rest; only that in the great hut, where we saw
+the three priests, we saw a light, and going up close to the door, we
+heard people talking as if there were five or six of them; we concluded,
+therefore, that if we set wildfire to the idol, those men would come out
+immediately, and run up to the place to rescue it from destruction; and
+what to do with them we knew not.  Once we thought of carrying it away,
+and setting fire to it at a distance; but when we came to handle it, we
+found it too bulky for our carriage, so we were at a loss again.  The
+second Scotsman was for setting fire to the hut, and knocking the
+creatures that were there on the head when they came out; but I could not
+join with that; I was against killing them, if it were possible to avoid
+it.  "Well, then," said the Scots merchant, "I will tell you what we will
+do: we will try to make them prisoners, tie their hands, and make them
+stand and see their idol destroyed."
+
+As it happened, we had twine or packthread enough about us, which we used
+to tie our firelocks together with; so we resolved to attack these people
+first, and with as little noise as we could.  The first thing we did, we
+knocked at the door, when one of the priests coming to it, we immediately
+seized upon him, stopped his mouth, and tied his hands behind him, and
+led him to the idol, where we gagged him that he might not make a noise,
+tied his feet also together, and left him on the ground.
+
+Two of us then waited at the door, expecting that another would come out
+to see what the matter was; but we waited so long till the third man came
+back to us; and then nobody coming out, we knocked again gently, and
+immediately out came two more, and we served them just in the same
+manner, but were obliged to go all with them, and lay them down by the
+idol some distance from one another; when, going back, we found two more
+were come out of the door, and a third stood behind them within the door.
+We seized the two, and immediately tied them, when the third, stepping
+back and crying out, my Scots merchant went in after them, and taking out
+a composition we had made that would only smoke and stink, he set fire to
+it, and threw it in among them.  By that time the other Scotsman and my
+man, taking charge of the two men already bound, and tied together also
+by the arm, led them away to the idol, and left them there, to see if
+their idol would relieve them, making haste back to us.
+
+When the fuze we had thrown in had filled the hut with so much smoke that
+they were almost suffocated, we threw in a small leather bag of another
+kind, which flamed like a candle, and, following it in, we found there
+were but four people, who, as we supposed, had been about some of their
+diabolical sacrifices.  They appeared, in short, frightened to death, at
+least so as to sit trembling and stupid, and not able to speak either,
+for the smoke.
+
+We quickly took them from the hut, where the smoke soon drove us out,
+bound them as we had done the other, and all without any noise.  Then we
+carried them all together to the idol; when we came there, we fell to
+work with him.  First, we daubed him all over, and his robes also, with
+tar, and tallow mixed with brimstone; then we stopped his eyes and ears
+and mouth full of gunpowder, and wrapped up a great piece of wildfire in
+his bonnet; then sticking all the combustibles we had brought with us
+upon him, we looked about to see if we could find anything else to help
+to burn him; when my Scotsman remembered that by the hut, where the men
+were, there lay a heap of dry forage; away he and the other Scotsman ran
+and fetched their arms full of that.  When we had done this, we took all
+our prisoners, and brought them, having untied their feet and ungagged
+their mouths, and made them stand up, and set them before their monstrous
+idol, and then set fire to the whole.
+
+We stayed by it a quarter of an hour or thereabouts, till the powder in
+the eyes and mouth and ears of the idol blew up, and, as we could
+perceive, had split altogether; and in a word, till we saw it burned so
+that it would soon be quite consumed.  We then began to think of going
+away; but the Scotsman said, "No, we must not go, for these poor deluded
+wretches will all throw themselves into the fire, and burn themselves
+with the idol."  So we resolved to stay till the forage has burned down
+too, and then came away and left them.  After the feat was performed, we
+appeared in the morning among our fellow-travellers, exceedingly busy in
+getting ready for our journey; nor could any man suppose that we had been
+anywhere but in our beds.
+
+But the affair did not end so; the next day came a great number of the
+country people to the town gates, and in a most outrageous manner
+demanded satisfaction of the Russian governor for the insulting their
+priests and burning their great Cham Chi-Thaungu.  The people of
+Nertsinkay were at first in a great consternation, for they said the
+Tartars were already no less than thirty thousand strong.  The Russian
+governor sent out messengers to appease them, assuring them that he knew
+nothing of it, and that there had not a soul in his garrison been abroad,
+so that it could not be from anybody there: but if they could let him
+know who did it, they should be exemplarily punished.  They returned
+haughtily, that all the country reverenced the great Cham Chi-Thaungu,
+who dwelt in the sun, and no mortal would have dared to offer violence to
+his image but some Christian miscreant; and they therefore resolved to
+denounce war against him and all the Russians, who, they said, were
+miscreants and Christians.
+
+The governor, unwilling to make a breach, or to have any cause of war
+alleged to be given by him, the Czar having strictly charged him to treat
+the conquered country with gentleness, gave them all the good words he
+could.  At last he told them there was a caravan gone towards Russia that
+morning, and perhaps it was some of them who had done them this injury;
+and that if they would be satisfied with that, he would send after them
+to inquire into it.  This seemed to appease them a little; and
+accordingly the governor sent after us, and gave us a particular account
+how the thing was; intimating withal, that if any in our caravan had done
+it they should make their escape; but that whether we had done it or no,
+we should make all the haste forward that was possible: and that, in the
+meantime, he would keep them in play as long as he could.
+
+This was very friendly in the governor; however, when it came to the
+caravan, there was nobody knew anything of the matter; and as for us that
+were guilty, we were least of all suspected.  However, the captain of the
+caravan for the time took the hint that the governor gave us, and we
+travelled two days and two nights without any considerable stop, and then
+we lay at a village called Plothus: nor did we make any long stop here,
+but hastened on towards Jarawena, another Muscovite colony, and where we
+expected we should be safe.  But upon the second day's march from
+Plothus, by the clouds of dust behind us at a great distance, it was
+plain we were pursued.  We had entered a vast desert, and had passed by a
+great lake called Schanks Oser, when we perceived a large body of horse
+appear on the other side of the lake, to the north, we travelling west.
+We observed they went away west, as we did, but had supposed we would
+have taken that side of the lake, whereas we very happily took the south
+side; and in two days more they disappeared again: for they, believing we
+were still before them, pushed on till they came to the Udda, a very
+great river when it passes farther north, but when we came to it we found
+it narrow and fordable.
+
+The third day they had either found their mistake, or had intelligence of
+us, and came pouring in upon us towards dusk.  We had, to our great
+satisfaction, just pitched upon a convenient place for our camp; for as
+we had just entered upon a desert above five hundred miles over, where we
+had no towns to lodge at, and, indeed, expected none but the city
+Jarawena, which we had yet two days' march to; the desert, however, had
+some few woods in it on this side, and little rivers, which ran all into
+the great river Udda; it was in a narrow strait, between little but very
+thick woods, that we pitched our camp that night, expecting to be
+attacked before morning.  As it was usual for the Mogul Tartars to go
+about in troops in that desert, so the caravans always fortify themselves
+every night against them, as against armies of robbers; and it was,
+therefore, no new thing to be pursued.  But we had this night a most
+advantageous camp: for as we lay between two woods, with a little rivulet
+running just before our front, we could not be surrounded, or attacked
+any way but in our front or rear.  We took care also to make our front as
+strong as we could, by placing our packs, with the camels and horses, all
+in a line, on the inside of the river, and felling some trees in our
+rear.
+
+In this posture we encamped for the night; but the enemy was upon us
+before we had finished.  They did not come on like thieves, as we
+expected, but sent three messengers to us, to demand the men to be
+delivered to them that had abused their priests and burned their idol,
+that they might burn them with fire; and upon this, they said, they would
+go away, and do us no further harm, otherwise they would destroy us all.
+Our men looked very blank at this message, and began to stare at one
+another to see who looked with the most guilt in their faces; but nobody
+was the word--nobody did it.  The leader of the caravan sent word he was
+well assured that it was not done by any of our camp; that we were
+peaceful merchants, travelling on our business; that we had done no harm
+to them or to any one else; and that, therefore, they must look further
+for the enemies who had injured them, for we were not the people; so they
+desired them not to disturb us, for if they did we should defend
+ourselves.
+
+They were far from being satisfied with this for an answer: and a great
+crowd of them came running down in the morning, by break of day, to our
+camp; but seeing us so well posted, they durst come no farther than the
+brook in our front, where they stood in such number as to terrify us very
+much; indeed, some spoke of ten thousand.  Here they stood and looked at
+us a while, and then, setting up a great howl, let fly a crowd of arrows
+among us; but we were well enough sheltered under our baggage, and I do
+not remember that one of us was hurt.
+
+Some time after this we saw them move a little to our right, and expected
+them on the rear: when a cunning fellow, a Cossack of Jarawena, calling
+to the leader of the caravan, said to him, "I will send all these people
+away to Sibeilka."  This was a city four or five days' journey at least
+to the right, and rather behind us.  So he takes his bow and arrows, and
+getting on horseback, he rides away from our rear directly, as it were
+back to Nertsinskay; after this he takes a great circuit about, and comes
+directly on the army of the Tartars as if he had been sent express to
+tell them a long story that the people who had burned the Cham
+Chi-Thaungu were gone to Sibeilka, with a caravan of miscreants, as he
+called them--that is to say, Christians; and that they had resolved to
+burn the god Scal-Isar, belonging to the Tonguses.  As this fellow was
+himself a Tartar, and perfectly spoke their language, he counterfeited so
+well that they all believed him, and away they drove in a violent hurry
+to Sibeilka.  In less than three hours they were entirely out of our
+sight, and we never heard any more of them, nor whether they went to
+Sibeilka or no.  So we passed away safely on to Jarawena, where there was
+a Russian garrison, and there we rested five days.
+
+From this city we had a frightful desert, which held us twenty-three
+days' march.  We furnished ourselves with some tents here, for the better
+accommodating ourselves in the night; and the leader of the caravan
+procured sixteen waggons of the country, for carrying our water or
+provisions, and these carriages were our defence every night round our
+little camp; so that had the Tartars appeared, unless they had been very
+numerous indeed, they would not have been able to hurt us.  We may well
+be supposed to have wanted rest again after this long journey; for in
+this desert we neither saw house nor tree, and scarce a bush; though we
+saw abundance of the sable-hunters, who are all Tartars of Mogul Tartary;
+of which this country is a part; and they frequently attack small
+caravans, but we saw no numbers of them together.
+
+After we had passed this desert we came into a country pretty well
+inhabited--that is to say, we found towns and castles, settled by the
+Czar with garrisons of stationary soldiers, to protect the caravans and
+defend the country against the Tartars, who would otherwise make it very
+dangerous travelling; and his czarish majesty has given such strict
+orders for the well guarding the caravans, that, if there are any Tartars
+heard of in the country, detachments of the garrison are always sent to
+see the travellers safe from station to station.  Thus the governor of
+Adinskoy, whom I had an opportunity to make a visit to, by means of the
+Scots merchant, who was acquainted with him, offered us a guard of fifty
+men, if we thought there was any danger, to the next station.
+
+I thought, long before this, that as we came nearer to Europe we should
+find the country better inhabited, and the people more civilised; but I
+found myself mistaken in both: for we had yet the nation of the Tonguses
+to pass through, where we saw the same tokens of paganism and barbarity
+as before; only, as they were conquered by the Muscovites, they were not
+so dangerous, but for rudeness of manners and idolatry no people in the
+world ever went beyond them.  They are all clothed in skins of beasts,
+and their houses are built of the same; you know not a man from a woman,
+neither by the ruggedness of their countenances nor their clothes; and in
+the winter, when the ground is covered with snow, they live underground
+in vaults, which have cavities going from one to another.  If the Tartars
+had their Cham Chi-Thaungu for a whole village or country, these had
+idols in every hut and every cave.  This country, I reckon, was, from the
+desert I spoke of last, at least four hundred miles, half of it being
+another desert, which took us up twelve days' severe travelling, without
+house or tree; and we were obliged again to carry our own provisions, as
+well water as bread.  After we were out of this desert and had travelled
+two days, we came to Janezay, a Muscovite city or station, on the great
+river Janezay, which, they told us there, parted Europe from Asia.
+
+All the country between the river Oby and the river Janezay is as
+entirely pagan, and the people as barbarous, as the remotest of the
+Tartars.  I also found, which I observed to the Muscovite governors whom
+I had an opportunity to converse with, that the poor pagans are not much
+wiser, or nearer Christianity, for being under the Muscovite government,
+which they acknowledged was true enough--but that, as they said, was none
+of their business; that if the Czar expected to convert his Siberian,
+Tonguse, or Tartar subjects, it should be done by sending clergymen among
+them, not soldiers; and they added, with more sincerity than I expected,
+that it was not so much the concern of their monarch to make the people
+Christians as to make them subjects.
+
+From this river to the Oby we crossed a wild uncultivated country, barren
+of people and good management, otherwise it is in itself a pleasant,
+fruitful, and agreeable country.  What inhabitants we found in it are all
+pagans, except such as are sent among them from Russia; for this is the
+country--I mean on both sides the river Oby--whither the Muscovite
+criminals that are not put to death are banished, and from whence it is
+next to impossible they should ever get away.  I have nothing material to
+say of my particular affairs till I came to Tobolski, the capital city of
+Siberia, where I continued some time on the following account.
+
+We had now been almost seven months on our journey, and winter began to
+come on apace; whereupon my partner and I called a council about our
+particular affairs, in which we found it proper, as we were bound for
+England, to consider how to dispose of ourselves.  They told us of
+sledges and reindeer to carry us over the snow in the winter time, by
+which means, indeed, the Russians travel more in winter than they can in
+summer, as in these sledges they are able to run night and day: the snow,
+being frozen, is one universal covering to nature, by which the hills,
+vales, rivers, and lakes are all smooth and hard is a stone, and they run
+upon the surface, without any regard to what is underneath.
+
+But I had no occasion to urge a winter journey of this kind.  I was bound
+to England, not to Moscow, and my route lay two ways: either I must go on
+as the caravan went, till I came to Jarislaw, and then go off west for
+Narva and the Gulf of Finland, and so on to Dantzic, where I might
+possibly sell my China cargo to good advantage; or I must leave the
+caravan at a little town on the Dwina, from whence I had but six days by
+water to Archangel, and from thence might be sure of shipping either to
+England, Holland, or Hamburg.
+
+Now, to go any one of these journeys in the winter would have been
+preposterous; for as to Dantzic, the Baltic would have been frozen up and
+I could not get passage; and to go by land in those countries was far
+less safe than among the Mogul Tartars; likewise, as to Archangel in
+October, all the ships would be gone from thence, and even the merchants
+who dwell there in summer retire south to Moscow in the winter, when the
+ships are gone; so that I could have nothing but extremity of cold to
+encounter, with a scarcity of provisions, and must lie in an empty town
+all the winter.  Therefore, upon the whole, I thought it much my better
+way to let the caravan go, and make provision to winter where I was, at
+Tobolski, in Siberia, in the latitude of about sixty degrees, where I was
+sure of three things to wear out a cold winter with, viz. plenty of
+provisions, such as the country afforded, a warm house, with fuel enough,
+and excellent company.
+
+I was now in quite a different climate from my beloved island, where I
+never felt cold, except when I had my ague; on the contrary, I had much
+to do to bear any clothes on my back, and never made any fire but without
+doors, which was necessary for dressing my food, &c.  Now I had three
+good vests, with large robes or gowns over them, to hang down to the
+feet, and button close to the wrists; and all these lined with furs, to
+make them sufficiently warm.  As to a warm house, I must confess I
+greatly dislike our way in England of making fires in every room of the
+house in open chimneys, which, when the fire is out, always keeps the air
+in the room cold as the climate.  So I took an apartment in a good house
+in the town, and ordered a chimney to be built like a furnace, in the
+centre of six several rooms, like a stove; the funnel to carry the smoke
+went up one way, the door to come at the fire went in another, and all
+the rooms were kept equally warm, but no fire seen, just as they heat
+baths in England.  By this means we had always the same climate in all
+the rooms, and an equal heat was preserved, and yet we saw no fire, nor
+were ever incommoded with smoke.
+
+The most wonderful thing of all was, that it should be possible to meet
+with good company here, in a country so barbarous as this--one of the
+most northerly parts of Europe.  But this being the country where the
+state criminals of Muscovy, as I observed before, are all banished, the
+city was full of Russian noblemen, gentlemen, soldiers, and courtiers.
+Here was the famous Prince Galitzin, the old German Robostiski, and
+several other persons of note, and some ladies.  By means of my Scotch
+merchant, whom, nevertheless, I parted with here, I made an acquaintance
+with several of these gentlemen; and from these, in the long winter
+nights in which I stayed here, I received several very agreeable visits.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI--SAFE ARRIVAL IN ENGLAND
+
+
+It was talking one night with a certain prince, one of the banished
+ministers of state belonging to the Czar, that the discourse of my
+particular case began.  He had been telling me abundance of fine things
+of the greatness, the magnificence, the dominions, and the absolute power
+of the Emperor of the Russians: I interrupted him, and told him I was a
+greater and more powerful prince than ever the Czar was, though my
+dominion were not so large, or my people so many.  The Russian grandee
+looked a little surprised, and, fixing his eyes steadily upon me, began
+to wonder what I meant.  I said his wonder would cease when I had
+explained myself, and told him the story at large of my living in the
+island; and then how I managed both myself and the people that were under
+me, just as I have since minuted it down.  They were exceedingly taken
+with the story, and especially the prince, who told me, with a sigh, that
+the true greatness of life was to be masters of ourselves; that he would
+not have exchanged such a state of life as mine to be Czar of Muscovy;
+and that he found more felicity in the retirement he seemed to be
+banished to there, than ever he found in the highest authority he enjoyed
+in the court of his master the Czar; that the height of human wisdom was
+to bring our tempers down to our circumstances, and to make a calm
+within, under the weight of the greatest storms without.  When he came
+first hither, he said, he used to tear the hair from his head, and the
+clothes from his back, as others had done before him; but a little time
+and consideration had made him look into himself, as well as round him to
+things without; that he found the mind of man, if it was but once brought
+to reflect upon the state of universal life, and how little this world
+was concerned in its true felicity, was perfectly capable of making a
+felicity for itself, fully satisfying to itself, and suitable to its own
+best ends and desires, with but very little assistance from the world.
+That being now deprived of all the fancied felicity which he enjoyed in
+the full exercise of worldly pleasures, he said he was at leisure to look
+upon the dark side of them, where he found all manner of deformity; and
+was now convinced that virtue only makes a man truly wise, rich, and
+great, and preserves him in the way to a superior happiness in a future
+state; and in this, he said, they were more happy in their banishment
+than all their enemies were, who had the full possession of all the
+wealth and power they had left behind them.  "Nor, sir," says he, "do I
+bring my mind to this politically, from the necessity of my
+circumstances, which some call miserable; but, if I know anything of
+myself, I would not now go back, though the Czar my master should call
+me, and reinstate me in all my former grandeur."
+
+He spoke this with so much warmth in his temper, so much earnestness and
+motion of his spirits, that it was evident it was the true sense of his
+soul; there was no room to doubt his sincerity.  I told him I once
+thought myself a kind of monarch in my old station, of which I had given
+him an account; but that I thought he was not only a monarch, but a great
+conqueror; for he that had got a victory over his own exorbitant desires,
+and the absolute dominion over himself, he whose reason entirely governs
+his will, is certainly greater than he that conquers a city.
+
+I had been here eight months, and a dark, dreadful winter I thought it;
+the cold so intense that I could not so much as look abroad without being
+wrapped in furs, and a kind of mask of fur before my face, with only a
+hole for breath, and two for sight: the little daylight we had was for
+three months not above five hours a day, and six at most; only that the
+snow lying on the ground continually, and the weather being clear, it was
+never quite dark.  Our horses were kept, or rather starved, underground;
+and as for our servants, whom we hired here to look after ourselves and
+horses, we had, every now and then, their fingers and toes to thaw and
+take care of, lest they should mortify and fall off.
+
+It is true, within doors we were warm, the houses being close, the walls
+thick, the windows small, and the glass all double.  Our food was chiefly
+the flesh of deer, dried and cured in the season; bread good enough, but
+baked as biscuits; dried fish of several sorts, and some flesh of mutton,
+and of buffaloes, which is pretty good meat.  All the stores of
+provisions for the winter are laid up in the summer, and well cured: our
+drink was water, mixed with aqua vitae instead of brandy; and for a
+treat, mead instead of wine, which, however, they have very good.  The
+hunters, who venture abroad all weathers, frequently brought us in fine
+venison, and sometimes bear's flesh, but we did not much care for the
+last.  We had a good stock of tea, with which we treated our friends, and
+we lived cheerfully and well, all things considered.
+
+It was now March, the days grown considerably longer, and the weather at
+least tolerable; so the other travellers began to prepare sledges to
+carry them over the snow, and to get things ready to be going; but my
+measures being fixed, as I have said, for Archangel, and not for Muscovy
+or the Baltic, I made no motion; knowing very well that the ships from
+the south do not set out for that part of the world till May or June, and
+that if I was there by the beginning of August, it would be as soon as
+any ships would be ready to sail.  Therefore I made no haste to be gone,
+as others did: in a word, I saw a great many people, nay, all the
+travellers, go away before me.  It seems every year they go from thence
+to Muscovy, for trade, to carry furs, and buy necessaries, which they
+bring back with them to furnish their shops: also others went on the same
+errand to Archangel.
+
+In the month of May I began to make all ready to pack up; and, as I was
+doing this, it occurred to me that, seeing all these people were banished
+by the Czar to Siberia, and yet, when they came there, were left at
+liberty to go whither they would, why they did not then go away to any
+part of the world, wherever they thought fit: and I began to examine what
+should hinder them from making such an attempt.  But my wonder was over
+when I entered upon that subject with the person I have mentioned, who
+answered me thus: "Consider, first, sir," said he, "the place where we
+are; and, secondly, the condition we are in; especially the generality of
+the people who are banished thither.  We are surrounded with stronger
+things than bars or bolts; on the north side, an unnavigable ocean, where
+ship never sailed, and boat never swam; every other way we have above a
+thousand miles to pass through the Czar's own dominion, and by ways
+utterly impassable, except by the roads made by the government, and
+through the towns garrisoned by his troops; in short, we could neither
+pass undiscovered by the road, nor subsist any other way, so that it is
+in vain to attempt it."
+
+I was silenced at once, and found that they were in a prison every jot as
+secure as if they had been locked up in the castle at Moscow: however, it
+came into my thoughts that I might certainly be made an instrument to
+procure the escape of this excellent person; and that, whatever hazard I
+ran, I would certainly try if I could carry him off.  Upon this, I took
+an occasion one evening to tell him my thoughts.  I represented to him
+that it was very easy for me to carry him away, there being no guard over
+him in the country; and as I was not going to Moscow, but to Archangel,
+and that I went in the retinue of a caravan, by which I was not obliged
+to lie in the stationary towns in the desert, but could encamp every
+night where I would, we might easily pass uninterrupted to Archangel,
+where I would immediately secure him on board an English ship, and carry
+him safe along with me; and as to his subsistence and other particulars,
+it should be my care till he could better supply himself.
+
+He heard me very attentively, and looked earnestly on me all the while I
+spoke; nay, I could see in his very face that what I said put his spirits
+into an exceeding ferment; his colour frequently changed, his eyes looked
+red, and his heart fluttered, till it might be even perceived in his
+countenance; nor could he immediately answer me when I had done, and, as
+it were, hesitated what he would say to it; but after he had paused a
+little, he embraced me, and said, "How unhappy are we, unguarded
+creatures as we are, that even our greatest acts of friendship are made
+snares unto us, and we are made tempters of one another!"  He then
+heartily thanked me for my offers of service, but withstood resolutely
+the arguments I used to urge him to set himself free.  He declared, in
+earnest terms, that he was fully bent on remaining where he was rather
+than seek to return to his former miserable greatness, as he called it:
+where the seeds of pride, ambition, avarice, and luxury might revive,
+take root, and again overwhelm him.  "Let me remain, dear sir," he said,
+in conclusion--"let me remain in this blessed confinement, banished from
+the crimes of life, rather than purchase a show of freedom at the expense
+of the liberty of my reason, and at the future happiness which I now have
+in my view, but should then, I fear, quickly lose sight of; for I am but
+flesh; a man, a mere man; and have passions and affections as likely to
+possess and overthrow me as any man: Oh, be not my friend and tempter
+both together!"
+
+If I was surprised before, I was quite dumb now, and stood silent,
+looking at him, and, indeed, admiring what I saw.  The struggle in his
+soul was so great that, though the weather was extremely cold, it put him
+into a most violent heat; so I said a word or two, that I would leave him
+to consider of it, and wait on him again, and then I withdrew to my own
+apartment.
+
+About two hours after I heard somebody at or near the door of my room,
+and I was going to open the door, but he had opened it and come in.  "My
+dear friend," says he, "you had almost overset me, but I am recovered.  Do
+not take it ill that I do not close with your offer.  I assure you it is
+not for want of sense of the kindness of it in you; and I came to make
+the most sincere acknowledgment of it to you; but I hope I have got the
+victory over myself."--"My lord," said I, "I hope you are fully satisfied
+that you do not resist the call of Heaven."--"Sir," said he, "if it had
+been from Heaven, the same power would have influenced me to have
+accepted it; but I hope, and am fully satisfied, that it is from Heaven
+that I decline it, and I have infinite satisfaction in the parting, that
+you shall leave me an honest man still, though not a free man."
+
+I had nothing to do but to acquiesce, and make professions to him of my
+having no end in it but a sincere desire to serve him.  He embraced me
+very passionately, and assured me he was sensible of that, and should
+always acknowledge it; and with that he offered me a very fine present of
+sables--too much, indeed, for me to accept from a man in his
+circumstances, and I would have avoided them, but he would not be
+refused.  The next morning I sent my servant to his lordship with a small
+present of tea, and two pieces of China damask, and four little wedges of
+Japan gold, which did not all weigh above six ounces or thereabouts, but
+were far short of the value of his sables, which, when I came to England,
+I found worth near two hundred pounds.  He accepted the tea, and one
+piece of the damask, and one of the pieces of gold, which had a fine
+stamp upon it, of the Japan coinage, which I found he took for the rarity
+of it, but would not take any more: and he sent word by my servant that
+he desired to speak with me.
+
+When I came to him he told me I knew what had passed between us, and
+hoped I would not move him any more in that affair; but that, since I had
+made such a generous offer to him, he asked me if I had kindness enough
+to offer the same to another person that he would name to me, in whom he
+had a great share of concern.  In a word, he told me it was his only son;
+who, though I had not seen him, was in the same condition with himself,
+and above two hundred miles from him, on the other side of the Oby; but
+that, if I consented, he would send for him.
+
+I made no hesitation, but told him I would do it.  I made some ceremony
+in letting him understand that it was wholly on his account; and that,
+seeing I could not prevail on him, I would show my respect to him by my
+concern for his son.  He sent the next day for his son; and in about
+twenty days he came back with the messenger, bringing six or seven
+horses, loaded with very rich furs, which, in the whole, amounted to a
+very great value.  His servants brought the horses into the town, but
+left the young lord at a distance till night, when he came incognito into
+our apartment, and his father presented him to me; and, in short, we
+concerted the manner of our travelling, and everything proper for the
+journey.
+
+I had bought a considerable quantity of sables, black fox-skins, fine
+ermines, and such other furs as are very rich in that city, in exchange
+for some of the goods I had brought from China; in particular for the
+cloves and nutmegs, of which I sold the greatest part here, and the rest
+afterwards at Archangel, for a much better price than I could have got at
+London; and my partner, who was sensible of the profit, and whose
+business, more particularly than mine, was merchandise, was mightily
+pleased with our stay, on account of the traffic we made here.
+
+It was the beginning of June when I left this remote place.  We were now
+reduced to a very small caravan, having only thirty-two horses and camels
+in all, which passed for mine, though my new guest was proprietor of
+eleven of them.  It was natural also that I should take more servants
+with me than I had before; and the young lord passed for my steward; what
+great man I passed for myself I know not, neither did it concern me to
+inquire.  We had here the worst and the largest desert to pass over that
+we met with in our whole journey; I call it the worst, because the way
+was very deep in some places, and very uneven in others; the best we had
+to say for it was, that we thought we had no troops of Tartars or robbers
+to fear, as they never came on this side of the river Oby, or at least
+very seldom; but we found it otherwise.
+
+My young lord had a faithful Siberian servant, who was perfectly
+acquainted with the country, and led us by private roads, so that we
+avoided coming into the principal towns and cities upon the great road,
+such as Tumen, Soloy Kamaskoy, and several others; because the Muscovite
+garrisons which are kept there are very curious and strict in their
+observation upon travellers, and searching lest any of the banished
+persons of note should make their escape that way into Muscovy; but, by
+this means, as we were kept out of the cities, so our whole journey was a
+desert, and we were obliged to encamp and lie in our tents, when we might
+have had very good accommodation in the cities on the way; this the young
+lord was so sensible of, that he would not allow us to lie abroad when we
+came to several cities on the way, but lay abroad himself, with his
+servant, in the woods, and met us always at the appointed places.
+
+We had just entered Europe, having passed the river Kama, which in these
+parts is the boundary between Europe and Asia, and the first city on the
+European side was called Soloy Kamaskoy, that is, the great city on the
+river Kama.  And here we thought to see some evident alteration in the
+people; but we were mistaken, for as we had a vast desert to pass, which
+is near seven hundred miles long in some places, but not above two
+hundred miles over where we passed it, so, till we came past that
+horrible place, we found very little difference between that country and
+Mogul Tartary.  The people are mostly pagans; their houses and towns full
+of idols; and their way of living wholly barbarous, except in the cities
+and villages near them, where they are Christians, as they call
+themselves, of the Greek Church: but have their religion mingled with so
+many relics of superstition, that it is scarce to be known in some places
+from mere sorcery and witchcraft.
+
+In passing this forest (after all our dangers were, to our imagination,
+escaped), I thought, indeed, we must have been plundered and robbed, and
+perhaps murdered, by a troop of thieves: of what country they were I am
+yet at a loss to know; but they were all on horseback, carried bows and
+arrows, and were at first about forty-five in number.  They came so near
+to us as to be within two musket-shot, and, asking no questions,
+surrounded us with their horses, and looked very earnestly upon us twice;
+at length, they placed themselves just in our way; upon which we drew up
+in a little line, before our camels, being not above sixteen men in all.
+Thus drawn up, we halted, and sent out the Siberian servant, who attended
+his lord, to see who they were; his master was the more willing to let
+him go, because he was not a little apprehensive that they were a
+Siberian troop sent out after him.  The man came up near them with a flag
+of truce, and called to them; but though he spoke several of their
+languages, or dialects of languages rather, he could not understand a
+word they said; however, after some signs to him not to come near them at
+his peril, the fellow came back no wiser than he went; only that by their
+dress, he said, he believed them to be some Tartars of Kalmuck, or of the
+Circassian hordes, and that there must be more of them upon the great
+desert, though he never heard that any of them were seen so far north
+before.
+
+This was small comfort to us; however, we had no remedy: there was on our
+left hand, at about a quarter of a mile distance, a little grove, and
+very near the road.  I immediately resolved we should advance to those
+trees, and fortify ourselves as well as we could there; for, first, I
+considered that the trees would in a great measure cover us from their
+arrows; and, in the next place, they could not come to charge us in a
+body: it was, indeed, my old Portuguese pilot who proposed it, and who
+had this excellency attending him, that he was always readiest and most
+apt to direct and encourage us in cases of the most danger.  We advanced
+immediately, with what speed we could, and gained that little wood; the
+Tartars, or thieves, for we knew not what to call them, keeping their
+stand, and not attempting to hinder us.  When we came thither, we found,
+to our great satisfaction, that it was a swampy piece of ground, and on
+the one side a very great spring of water, which, running out in a little
+brook, was a little farther joined by another of the like size; and was,
+in short, the source of a considerable river, called afterwards the
+Wirtska; the trees which grew about this spring were not above two
+hundred, but very large, and stood pretty thick, so that as soon as we
+got in, we saw ourselves perfectly safe from the enemy unless they
+attacked us on foot.
+
+While we stayed here waiting the motion of the enemy some hours, without
+perceiving that they made any movement, our Portuguese, with some help,
+cut several arms of trees half off, and laid them hanging across from one
+tree to another, and in a manner fenced us in.  About two hours before
+night they came down directly upon us; and though we had not perceived
+it, we found they had been joined by some more, so that they were near
+fourscore horse; whereof, however, we fancied some were women.  They came
+on till they were within half-shot of our little wood, when we fired one
+musket without ball, and called to them in the Russian tongue to know
+what they wanted, and bade them keep off; but they came on with a double
+fury up to the wood-side, not imagining we were so barricaded that they
+could not easily break in.  Our old pilot was our captain as well as our
+engineer, and desired us not to fire upon them till they came within
+pistol-shot, that we might be sure to kill, and that when we did fire we
+should be sure to take good aim; we bade him give the word of command,
+which he delayed so long that they were some of them within two pikes'
+length of us when we let fly.  We aimed so true that we killed fourteen
+of them, and wounded several others, as also several of their horses; for
+we had all of us loaded our pieces with two or three bullets apiece at
+least.
+
+They were terribly surprised with our fire, and retreated immediately
+about one hundred rods from us; in which time we loaded our pieces again,
+and seeing them keep that distance, we sallied out, and caught four or
+five of their horses, whose riders we supposed were killed; and coming up
+to the dead, we judged they were Tartars, but knew not how they came to
+make an excursion such an unusual length.
+
+About an hour after they again made a motion to attack us, and rode round
+our little wood to see where they might break in; but finding us always
+ready to face them, they went off again; and we resolved not to stir for
+that night.
+
+We slept little, but spent the most part of the night in strengthening
+our situation, and barricading the entrances into the wood, and keeping a
+strict watch.  We waited for daylight, and when it came, it gave us a
+very unwelcome discovery indeed; for the enemy, who we thought were
+discouraged with the reception they met with, were now greatly increased,
+and had set up eleven or twelve huts or tents, as if they were resolved
+to besiege us; and this little camp they had pitched upon the open plain,
+about three-quarters of a mile from us.  I confess I now gave myself over
+for lost, and all that I had; the loss of my effects did not lie so near
+me, though very considerable, as the thoughts of falling into the hands
+of such barbarians at the latter end of my journey, after so many
+difficulties and hazards as I had gone through, and even in sight of our
+port, where we expected safety and deliverance.  As to my partner, he was
+raging, and declared that to lose his goods would be his ruin, and that
+he would rather die than be starved, and he was for fighting to the last
+drop.
+
+The young lord, a most gallant youth, was for fighting to the last also;
+and my old pilot was of opinion that we were able to resist them all in
+the situation we were then in.  Thus we spent the day in debates of what
+we should do; but towards evening we found that the number of our enemies
+still increased, and we did not know but by the morning they might still
+be a greater number: so I began to inquire of those people we had brought
+from Tobolski if there were no private ways by which we might avoid them
+in the night, and perhaps retreat to some town, or get help to guard us
+over the desert.  The young lord's Siberian servant told us, if we
+designed to avoid them, and not fight, he would engage to carry us off in
+the night, to a way that went north, towards the river Petruz, by which
+he made no question but we might get away, and the Tartars never discover
+it; but, he said, his lord had told him he would not retreat, but would
+rather choose to fight.  I told him he mistook his lord: for that he was
+too wise a man to love fighting for the sake of it; that I knew he was
+brave enough by what he had showed already; but that he knew better than
+to desire seventeen or eighteen men to fight five hundred, unless an
+unavoidable necessity forced them to it; and that if he thought it
+possible for us to escape in the night, we had nothing else to do but to
+attempt it.  He answered, if his lordship gave him such orders, he would
+lose his life if he did not perform it; we soon brought his lord to give
+that order, though privately, and we immediately prepared for putting it
+in practice.
+
+And first, as soon as it began to be dark, we kindled a fire in our
+little camp, which we kept burning, and prepared so as to make it burn
+all night, that the Tartars might conclude we were still there; but as
+soon as it was dark, and we could see the stars (for our guide would not
+stir before), having all our horses and camels ready loaded, we followed
+our new guide, who I soon found steered himself by the north star, the
+country being level for a long way.
+
+After we had travelled two hours very hard, it began to be lighter still;
+not that it was dark all night, but the moon began to rise, so that, in
+short, it was rather lighter than we wished it to be; but by six o'clock
+the next morning we had got above thirty miles, having almost spoiled our
+horses.  Here we found a Russian village, named Kermazinskoy, where we
+rested, and heard nothing of the Kalmuck Tartars that day.  About two
+hours before night we set out again, and travelled till eight the next
+morning, though not quite so hard as before; and about seven o'clock we
+passed a little river, called Kirtza, and came to a good large town
+inhabited by Russians, called Ozomys; there we heard that several troops
+of Kalmucks had been abroad upon the desert, but that we were now
+completely out of danger of them, which was to our great satisfaction.
+Here we were obliged to get some fresh horses, and having need enough of
+rest, we stayed five days; and my partner and I agreed to give the honest
+Siberian who conducted us thither the value of ten pistoles.
+
+In five days more we came to Veussima, upon the river Witzogda, and
+running into the Dwina: we were there, very happily, near the end of our
+travels by land, that river being navigable, in seven days' passage, to
+Archangel.  From hence we came to Lawremskoy, the 3rd of July; and
+providing ourselves with two luggage boats, and a barge for our own
+convenience, we embarked the 7th, and arrived all safe at Archangel the
+18th; having been a year, five months, and three days on the journey,
+including our stay of about eight months at Tobolski.
+
+We were obliged to stay at this place six weeks for the arrival of the
+ships, and must have tarried longer, had not a Hamburgher come in above a
+month sooner than any of the English ships; when, after some
+consideration that the city of Hamburgh might happen to be as good a
+market for our goods as London, we all took freight with him; and, having
+put our goods on board, it was most natural for me to put my steward on
+board to take care of them; by which means my young lord had a sufficient
+opportunity to conceal himself, never coming on shore again all the time
+we stayed there; and this he did that he might not be seen in the city,
+where some of the Moscow merchants would certainly have seen and
+discovered him.
+
+We then set sail from Archangel the 20th of August, the same year; and,
+after no extraordinary bad voyage, arrived safe in the Elbe the 18th of
+September.  Here my partner and I found a very good sale for our goods,
+as well those of China as the sables, &c., of Siberia: and, dividing the
+produce, my share amounted to 3475 pounds, 17s 3d., including about six
+hundred pounds' worth of diamonds, which I purchased at Bengal.
+
+Here the young lord took his leave of us, and went up the Elbe, in order
+to go to the court of Vienna, where he resolved to seek protection and
+could correspond with those of his father's friends who were left alive.
+He did not part without testimonials of gratitude for the service I had
+done him, and for my kindness to the prince, his father.
+
+To conclude: having stayed near four months in Hamburgh, I came from
+thence by land to the Hague, where I embarked in the packet, and arrived
+in London the 10th of January 1705, having been absent from England ten
+years and nine months.  And here, resolving to harass myself no more, I
+am preparing for a longer journey than all these, having lived seventy-
+two years a life of infinite variety, and learned sufficiently to know
+the value of retirement, and the blessing of ending our days in peace.
+
+
+
+***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FURTHER ADVENTURES OF ROBINSON CRUSOE***
+
+
+******* This file should be named 561.txt or 561.zip *******
+
+
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/5/6/561
+
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://www.gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit:
+http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+